COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN

• Document Type: CREST
• Collection: General CIA Records
• Document Number (FOIA) /ESDN (CREST): CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
• Release Decision: RIFPUB
• Original Classification: C
• Document Page Count: 302
• Document Creation Date: December 15, 2016
• Document Release Date: March 26, 2004
• Sequence Number: 1
• Publication Date: January 7, 1971
• Content Type: REPORT

Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
CONFIDENTIAL
REPUBLIC Of VIETNAM
CENTRAL PACIFICATION & DEVELOPMENT COUNCIL
COMMUNITY 6EFENSE
LOCAL DEVELOPMEN
PLAN
 Approved For Relea R O EMIAt01720R001100010001-4
UNITED STATES MILIT
RS
E COMMAND, VIETNAM
96222
7 JAN 1971
SUBJECT: 1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan
1. Attached is the English translation of the GVN's 1971 Community
Defense and Local Development Plan. It is the follow-on to the 1970
Pacification and Development Plan, the Special 1970 Pacification and
Development Plan, and the 1970 Supplemental Pacification and Develop-
ment Plan. It will cover the period 1 March 1971 to 2$ February 1972.
This new time phasing permits a natural integration with the Vietnamese
Lunar Year and the realities of the GVN budgetary process.
2. The 1971 Plan has been simplified by replacing the eight objectives
of 1970 with three broad objectives: Self Defense, Self Government and
Self Development. Under these broad objectives are a number of indi-
vidual programs, including certain new ones. The programs have been
organized under these objectives in order clearly to place the focus on
these three primary purposes of the entire effort, i. e., maintenance of
a permanent security for the population, participation of the population
in government and development of a bette'r..life for the population. While
the plan is written in the context of continued conflict with the Communists,
it reflects the fact that the level of this contest has changed in many areas
from main force or territorial military attack to internal security and
political and economic contest. The plan will also serve as the basis for
continued political and economic momentum in the event the Communist
security threat further declines.
recommendations to the ACofS, CORDS, MAC V.
3. The attached is a translation of a Vietnamese document, and the
English may be somewhat stilted in certain portions. We have left the
translation as literal as possible, consistent with adequate communication
of the policies involved. In the event differences are found to exist be-
tween the two versions (Vietnamese and English), the Vietnamese version
will prevail. If clarification of any points of policy or procedures or
more definitive guidance is required, you are encouraged to submit your
REGRADED UNCLASSIFIED WHEN
SEPARATED FROM CLASSIFIED
Approved For Relea?e O N F I D CEINF AL01
i;969T-1Y1Y1N1(1f1I11-4
 Approved For ReleafP /1D E*T1AL01720R001100010001-4
SUBJECT: 1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan
4. The Community Defense and Local Development Plan and the Com-
bined Campaign Plan, AB 146, complement each other. The Community
Defense and Local Development Plan is, however, the more authoritative
policy document and where minor variations occur, the Community
Defense and Local Development Plan governs. The Plan has been approved
by the President of the Republic, the Prime Minister and the Cabinet, and
thus supersedes any earlier ministerial directive in conflict with it.
5. This document will be regarded as guidance, directive in nature, to
advisory personnel at all echelons. While it is a GVN document, it has
been thoroughly coordinated with MACV. I strongly endorse the 1971
Community Defense and Local Development Plan and request your full
support in its implementation,
DISTRIBUTION:
See Attached Sheet
CREIG ON W. ABRAMS
General, United States Army
Commanding
( k=
Approved For Re1eaCGNIF4B OVU01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 :UN * V 11 ED 00010001-4
DISTRIBUTION LIST
Number of Copies
JCS
10
CofSA
2
CSAF
2
CNO
2
CMC
2
DIA
2
CINCSTRIKE
2
Cmdt, ICAF
2
Cmdt, Nat'l War College
2
Cmdt, Army War College
2
Cmdt, Air War College
2
Cmdt, United States Naval War College
2
CG, CDC, Ft Belvoir
5
USMA
2
USNA
2
USAFA
2
Chief of Military History, HQ DA
1
Civil Affairs School, Ft Gordon
5
CG, USCONARC
1
OSD/ISA VN Desk
3
USA JFK CEN for Military Assistance
3
Cmdt, USCG
1
White House (Attn NSC Staff)
3
USIA
3
CIA, Wash, DC
5
Department of State, EA
3
AID, Wash, DC
5
AID, Wash, DC, Vietnam Bureau
10
Foreign Service Institute
5
Wash Tng Center, AID, Wash, DC
20
Coordinator, O/FSI, Vietnam Tng Center,
Department of State, Wash, DC 20520
Chairman, Operations Support & Research Div
FSI, VNTC, Dept of State
10
CINCPAC
10
CINCUSARPAC
15
CINCPACAF
5
CINCPACFLT
2
CG, FMFPAC
2
USASAPAC
1
COMSEVENTH FLT
1
COMUSMAC THAI
1
COMUS KOREA
1
CMDR 13th AF
1
COMUSMACV
1
Deputy COMUSMACV
1
DE PC ORDS MAC V
10
Chief of Staff
1
s is
1
J-1
5
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 IJNC[IAS1IFIO100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 IJ:NeLFA3SIIpftD1000100014
J-2 5
J-3 10
J-4 5
J-5 5
J-6 3
ACofS, CORDS 2
Sp Asst for Urban Affairs, ACofS, CORDS 1
Exec Asst for Civil Opns, ACofS, CORDS I
CORDS Information Officer 1
Director, Plans, Policy & Programs, CORDS 50
EA CORDS Directorate, Less PP&P 10
Senior Advisor, National Training Center, Vung Tau 2
CORDS Liaison Officer, CPDC/GVN 5
MOI Liaison Officer 1
CORDS Staff, MR 1 25
CORDS Staff, MR 2- 40
CORDS Staff, MR 3 50
CORDS Staff, MR 4 50
EA PSA and MSA 3
EA DSA 1
Records Control, TPB, English 10
Records Control, TPB, Vietnamese 1
SCAG 3
AG I
MACOI 1
MACPD 1
MACT 1
MACDC 1
MACV Comptroller 1
MACFWMA 1
MACMA-AL 5
MACSOG 1
MACIG 1
MACSA 1
SJA 1
CG, USARV 34
CMDR, 7th AF 3
COMNAVFORV 3
CG, I FFORCEV/SA II CORPS 2
CG, II FFORCEV/SA III CORPS 2
CG, XXIV CORPS/SA I CORPS 2
CG, DMAC 2
CMAT 1
525th MI Gp 1
SA Abn Gp I
Railroad Security Advisory Det, APO 96243 1
TMA 1
DCA-SAM 1
AF Adv Gp 2
American Embassy, Saigon 5
JUSPAO 5
USAID, Saigon 25
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 A1f1FD 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 UNetASSlftEO'???100014
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan
ANNEX I: LOCAL SELF-DEFENSE 1-1
Appendix
A Territorial Security I-A- 1
B People's Self-Defense Force I-B-1
C National Police I-C- 1
D Protection of the People Against Terrorism I-D-1
E Chieu Hoi I-E-1
ANNEX II: LOCAL SELF-GOVERNMENT II- 1
Appendix
A People's Administration II-A- 1
B People's Information II-B-1
C People's Organizations II-C-1
D Youth Program II-D-1
ANNEX III: LOCAL SELF-DEVELOPMENT III-1
Appendix
A Land Reform III-A-1
B Agriculture and Fishery III-B-1
C Local Economic Development III-C-1
D War Veterans III-D-1
E A Brighter Life for War Victims III-E- 1
F Public Health III-F- 1
G Education III-G- 1
H Manpower Development III-H-1
I Public Works III-I- 1
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 :UKRUIL k (fOD00010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 :UN ft* f lD00010001-4
J Post and Communications
K Rural Credit
L Province/Municipal Development Program
M Village Self- Development Program
Annex IV - Special Programs
Appendix
A Urban Programs
B Ethnic Minorities
Annex V - Plans and Reports
Appendix
A Plans
B Reports
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : W
 Approved For Release 200"f ffNfJJJ720R001 100010001-4
In 1970, we took advantage of our military victories on all battlefields and adopted the
Pacification and Development Plan as a continuation of the efforts of 1969. The 1970 Plan
emphasized the economic, political, and social development of the villages in order to
achieve their self-defense, self-government, and self-development. The plan had as a
goal the attainment of an A or $ level of security for 90% of the population in all of the
cities, villages, and hamlets.
The RVNAF and FWMAF conducted a series of successful large scale military operations
in 1970 throughout the country, in the border areas, and on Cambodian territory; seriously
disrupted Communist logistical installations; and destroyed many of their armed forces.
The people became more consciousof the development of their own strength and armament
as a result of the expansion and improvement of the hard-core People's Self-Defense For-
ces. These forces with the support of local forces have become a powerful force sufficient
to protect the villages and hamlets.
The People's Self-Defense Forces have become the main defenders of the hamlets and vil-
lages. Additionally, the people have devoted much attention to the improvement of commu-
nity life, have become active participants in elections, and have aided in the development
of an increasingly effective administration, which is well organized and capable of self-
government in all aspects.
The 1970 Special Pacification and Development Plan was initiated on 1 July 70. It called for
the completion of many projects by the people using the resources of their own villages.
There has been an important change in the attitude of the people brought about by this sur-
vey of their own requirements. They now better understand their role in the implementa-
tion of a long-term plan based on the spirit of self-sacrifice to attain self-sufficiency. The
1970 Supplementary Plan has provided the impetus to complete all the goals established for
1970 and to prepare for the implementation of the 1971 Community Defense and Local Deve-
lopment Plan on I Mar 71.
By building upon the successes of the past, we now are able to devote additional re-
sources to the task of gaining the participation of all the people in the process of self-
defense, self-government, and self-development. The guiding principle of Community
Cooperation must be continuosly and universally applied within the concepts of unified
leadership, effective operations, and harmonious actions. The 1971 Plan emphasizes
local affairs as opposed to national affairs and gives recognition to the fact that the
GVN has extended its control over nearly all of the population and populated areas of
Vietnam. It reflects the shift in emphasis to the political, social, and economic ef-
forts that are needed to consolidate the government's control. It recognizes that a
greater share of the burden of defense must be borne locally, by the villagers them-
s elve s.
The Plan places particular stress on rooting-out the VC Infrastructure; improving the
efficiency, effectiveness, and honesty of government administration; stimulating
1
Approved For Release 200CONFIRWI (-OR001100010001-4
 Approved CONfIIJfNM [CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
economic development; and encouraging popular participation in the political process.
In addition, land reform is stressed as a major program. The GVN will build upon its
achievements in the area of pacification by freeing regular ARVN forces for duty
against the larger main force enemy units, particularly in the clearing zones, and by
utilizing the RF/PF against the lesser, local force and guerrilla units.
The eight obejctives designated in the 1970 Plan have been consolidated into three ob-
jectives for 1971:
Local Self-Defense, Local Self-Government, and Local Self-Development.
In addition, there are two special programs:
Urban Program and Ethnic Minority Program.
1. Objective 1. Local Self-Defense (ANNEX I).
The goal is to provide security to all the population of the RVN so that an environ-
ment exists in which all national programs can be successfully completed. Local
Self-Defense consist of five programs:
By taking advantage of the achievements in area security registered in 1970,
the RVNAF can impose itself and operate more effectively in order to expand
security for a greater population in a larger area in 1971. The objective of
1971 is to provide A and B category security to 95% of the total population in
hamlets and khoms, and eliminate all V category hamlets.
Our roads and national manpower and material resources must be protected
to prevent their use by the enemy.
Regional Force units, fully manned, well equipped, and trained, will conduct
effective operations, aggressively patrol, and be targeted against a specific
enemy unit.
Divisional tactical areas of responsibility will be reduced in size in order to
increase the mobility of these major units. A number of main force divisional
units will strategically deploy when a high level of security has been achiev-
ed in specific areas.
b. People's Self-Defense Forces (Appendix I B).
In 1970, the People's Self-Defense Forces were trained and equipped in order
to prepare to assume hamlet internal defense duties. In 1971, the PSDF
will be strengthened through a well-prepared and strong training program.
The strength of 500,000 hard-core PSDF members in 1970 will be increased
to 1,000,000 in 1971 and be equipped with 500,000 weapons at varying ratios
based on local requirements. The one million hard-core PSDF members will
be grouped into 15,000 hard-core Inter-Teams. These 15,000 hard-core PSDF
Inter-Teams will be supported by 15,000 Development Support Inter-Teams on
a one-for-one basis. In addition to the internal defense of populated hamlets,
Approved FCO$FtD[NT/I LIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20'COftfIOt20R001100010001-4
PSDF members will actively participate in the effort to improve living condi-
tions, the People's Information Program, and Youth Programs such as sport
tournaments, campfire rallies, and entertainment shows.
The key element in the fight against the VCI and the reduction of terrorism
and sabotage is the National Police with the support of the PSDF Teams.
Therefore, the National Police must increase in personnel strength, improve
operational efficiency, and be devoted to its duty. In 1971, the National Police
personnel strength will increase to 122,000. All policemen will be well trained
to include political education. All village National Police sub-sections, espe-
cially those in rural areas, must have sufficient personnel. Two thirds of the
local personnel strength must be recruited from among those who are recom-
mended by Hamlet Administrative Committees or Village Councils.
d. Phung Hoang Program (Appendix I D).
Eliminate the Viet Cong Infrastructure (VCI) so that it does not terrorize the
people or sabotage the plan. Enemy elements to be neutralized are the econo-
mic-finance cadre, underground agents, communication-liaison cadre, prose-
lyting cadre and those organizations subordinate to the Communist provisional
government.
Photographs and personal data on the above types, especially confirmed VCI
who have not yet been apprehended, must be posted prominently until they are
captured or otherwise eliminated, so that the people clearly understand the
purpose and benefits of Phung Hoang to themselves and their families. This
will win the people's support for the Government program to neutralize the
VCI. The Phung Hoang program must be effectively implemented by target-
ing accurately within the framework of the law. It must treat every person
f_airlv.
In 1971, the Phung Hoang program must be pushed to the maximum in order to
crush any future incipient insurrection and stabilize the situation throughout
the country to create a new free life for all.
e. Chieu Hoi Program (Appendix I E).
We must push the Chieu Hoi Program to assist the fight against Viet Cong In-
frastructure. PSDF members play an important role in the inducement pro-
gram by contacting families whose relatives have joined the VC ranks and per-
suading them to rally to the national cause. In addition to Armed Propaganda
Teams now being used, Special Armed Propaganda Teams may be created to
be used against North Vietnamese Communists.
Soon after rallying, ralliers must be employed in the operations attacking the
VCI and must also be exploited for information after being released from
Chieu Hoi Centers. The rallier goals for 1971 will be 25,000. Identity cards
must be issued to all ralliers, and vocational training will be given to all ral-
liers at their request. All available means for inducement and increasing the
number of ralliers must be exploited to the maximum.
3
Approved For Release 20CONF I IA&720R001100010001-4
 Approvg it : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
2. Objective 2. Local Self-Government (ANNEX II).
In 1970, we made numerous advances in the improvement of local administration.
Taking full advantage of these gains we will increase the effectiveness of local ad-
ministration through better organization and management and an increased aware-
ness of the meaning of democracy; these concepts will be expressed especially
through the development of self-government capabilities in the administrative,
economic, and financial fields.
The Local Self-Government Objective encompasses the four following Programs:
a. People's Administration Program (Appendix II A).
In 1971, we will improve administration, making it more effective and better
organized, capable of self-management in administrative, economic, and fi-
nancial fields. Province, District, and Village Chiefs and Village/Hamlet
officials must be well trained under the guidance of higher authorities.
The three mobile teams (PMATs) of each Province must operate more effec-
tively. The Village Management Book must be implemented and thoroughly
understood by the responsible officials. Mobile teams will hold seminars
with Village and Hamlet officials. Periodic open meetings, with the majority
of the people participating, must be held to enable the villagers to take part
in the Village and Hamlet administration.
One hundred percent (100%) of the villages and hamlets will complete elections
and be assigned an adequate number of administrative officials.
The village will retain more of the taxes collected. Tax collection will be im-
proved to enable the village to have sufficient financial resources to meet the
villagers' needs and aspirations. While implementing the local income im-
provement program, in 1971, the goal is to have 10% (200) of the total villages
reach complete self-sufficiency, i. e., the central government will provide no
more financial support to these 200 villages. At the same time, 300 villages
will attain 50% self-sufficiency, i.e. , the central government will provide
them with 50% of their financial support, and 500 villages will achieve 25% of
self-sufficiency, i. e. , the central government will give 75% of their operating
cost. In addition, in order to put an end to corruption and economic specula-
tion, the people must be kept informed of all programs, projects, and budgets
of their village. At public buildings and Community Centers, posters and
news bulletins announcing government activities must be posted. Moreover,
a list of the official prices of goods must be posted at public buildings and
trade shops in order to insure that existing laws are observed.
Following their failure in the scheme to invade our country by military forces,
the Communists have directed their strategy to the political field. Consequent-
ly,our people need to be educated on the political struggle to cope with them.
Our effort of spiritual mobilization during recent years will be continued to
help the people understand their rights and duties as citizens and motivate
them to actively participate in the self-defense, self-government, and self-
development programs. During discussions with subordinate personnel and
with the people, all militaryi men, cadre, and civil servants will widely
ALAWN-Map
ApprovC
UW~ Nf~t1 : CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
 Approved For Release 200 1FIDE [20R001100010001-4
publicize government policy and report the people's opinions in the villages
and hamlets to the provincial and central governments.
Special Cadre Teams to include qualified technical Cadre and Rural Develop-
ment Cadre, will carry out the people's political education program. Informa-
tion Cadre of villages and hamlets will be supervised so that they are organ-
ized to operate more effectively. People's Self-Defense Forces, Hamlet
Chiefs, and village and hamlet teachers will be oriented so as to assist in
execution of the People's Information Program.
This program especially supports political education, Phung Hoang, and the
PSDF.
c. People's Organization Program (Appendix II C).
It is desirable that the people be formed into organizations, led in the struggle
against the Communists, and truly united in fraternal spirit in order to build
the country and reform society.
However, the organization and guidance of the people is a subtle process and
should be accomplished with consumate skill and tact, avoiding compulsion in
accordance with the principles of freedom and democracy which characterize
the Republic of Vietnam.
d. Youth Programs (Appendix II D).
To prepare for the future of the country, become strong, progress, and also
create a new generation of youth who are aware and useful citizens who contri-
bute to the nation building process after years of destructive war, the 1970
program for restoration of youth through sports and other activities was
created and expedited with good progress from the villages and hamlets to the
Prefecture, Provinces and Cities. The encouraging results of the recent past
bring the 1971 youth program to the consolidation and development phase.
Under the leadership of the people, youth athletics must be expedited by com-
pleting the establishment of the National Youth Council (privately sponsored).
Youth affairs should encompass all elements of notables and other prestigious
persons on a voluntary basis. The government only gives technical support
and guides activities in accordance with national policy.
In 1971, Youth Programs emphasize political education and technical training
so that youth can make a genuine contribution to nation-building and social
improvement and motivate the people to participate in community development.
All youth sports activities must be widely publicized in order to emphasize
achievements and popularize youth sports programs so that the nation's youth
compare equally with other world youth.
This program still requires close coordination between the DGOY and other
ministries and agencies, especially the Ministry of Education, in order to im-
plement sports and physical training programs in the schools.
3. Objective 3. Local Self-Development (ANNEX III).
The objective of local self-development rests on the achievements of the military,
5
Approved For Release 2CGNfIDENTI*L1720R001100010001-4
 Ap r[I IXt04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
people, cadre, and officials through the past years. It aims to commit all the wo-
ple to the effort to develop the economy and society in order to progress to self-
sufficiency and a brighter life for every man.
a. Land Reform Program (Appendix III A).
In 1970, although the program started late, the identification and issuance of
land progressed satisfactorily. In 1971, 400,000 hectares of land are sched-
uled to be issued to farmers within the "Land-to-the-Tiller" program.
Moreover, in order to make the Montagnard people owners of their own land,
the land survey program will survey 40,000 hectares of land in 1971.
In order to provide satisfactory results for the program of activities, opera-
tioris will particularly emphasize the accomplishment of aerial photos and the
prompt issuance of land certificates to farmers.
b. Agriculture and Fishery Program (Appendix III B).
In order to increase production to meet consumer's requirements, to export
produce, and also to raise the rural people's standard of living, the 1971 Agri-
culture and Fishery Program will energetically push crop diversification and
modernization of agriculture and fishing.
In addition to achieving self-sufficiency in rice production in 1971 by planting
750,000 hectares of high-yield rice, the program also provides for the deve-
lopment of corn and sorghum cultivation, an expansion of pig and poultry rais-
ing, an increase of fishery production, and the execution of small irrigation
projects.
c. Local Economic Development Program (Appendix III C).
Pending the drafting of a long-term National Economic Development Plan,
short term measures are to be used to encourage production increases, im-
prove distribution, and restrain consumption.
In 1971, measures will be conducted to:
- Stabilize the local cost of living.
- Expedite an increase in personal income.
- Improve the system of rice collection and purchase.
- Support the program for industrial development relative to agriculture
and fishing.
d. Veterans Program (Appendix III D).
In recent years, the vast mobilization of all efforts to meet national require-
ments has increased the number of veterans, disabled servicemen, and war
widows.
The 1971 Veterans Program is designed to give additional and more positive
App f ONEN]'3 04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004, 9N FtUENTIAtOROOl 100010001-4
assistance to these people, especially in the protection of health, welfare,
education, and means of existence.
Its main purpose is to carry out effectively Law 8/70 promulgated on 9 Jul 70
concerning the benefits of disabled servicemen, dependents of war dead, and
veterans.
e. War Victims Program (Appendix III E).
The objective of this program in 1971 is a brighter life for war victims, with
emphasis on the following activities:
Rehabilitation and resettlement (or return to village) of temporarily re-
settled refugees, people who have suffered from loss of the head of fami-
ly, or property, and people repatriated from Cambodia. We must reset-
tle permanently or return to village those temporary resettlees remaining
at the end of 1970 and those new ones that come into being in 1971- -a total
of 430,000. We also must complete the permanent resettlement of the re-
fugees from Cambodia and help them normalize their living condition.
(2) Assistance to war orphans, widows, and invalids.
f. Public Health Program (Appendix III F).
The 1971 Public Health Program will center on the following activities.
Initiate a public health effort to improve community living conditions through
the "Sanitary Hamlet" campaign to be conducted throughout the country. Ac-
celerate the preventive medicine program through inoculation and the eradi-
cation of communicable diseases (plagues).
Importance will be attached to the acceleration of the program of cooperation
between civilian and military health agencies, improvement of the quality of
personnel of all echelons, and initiation of a system of treatment which re-
quires the payment of fees, so that the public health program can be more
self-supporting.
Education Program (Appendix III G).
In regard to education, emphasis will be placed on the improvement of tech-
nical programs and vocational guidance programs, especially those reserved
for ex-servicemen and temporarily resettled refugees, and also on the im-
provement of the operation of the Agriculture and Animal Husbandry Training
Centers of ethnic minorities.
The number of secondary education teachers will be raised from 16,270 to
19,300 by the end of 1971, and it is planned to admit 62. 5% of the total of pri-
mary students who apply for admission to the 6th grade of public secondary
schools through a competitive examination in school year 1971-1972.
In addition, the regionalization of education will be accelerated through the
creation of 14 educational sectors and Regional Education Coordination and
Development Councils.
Approved For Release 209ONFIBEIRK20R001100010001-4
 Ap ff I DN1'11t?4101 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
In order to permit an appropriate distribution of manpower resources to meet
national requirements, importance will be attached to the Manpower Develop-
ment Program in 1971.
Development of a system of occupational classification and the training of spe-
cialists in the occupational analysis and classification will be expedited.
The guidance, coordination, and consolidation of vocational training programs
of different ministries will be accelerated.
The 1971 Public Works Program provides for the repair of 3,200 km of national
and inter-provincial roads and another 1,320 km of local roads.
Special attention will be paid to the increase of electricity output in Saigon as
well as in the provinces, support of the electrification of resettlement centers,
and formation of new rural electric cooperatives.
The increase of water supply for both rural and urban populations also will be
given attention.
In support of the local economy development effort, the program of railway
reconstruction will continue. The operation of dredges will be improved to
increase the annual output to 4,000,000 cubic meters per year.
The postal system will be improved down to the village level through a 50% in-
crease in the number of village postal stations. Each of the important autono-
mous cities such as Danang, Qui Nhon, Nha Trang, Can Tho, etc. will receive
1,000 new telephones in 1971.
In the increase of agricultural and fishery production, the Agricultural Deve-
lopment Bank will play an increasingly important role in granting direct or in-
direct credit to farmers and fishermen through Village credit committees to be
established.
The increase of Agricultural Credit funds will be pursued, and 24 new agricul-
tural banks will be established to meet credit requirements.
During 1971, the Prefecture, Province, and City Development Program will
continue. This program will include local roads and bridges, education,
health, livestock, agriculture and fishery. The two funds available for sup-
port are:
(1) The National Fund for Local Development, placed under the management
of the Central Pacification and Development Council and its subordinate
Ap %PRUK iD&F 04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200G0H FtD[1Nf L20R001100010001-4
agencies at the Prefecture, Province, and City levels.
Province and Municipal Development funds for the implementation of de-
velopment projects, approved by the Prefecture, Provincial, and City
Council.
m. Village Self-Development Program (Appendix III M).
The Village Self-Development Program will be accelerated during 1971 with a
new direction. Income-generating projects will be implemented with the Vil-
lage Credit Program.
The main objective of the program is still to develop the spirit of democracy
in the rural area and the spirit of community cooperation among the people
and between the people and the government, and at the same time to create an
opportunity for the village government to plan village development programs
and manage village resources in such a way as to advance to self-sufficiency.
In addition to programs relative to the three objectives: self-defense, self-government,
and self-development, the 1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan also
provides for the implementation of two special programs, which calls for the coordina-
tion of all government ministries and agencies. These are:
These programs are dictated by the recognition of the fact that population is grow-
ing in urban areas and necessary improvements are required in the living condi-
tions of the inhabitants of these areas.
The spirit of Community Cooperation must be developed intensively in the imple-
mentation of urban programs due to the complexity of problems and the amorphous
nature of urban communities.
a. Improve existing administrative organizations of the autonomous cities to
make them capable of meeting development needs.
c. Develop self-defense and security programs, especially a more effective in-
telligence network in urban areas.
e. Develop sports associations; organize campaigns designed to carry out public
sanitation projects, special projects of social welfare, public works,
and information.
Approved For Release 200~N FI1DEN(A L20R001 100010001-4
 Approved For R4? fft[N fIA tDP80R01720R001100010001-4
a. The land identification program must be carried out in the native villages and
hamlets.
b. Adequate Village Self-Development funds must be granted, and funds given to
the people of the ethnic minorities must be granted on the same basis as for
Vietnamese.
e. Special attention must be given to the education program of ethnic minorities,
especially the programs of literacy education, hygiene, and general health
education.
d. In addition to agricultural programs, the development program for ethnic mi-
norities also is designed to establish a handicraft production system to give
the minorities broader employment opportunities and to increase their
family income.
1. The strategic concept of the national security plan is to provide security to people
living in secure areas, extend the area of security in order to protect those who
are still living outside secure areas, neutralize the enemy infrastructure, and
eliminate enemy armed forces from our territory. This concept is not dependent
on the presence of the Free World Military Assistance Forces and paves the way
for the transfer of the responsibility for security from military agencies to civi-
lian ones.
2. All military efforts must be closely coordinated, with emphasis on close coopera-
tion between RVNAF and FWMAF units in order to achieve the three objectives--
Local Self-Defense, Local Self-Government, and Local Self-Development.
We must attach importance to the programs set forth to inspire the people with a co-
operative spirit and to unify our efforts as much as possible in order to achieve the
three objectives of this plan, which when attained will lead us to universally awaited
peace and prosperity.
Particularly in the self-development effort, these guidelines must be followed:
1. The development effort must take place simultaneously in rural and urban areas.
2. Projected works must meet the aspirations of the majority of people, correspond
to local requirements, and actually serve the purpose of local development.
3. Make best use of cadre capabilities. Provide them with technical training and re-
fresher training, as well as motivational training.
4. Materials must be used economically to avoid the waste of national resources. If
possible, domestic materials must be used in preference to foreign materials so
as to stimulate local production.
Approved For GONFIDENTIAL101'80101720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20 1 f IDENT t20R001100010001-4
5. Planning must be thorough so that all projects will be carried out smoothly and
completed as scheduled.
The 1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan will cover the period
1 March 1971 through 28 February 1972 and is divided into two phases.
Phase 1: from 1 March through 1 September 1971.
Phase 2: from 1 September through 28 February 1972.
C. Coordinating Instructions:
1. The Community Defense and Local Development Plan is a national plan. There-
fore, all ministries and agencies must cooperate closely with each other in its
implementation so as to develop as much as possible the spirit of community
cooperation and also to unify separate responsibilities into community responsi-
bilities.
The Central Pacification and Development Council/Coordinating Center is respon-
sible for overall coordination.
2. The Ministries are responsible for executing the Plan as follows:
a. Objective 1. Local Self-Defense
(1) Territorial Security Program.
- Responsible Agency: Joint General Staff/RVNAF.
- Support: Ministries of Interior, Rural Development, Development of
Ethnic Minorities, Information, and Chieu Hoi; Central Phung Hoang
Committee; General Directorate of National Police; PSDF General Direc-
torate.
(2) PSDF Program:
- Support: Ministries of Defense, Rural Development, Development of
Ethnic Minorities, Information, and Chieu Hoi; Joint General Staff/RVNAF.
(3) National Police Program:
- Responsible Ministry: Ministry of Interior /General Directorate of
National Police.
- Support: Ministries of Defense, Justice, Information, Rural Develop-
ment, Development of Ethnic Minorities, and Chieu Hoi; Joint General
Staff/RVNAF; PSDF General Directorate.
Approved For Release 20
NfIDENI*L72oRoo1100010001-4
 Ap DEIepfljA[O4IOl : CIA-RDP80R0I 720R001 100010001-4
- Support: Ministries of Defense, Justice, Rural Development, Develop-
ment of Ethnic Minorities, Information, and Chieu Hoi; Joint General
Staff/RVNAF; General Directorate of National Police; PSDF General
Directorate.
(5) Chieu Hoi Program.
- Support: Ministries of Defense, Interior, Information, Rural Develop-
ment, Development of Ethnic Minorities, Public Health, and Social Wel-
fare; Joint General Staff/RVNAF; Central Phung Hoang Committee; Di-
rectorate General of National Police; PSDF General Directorate.
b. Objective 2: Local Self-Government
(1) People's Administration Program:
- Responsible Ministry: Ministry of Interior.
- Support: Ministries of Defense, Rural Development, Development of
Ethnic Minorities, Finance, Land Reform and Agriculture and Fisheries
Development, Chieu Hoi, and Information.
(2) People's Information Program:
Responsible Ministry: Ministry of Information.
Support: All Ministries and Government Agencies.
(3) People's Or anization Program:
- Responsible Ministry: Ministry of Interior.
- Support: Ministry of State for Cultural Affairs; Ministries of Rural
Development, Development of Ethnic Minorities, Health, Education,
Justice, Social Welfare, Labor, Land Reform, Development of Agricul-
ture and Fisheries, Information, and Chieu Hoi; Directorate General of
Youth; Directorate General of National Police; PSDF General Directorate.
(4) Youth Program:
- Support: Ministries of Defense, Foreign Affairs, Interior, Rural Devel-
opment, Development of Ethnic Minorities, Education, Social Welfare,
Information, Finance, Labor, Public Health, Land Reform, Development
of Agriculture and Fisheries, and Economy.
c. Objective 3: Local Self-Development
(1) Land Reform Program:
- Responsible Ministry: Ministry of Land Reform, Agriculture, and
12
AppOORRIE~2b 04/01 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2e9 f IDENTfAtl72OROOl100010001-4
- Support: Ministries of Interior, Information, Rural Development,
Development of Ethnic Minorities, Defense, Economy and Finance.
(2) Agriculture and Fisheries Program.
- Responsible Ministry: Ministry of Land Reform and Development of
Agriculture and Fisheries.
- Support: Ministries of Information, Defense, Rural Development,
Development of Ethnic Minorities, and Economy.
(3) Local Economic Development Program.
- Responsible Ministry: Ministry of Economy.
- Support: Ministries of Interior, Defense, Information, Finance,
Land Reform, and Development of Agriculture and Fisheries.
(4) War Veterans Program.
Responsible Ministry: Ministry of war Veterans.
- Support: Ministries of Interior, Education, Information, Economy,
Public Health, Social Welfare, Public Works, Land Reform and
Development of Agriculture and Fisheries, and Labor.
(5) War Victims Program;
Responsible Ministry: Ministry of Social Welfare.
- Support: Ministries of Interior, Education, Rural Development, Infor-
mation, Public Works, Public Health, Land Reform, and Development
of Agriculture and Fisheries, Development of Ethnic Minorities, Labor,
and Veterans; General Directorate of Youth.
(6) Public Health Program.
Responsible Ministry: Ministry of Public Health.
Support: Ministries of Education, Interior Defense, Information,
Public-Works, Rural Development, and Development of Ethnic Minor-
ities.
(7) Education Program.
Responsible Ministry: Ministry of Education.
Support: The Minister of State for Culture; the Ministries of Land
Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development, Interior, Defense,
Rural Development, Information, Social Welfare, Labor, War Veterans,
and Development of Ethnic Minorities, Director General of Youth.
Approved For Release 20041f I OE-NEIALi720R001100010001-4
 OtIFTDE IA (004/04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
(8) Manpower Development Program.
Support: The Minister of State for Reconstruction and Development;
the Ministries of Defense, Economy, Education, War Veterans, In-
formation, Social Welfare, Chieu Hoi, Interior, Public Works, and
Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development, General
Directorate of Plans, General Directorate of Civil Service, and
General Directorate of Youth.
(9) Public Works Program.
Support: Ministries of Interior, Defense, Rural Development, In-
formation, Economy, Labor, and Land Reform, Agriculture and
Fishery Development.
(10) Communication and Post Program.
- Responsible Ministry; Ministry of Communication and Post, Tele-
phone and Telegraph.
Support: Ministries of Interior, Defense, Rural Development, In-
formation, Economy, Labor, and Public Works.
(L1.) Rural Credit Program.
Support: Ministries of Interior, Rural Development, Economy,
Finance, Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development,
and Development of Ethnic Minorities, National Bank, General Direct-
orate of Budget and Foreign Aid.
(12) Prefectural, Provincal, and City Development Program.
Support: All Ministries of the Government are responsible for support-
ing the Prefectural, Provincial and City Development Program, es-
pecially Interior, Information, Defense, Public Works, Public Health,
Rural Development, Education, Land Reform and Agriculture and
Fishery Development, and Development of Ethnic Minorities, also
Directorate General of Budget and Foreign Aid.
(13) Village Self-Development Programs.
- Responsible Ministry. Ministry of Rural Development.
- Support: Ministries of Interior, Education, Information, Economy,
Public Health, Social Welfare, Public Works, Land Reform and
CONfIDE TIA 004/04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20 cfNFIDTt20R001100010001-4
Agriculture and Fishery Development, and Development of Ethnic
Minorities; Agricultural Development Bank.
(1) Urban Areas Program.
- Responsible Agency: Central Pacification and Development Council
(Committee responsible for Urban Program)
- Support: All Ministries of the Government are responsible for support-
ing the Urban Program, especially Interior, Rural Development,
Public Works, Finance, Social Welfare, Public Health, Information,
Labor, and Education; also Directorate General of Youth.
(2) Development of Ethnic Minorities Program.
- Responsible Ministry: Ministry for Deve lopment of Ethnic Minorities.
Support All Ministries of the Government are responsible for support-
ing the Development of Ethnic Minorities Program, especially Interior,
Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development, Rural Devel-
opment, Economy, Education, Public Health, Social Welfare, Public-
Works, Communication and Post, Telephone and Telegraph, and Labor.
1. All prefectural, Provincial, and City Pacification and Development Councils
based on this plan will establish local plans. These plans should be forwarded
to the Central Pacification and Development Council through MRs, prior to
31 January 1971. Plans should be brief and only state main tasks of 1971; it is
not necessary to restate the generalities of the national plan.
2. Ministries and Central Agencies must reduce the number of reports prescribed
and eliminate unnecessary reports.
3. The Central Pacification and Development Council Coordinating Center will study
and submit to the Central Pacification and Development Council a standardized
report form for use at any level from the Central Government to localities. This
report form must be issued prior to the initiation of the Community Defense and
Local Development Plan.
15
Approved For Release 20C FIKARAJ172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20010fl T1 tOR001100010001-4
I. (U) GENERAL.
This annex outlines the role of civil and military forces in providing sustained, credible
territorial security throughout the RVN and establishes associated responsibilities.
II. (U) MISSION.
RVNAF, assisted by FWMAF, in conjunction with paramilitary forces, including PSDF,
conducts operations throughout Vietnam in order to provide security to the population of RVN,
thus creating an environment in which other Community Defense and Local Development pro-
grams can be safely and successfully accomplished.
III. (C) EXECUTION.
1. Territorial Security. All of the organized and armed forces of the GVN, assisted by
FWMAF, conduct operations to develop and maintain a state of stability and security
required for the success of the GVN Community Defense and Local Development Plan,
1971. These operations are to be carried out in accordance with the principles set
forth in the territorial security concept. See Appendix A (Territorial Security).
During 1971, application of former security concepts will continue with special em-
phasis on the following.
b. As compared to 1970, minimize enemy attacks, shellings, and terrorist incidents
by 75% in secure areas and 50% in areas still undergoing pacification. Terro-
rism is an incident directed against civilians, public officials, or military per-
sonnel not engaged in military duties in which the primary objective is to intimi-
date. (Assassination, kidnapping, mining or bombings of public facilities, buildings
and civilian transportation constitute terrorism. )
Goal
National
MR 1
MR 2
MR 3
MR 4
Objective
Territorial Security
Control of population
in AB hamlets
95%
95%
93%o
97%
95%
Reduce total
shellings to
2,000
330
475
340
855
Reduce shellings
over 20 rds to
280
35
49
56
140
Reduce enemy terro-
rist incidents to
6,010
1,
075
2,030
1,385
1,520
I-1
Approved For Release 200 IONFIDEN8~IAE2OR001100010001-4
 Appr NIRN' j4/01 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
c. Expansion of security for the population and territory. Detailed plans must be
developed in each MR and sector to expand the secure areas and consolidation
zones by 20%.
d. Protection of lines of communications for economic, social, and military ad-
vancement.
e. Protection of national material and manpower resources to prevent them from
falling into enemy hands.
f. Provision of security in controlled areas in order to reduce or eliminate the
curfew in densely populated areas.
Effective use of PSDF to protect villages and hamlets.
h. Completion of the refresher training for all RF/PF units. Each RF company
and PF platoon must maintain a log book for visiting supervisors to record the
combat capability of the units and other directives.
Establish close and continuous coordination with sector and subsector com-
manders and other officials in provinces, autonomous cities, and villages to
insure unity of command and clear assignment of responsibility for the security
of all areas.
Conduct military operations to insure that noncombatant casualties and destruc-
tion of civil property will be minimized.
k. In "A" type hamlets, reduce barricades, protective wire, and other field forti-
fications and emphasize active participation of the population in hamlet defense.
1. Reduce the number and size of restricted areas, inland as well as along the
coast, so that the life of the people in these areas can be normalized.
m. Reduce the tactical areas of responsibility for divisions so that these large
units can operate on a more mobile basis.
x. Bring RF units up to TO&E strength so that they are capable of operating in the
clearing zones and to conduct patrols as are necessary in sparsely populated
areas (except for such special zones as Secret Zone C or D or in the U Minh
forest).
o. The RF units must have an offensive spirit and must be targeted to eliminate a
specific enemy unit.
C). Consolidate and maintain a sufficient level of security in MRs 3 and 4 so that a
number of division sized units may conduct a mobile strategy.
q. During operations, units must pay special attention to psychological warfare
and, circumstances permitting, should induce enemy soldiers to rally under the
Chieu Hoi program. See Annex N (Political Warfare), Appendix D, military
section on participation in the Chieu Hoi program as part of AB 146; Appendix
E (Chieu Hoi) of Annex 1, Local Self Defense of the 1971 Community Defense and
Local Development Plan.
Approg of HTcl01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2C"fIffiifi1720R001100010001-4
a. To achieve 1971 security goals, the RVNAF, assisted by FWMAF, in coordi-
nation with paramilitary forces, will strive toward the elimination of NVA and
VC forces from GVN territory. The goal is to extend security so that at least
95% of the people live in AB hamlets by the end of February 1972 and all V ham-
lets have been eliminated.
b. The Regional Forces, Popular Forces, and National Police are the primary
forces responsible for territorial security. Within the secure areas, PF, in
conjunction with paramilitary forces, and assisted as necessary by RF, will be
responsible for the security of the population. The RF/PF, assisted as neces-
sary by RVNAF Infantry Divisions, when directed by RVNAF Corps and Military
Region Commanders, will be responsible for the territorial security of the conso-
lidation zone. Infantry divisions are responsible in the clearing zone and Ranger
forces are responsible in the border surveillance zone. These forces, assisted
by FWMAF, will be responsible for conducting operations to improve territorial
security.
c. Coordination must be continuous between all military (RVNAF and FWMAF) with
sector/subsector commanders to ensure unity of command and that responsibility
for the security of all areas is clearly delineated. In those cases where an RF
company AO encompasses a village or hamlet, the RF company commander will
advise the village chief in employment of PF and PSDF and will coordinate all
activities of RF/PF within his AO. Command of PF and PSDF will be retained
by the village chief.
d. RVNAF, including RF/PF, and FWMAF will assist in the Phung Hoang Program
in accordance with Annex C (Military Participation in the Neutralization of the
Enemy Infrastructure) to AB 146, and Appendix D (Phung Hoang) of Annex I (Local
Self Defense), of the Community Defense and Local Development Plan, 1971.
e. The integrated village defense plans provide for a coordinated village/hamlet
defense system capable of reducing losses or of delaying the enemy long enough
for reinforcement. These plans, as set forth in JGS Memo 2664, dtd 3 Jul 69,
are established and implemented by the village chief in cooperation with the vil-
lage deputy chief for military security and the assistance of military commanders
stationed at or operating in nearby villages. The g.ubsector commanders are
responsible for providing guidance in establishment of defense plans, reviewing
and approving plans, and supporting the implementation of village defense plans.
3. Rules of Engagement. Special care and precautions will be exercised in the conduct
of military operations in populated areas,including the clearing and border surveil-
lance zones. Emphasis will be placed on minimizing noncombatant casualties and
destruction of civil property through restraints placed on indirect and aerial fire
support.
a. Conduct operations in the clearing zones to prevent enemy incursions into the
consolidation zones and secure areas, thereby permitting security to be constant-
ly improved.
Approved For Release 2fI:DE 1720R001100010001-4
 Approved ThTHJ[W'I1ALCIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
b. Conduct sustained, coordinated, and mobile operations, unilaterally, or com-
bined, with FWMAF to locate and neutralize enemy main and local force units,
base areas, and liaison, communications, and logistic systems in the clearing
zone located in assigned TAORS and along the DMZ and border surveillance
zones. See Annex K (Neutralization of VC/NVA Base Areas) and Annex L (Pro-
cedures for Coordination of RVNAF and FWMAF Operations) to AB 146.
c. When directed by RVNAF Corps and Military Region Commanders, coordinate
and provide artillery support; request other available fire support from FWMAF,
if needed, for RF and PF and other security forces (PSDF, NP, RDC, PRU, and
APT).
d. Maintain ready reaction forces in the TAOR to support the RF/PF and other
security forces against hostile forces discovered in the consolidation zone and
secure areas. (To be employed upon request of the province chief/sector com-
mander and approved by RVNAF Corps and Military Region Commander.) This
is not intended to preclude the commitment of Infantry divisions which may hap-
pen to be within the consolidation zone or secure area at the time.
e. Coordinate with territorial security forces for the conduct of operations to eli-
minate enemy guerrillas and VCI in the TAOR when directed by RVNAF Corps
and Military Region Commanders.
Establish and maintain coordination with GVN officials in adjacent consolidation
zones or secure areas. See Annex M (Procedures for Coordination of RVNAF
Mobile Field Forces and GVN Province Forces) to AB 146.
h. Provide training assistance to RF/PF, and other pacification forces in the area,
when directed by RVNAF Corps and Military Region Commanders.
a. Conducting operations in the clearing zones to prevent enemy main force incur-
sions into the consolidation zones and secure areas, thereby permitting security
to be constantly improved.
Conducting mobile operations, unilaterally or combined in support of RVNAF,
to locate and neutralize VC/NVA main and local force units, base areas and re-
sources located in clearing and border surveillance zones. See Annex K (Neu-
tralization of VC/NVA Base Areas) and Annex L (Procedures for Coordination
of RVNAF and FWMAF Operations) to AB 146.
c. Coordinating and providing artillery, air, and other fire support for RF/PF and
other security forces when RVNAF support is not available.
d. Maintaining ready reaction forces available to support the RF/PF and other se-
curity forces against hostile forces in the consolidation zone-and secure areas
upon request of the province chief/sector commander when RVNAF are not avail-
able or their resources are not sufficient for the purpose.
e. Conducting combined operations with territorial forces, and such other forces as
may be committed against enemy guerrillas in accordance with provincial plans.
Approvedd ft f EVIIAL CIA-RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200C#N fl
ELM
f. Conducting limited border and coastal surveillance against enemy infiltration.
Assisting and reinforcing RVNAF, as necessary, in opening, securing, and im-
proving LOCs, providing security for designated areas, and protecting Vietnam-
ese national resources.
h. Providing training assistance to RF/PF and other security forces in the area.
3. Regional Forces.
a. Participate fully in the GVN Community Defense and Local Development Plan,
1971.
b. Conduct unilateral or coordinated mobile offensive operations aimed at either
enemy provincial organic mobile forces or local force companies to maintain
and improve security in the consolidation zone. Emphasis will be placed on the
intelligence, reconnaissance, and analysis of the enemy movements in order to
ambush and attack them when they are moving, especially at night, and prevent
incursions by enemy forces into the secure areas. RF battalions and groups
will be used to attack enemy main and local force units and interdict enemy in-
filtration routes. Coordinate with Infantry divisions, FWMAF, and PF units
when necessary. See Annex M (Procedures for Coordination of RVNAF Mobile
Field Forces and GVN Province Forces) to AB 146.
c. Maintain ready reaction forces for employment when PF or other security for-
ces are endangered.
d. Assume static defensive missions only in the most compelling cases for the pro-
tection of LOCs, important installations or to provide security for villages/ham-
lets.
e. Assist the RD Cadres and PF in the organization and training of the PSDF.
f. Interdict enemy LOCs and participate in resources control.
g. When directed by MR Commander, participate in coordination or joint operations
with Infantry divisions to destroy enemy main force units and base areas.
4. Popular Forces. Under the direction and control of the village chief:
a. Participate fully in GVN Community Defense and Local Development Plan, 1971.
b. Provide security for villages /hamlets to include population, resources, LOCs,
and static installations. Assist the NP in those villages in which the NP have
not yet developed sufficient capabilities to maintain law and order.
c. Provide defense against VC infiltrations into populated areas of the villages and
hamlets.
d. Continually conduct varied operations with emphasis on night ambushes. Ambush
positions must be retained throughout the night and the same position should not
be used twice in any one week.
e. Be prepared to reinforce RD groups and PSDF, if they are attacked by a superior
Approved For Release 20Q IDfNlI*[720R001 100010001-4
 Approved FCUNfI NT1A [IA-RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
f. Replace the RF in the protection of LOCs and important installations in the
secure areas.
g, Assist the RD Cadre in organizing and training PSDF. In hamlets where RD
groups are not available, the PF will be responsible for organizing and training
PSDF that are under the command of the village military commissioner or ham-
let military assistant. See Appendix B (People's Self Defense Force) of Annex I
(Local Self Defense) to the Community Defense and Local Development Plan, 1971.
National Police Forces. The primary responsibility of the National Police and Ma-
rine Police is to establish and maintain law and order in secure areas and consolida-
tion zones,
and to assist the PF in providing security in the secure areas. For
other National Police tasks see Annex C (Military Participation in the Neutralization
of Enemy Infrastructure), Annex F (Military Participation in Civilian Detainee Pro-
grams) to AB 146, and Appendix C (National Police) of Annex I (Local Self Defense)
to the Community Defense and Local Development Plan, 1971.
6. People's Self Defense Forces (PSDF).
a. Assist territorial security forces, who have primary responsibility for security,
and the NP in the defense of the village/hamlet.
b. Assist in efforts to deter enemy terrorist and sabotage activity. Key Interteams,
supported by the other PSDF combat elements, will gradually assume responsi-
bility from PF for internal defense for pacified hamlets, phuongs, and khoms.
c. Assist in the Phung Hoang Program in accordance with Annex C (Military Parti-
cipation in the Neutralization of the Enemy Infrastructure) to AB 146 and Appendix
D (Phung Hoang) or Annex I (LocalSelf Defense) to the Community Defense and
Local Development Plan, 1971.
C. RESPONSIBILITIES. MISSION
t. RVNAF Corps and Military Region Commanders.
Mobile Operations:
(1) Plan and conduct search and destroy operations against enemy main force
units, local force units, guerrillas and infrastructure.
(2) Conduct reaction and reinforcement operations to counter all enemy pressure.
(3) Supervise and support operations conducted by Infantry divisions or sector
forces.
b. Territorial Security:
(1) Conduct border defense operations against enemy incursions.
(2) Defend LOCs, vital points, villages, hamlets, and all administrative and
economic establishments.
din
Approved Fo
fu
/N/T1 AJ-RDP80R01 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20C"M ? f A720R001100010001-4
(3) Provide protection for the people and national resources.
(4) Strengthen the outpost system, operational bases, and fire bases.
c. Community Defense and Local Development:
(1) Conduct military efforts in support of the GVN Community Defense and Local
Development Plan, 1971.
(2) Review the Community Defense and Local Development Plans submitted by
sector commanders and province chiefs.
(3) Determine priority for the use of armed forces and their deployment in sup-
port of the GVN Community Defense and Local Development Plan, 1971.
(4) Guide, monitor, supervise and control the implementation of the military plan
in support of the GVN Community Defense and Local Development Plan, 1971.
2, Infantry Division Commanders.
a. Mobile Operations: Conduct mobile operations based on initiative or as directed
by Commanders of RVNAF Corps and Military Regions. Efforts will be focused
on enemy main force units and bases.
(1) Conduct reaction operations at the request of sector commanders when ap-
proved by Commanders of RVNAF Corps and Military Regions.
(2) Provide combat units, fire support and other support to sectors as ordered
by Commanders of RVNAF Corps and Military Regions.
(3) Protect important installations, open roads and waterways as instructed by
Commanders of RVNAF Corps and Military Regions.
(1) When instructed by Commanders of RVNAF Corps and Military Regions, co-
ordinate activities with sector commanders to provide effective support for
the Community Defense and Local Development Plan.
(2) When instructed by Commanders of RVNAF Corps and Military Regions, and
in conjunction with sector commanders, conduct operations in support of the
Province Community Defense and Local Development Plans.
3. Special Sector Commander.
a. Mobile Operations:
(1) Organize and conduct mobile operations based on initiative or instructions
by Commanders of RVNAF Corps and Military Regions.
(2) Supervise and support all operations organized by subordinate sector
commanders;
Approved For Release 200CONFIDERTIR720R001100010001-4
 Approved tIJTtFhIlJf.N11A LC1R80R01 720R001 100010001-4
(1) Defend capital, province, cities, villages and hamlets and all administra-
tive and economic installations.
(2) Provide protection for the people and national resources in the special
sector.
(3) Establish and consolidate the system of outposts, operational bases and
fire bases.
(1) Deploy armed forces and conduct military efforts to support the GVN
Community Defense and Local Development Plan, 1971.
(2) Monitor, supervise, and control implementation of the military plan in
support of community defense and local development efforts.
(1) Assist local authorities in the activation and training of people's groups and
PS D F.
(2)Assist local authorities in the maintenance of law and order
(3) Command all assigned and attached units.
(4) Plan and operate a territorial intelligence network.
Sector Commander.
a. Territorial Security:
(1) Plan and conduct search and destroy operations against enemy provincial
main force units, guerrillas and infrastructure.
(2) Establish sector security plans and implement them upon approval of RVNAF
Corps and Military Region Commanders.
(3) Recommend to RVNAF Corps and Military Region Headquarters the require-
ment for forces to preserve sector security in event a shortage of armed
forces occurs.
(4) Maintain the strength of RF and PF at 100% of that authori.zed,with first
priority to combat elements.
(5) Direct all activities of RF, PF and other forces in the sectors (NP, RD
Cadres, PSDFs).
(1) Formulate a military plan in support of the GVN Community Defense and
Local Development Plan, 1971,based on the policy and guidelines provided
Approved e NftONA [CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release KflfjkL720R001
(2) Guide, monitor, supervise, and control the implementation of the military
plan in support of community defense and local development and be re-
sponsible for this to RVNAF Corps and Military Region Commanders.
c. Other Functions:
(1) Inspect, direct, train, and support RF and PF forces in the sector.
(2) Distribute, control, and provide maintenance support for weapons of PSDF
members.
(3) Perform territorial intelligence tasks.
(4) Coordinate and install an adequate communications system.
5. Special Zone Commanders.
a. Direct search and clear operations against enemy provincial, enemy main
force units, guerrillas and infrastructure.
b. Support the GVN Community Defense and Local Development Plan, 1971 in
accordance with the policy and guidelines provided by RVNAF Corps and
Military Region Commanders.
c. Provide protection for villages, hamlets, vital points, and all administrative
and economic installations.
d. Command and control territorial forces and other assigned units.
e. Perform intelligence and counter-intelligence tasks.
f. Assist local authorities in the restoration and maintenance of law and order.
g. Assist local authorities in the activation and training of people's groups
and PSDF.
a. Assist sectors in the preparation and implementation of sector security plans
and community defense and local development plans.
b. Direct RF/PF, and other forces (NP, RD Cadre, PSDF) belonging to sub-
sectors, in support of village and hamlet defense plans.
c. Supervise, direct and guide subordinate units in support of community defense
and local development programs.
d. Maintain subsector reaction forces to support villages and hamlets under
attack.
e. Recommend to the sector commander the organization for operations in support
of community defense and local development plans.
Approved For Release 20ONF F A[720R001100010001-4
 Approved For #OfIfIfl!NT:IclI..RDP80R01 720R001 100010001-4
f. Inspect village and hamlet defense plans and insure that rehearsals are
conducted. Assist in the preparation.of defense plans and in requesting fire
support.
g. Activate, command and control subsector RF and PF units.
h. Perform intelligence and counter-intelligence tasks.
i. Distribute and control PSDF weapons and ammunition.
7. Free World Military Assistance Forces. FWMAF commanders will assist the
RVNAF in providing territorial security when requirements exceed RVNAF
means. Supporting operations must comply with the operational concepts
stipulated in the basic plan and with the mutual agreements between FWMAF
Commanders and the RVNAF Corps and Military Commanders concerned. Re-
sponsibilities include:
a. Coordinate with the Military Region Commanders to determine procedures
and the type of assistance, the areas, and the control measures necessary
for coordination of territorial security plans.
b. Provide territorial security support based on agreement between the province
chiefs and the province senior advisors, utilizing FWMAF resources in the
province when requirements exceed RVNAF capabilities.
c. Coordinate with other FWMAF concerning provision of territorial security.
.TV.
(U)
ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS:
A.
RVNAF/FWMAF. See Annex 0 (Logistics) to AB 146.
B.
The issue and maintenance support of Class V items for PSDF will be provided by the
Sector Management and Direct Support Logistics Center.
V.
(U)
COMMAND AND SIGNAL:
A.
B.
C.
Signal. See Annex P (Communications-Electronics) to AB 146.
Military and Civil command relations will be observed.
Command of GVN civil and paramilitary elements will remain with the ranking
local commander during combined operations.
A. Territorial Security
B. Peoples Self-Defense Force
C. National Police
D. Phung Hoang
E. Chieu Hoi
Approved Fo FfD[N 1 1:At-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/cC/oN"K R001100010001-4
1. (U) PURPOSE. This appendix describes the principles and application of area security
and provides guidance to commanders for planning and implementation.
2. (C) GENERAL. In his efforts to achieve political control of RVN, the enemy attempts
to demonstrate that the GVN is not capable of governing the country or of providing credible
security to the people. His offensive operations and the resultant reaction operations by
friendly forces produce adverse effects on security of the people. The most effective way of
assuring security of the Vietnamese people is to keep enemy forces away from them and by
neutralizing the VC infrastructure. Without the VCI, enemy main forces cannot obtain
intelligence, manpower, and food, nor will they be able to prepare the battlefield or move.
a. Providing security to the Vietnamese people is the major objective of RVNAF/
FWMAF. The security principles and their application are based upon lessons
learned in the past and provide specific techniques for providing the desired level
of security.
b. If the VC cease their insurgency, and NVA forces withdraw to North Vietnam, the
objective will be achieved, even though North Vietnam may still constitute a threat
to RVN.
c. The enemy threat in RVN falls into two broad categories:
(1) VC/NVA main forces, often located in remote areas, or entering RVN from
havens across the border.
(2) VC local forces and guerrilla units, special action groups and the VCI, located
closer to and often intermingled with the people.
d. In some areas, the people are reluctant to associate with the GVN for fear of
retaliation by the enemy. Civil officials often become the target of enemy terror-
ism and assassination and thus are reluctant to perform their governmental tasks.
Some police hesitate to conduct operations against the VCI because they fear
retaliation, and local security forces, under the threat of terrorism, often accom-
modate, rather than resist, the enemy.
3. (C) CONCEPT. An effective national security program must include measures to insure
security of individuals and groups at all levels, from the local household to an entire geo-
graphical/political subdivision, against both internal and external threats.
a. The component parts of a security system, listed below, must be fully coordinated
under a single authority to be effective.
Approved For Release 2004uN F(O[NiIAL0100hb000b0001-4
 Approved FFfR!A:CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
(5) Tactical control measures, such as boundaries, barriers, warning systems,
phasing, etc.
(6) Effective communications.
(7) Improvement of military-civilian relations.
b. The meaning of security varies, depending upon what is perceived to be the threat.
(1) The Vietnamese villager fears military forces of both sides, since their opera-
tions constitute a threat to the safety of him and his family. He fears friendly
artillery and air as much as he fears enemy mortars and rockets.
Military commanders frequently judge security as it relates to the safety of
their units, rather than to the.population in the area. For example, a unit
commander may feel that he is providing security to the people simply by
being in the area. Frequently, however, the mere presence of a military unit
within an area provokes an enemy attack.
The diagram at TAB 1 (Perception of Threats) illustrates the variance in the
meaning of security. It also illustrates that security involves not only safety
against physical violence but protection against political, economic and psycho-
logical threats as well.
c. To be effective, security must be continuous. Manning outposts and patrolling
during the day, but retiring to static defense positions at night, will not achieve
effective security and often produces undesired results. The enemy, who moves
mostly under cover of darkness, will enter the village to carry out retaliation
against the people, after the security forces depart.
d. The provision of security throughout RVN requires the accomplishment of five
interrelated tasks:
(1) Maintaining continuous and permanent security for people living in secure areas.
(2) Extending security to people outside the secure areas.
(3) Neutralizing local force, guerrilla and VCI units or individuals found among
the people.
(4) Forcing the withdrawal of NVA forces to North Vietnam, by both military and
political actions.
(5) Developing a security system that is not dependent on the continued presence
of FWMAF.
C. To accomplish these tasks, it is necessary to delineate those areas (See TAB 2
(Area Security Definitions)) in which friendly operations:
Approved FCOJdfB[VIA [IARDP80R01 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20040 N f NT 0R001100010001-4
(1) Focus upon securing the population (Secure Areas and Consolidation Zones).
(2) Focus against enemy main forces (Clearing Zones).
(3) Focus against enemy intrusion and infiltration (Border Surveillance Zones).
4. (C) PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS. Area Security aims at meeting the enemy
challenge by providing sustained, credible security for the people, and is designed to:
a. Maintain security at the present level of hostilities, as well as meet the require-
ments of a post-hostilities environment.
b. Provide a framework for reducing FWMAF combat forces, as RVNAF capabilities
improve.
c. Allow military forces to meet VC/NVA forces in the areas of lowest population
density without detracting from the major objective of assuring the protection of
all the Vietnamese people.
5. (C) DETERMINATION OF AREAS. The actual delineation of the four types of areas will
be made by the province chiefs in coordination with the tactical commanders, based on the
definitions contained in TAB 2 (Area Security Definitions). They are most familiar with
local conditions such as enemy activity, routes and base areas, population density, LOC,
terrain, ethnic groupings, etc. , to make the best possible judgment. Initial recommenda-
tions will be included in the Territorial Security Annex to the Province Community Defense
and Local Development Plan; submitted for approval to the RVNAF Corps and Military
Region Commander; and integrated into the overall RVNAF Corps and Military Region Area
Security Plan to insure appropriate interrelationships on a Military Region-wide basis.
These delineations must be reviewed constantly and altered to reflect the dynamics of the
campaign of expanding security to cover new areas and population. Updated overlays will be
forwarded whenever there is significant adjustment of zones.
a. Secure Areas. The principal task is to maintain and improve existing security.
Operations will concentrate on protecting the resident population within the boundary
of the secure area.
(1) The secure area is the hub from which expansion of security radiates. Local
government is functioning and the GVN is improving services and self-help
programs.
(2) Police operations will concentrate on maintaining law and order, neutralizing
the VCI,and controlling terrorism.
(3) Popular Forces, PSDF, and NP, in a coordinated effort under the control of
the village chief, will maintain security and law and order in secure areas with
the support of the RF if required.
(4) National Police, PF, and PSDF will not normally be utilized beyond the
boundary of their assigned village.
(5) Friendly military forces, resident in the secure area, protect their own instal-
lations. They may assist in protecting key non-military installations if the
Approved For Release 200
N FlO? 1A t20R001100010001-4
 Approved O'M'Ff DENTIA [CIARDP80R01 720R001 100010001-4
local police forces are not adequate. However, protection of non-military
installations should be assumed by the police or civilian self-defense units, as
soon as possible.
(6) Security of areas contiguous to the secure area will be improved through satu-
ration patrolling, ambush, and offensive operations by territorial forces.
(7) The secure area does not expand from within. Rather, as security conditions
within a portion of the consolidation zone reach the required level, that portion
is assimilated into and becomes part of the secure area.
b. Consolidation Zones. The principal tasks to be accomplished within this zone are
to provide an outer belt of protection for the secure area and to raise the level of
security to that which exists within the secure area.
(1) The purpose of the outer belt of protection is to detect and engage enemy forces
at a distance from the secure area. This is best accomplished by conducting
continuous around-the-clock, intensive patrol and ambush operations, and
maintaining strong, highly mobile reaction forces. RF, supported by PF, NP,
NPFF, and Infantry divisions as necessary, are employed in this outer belt.
(2) Within the zone, police type operations are employed to raise the level of
security. Police and territorial forces assisted by regular forces, as required,
provide hamlet and village security. They also conduct intensive small unit
patrol and ambush operations to detect and engage any enemy units which may
have penetrated the outer belt of protection. In addition, they seek out and
neutralize the VCI and uncover weapon and ammunition caches and mortar and
rocket emplacements.
(3) Resources and population control is conducted; movement of personnel and
commodities is under strict control and subject to continuous check. During
darkness, a selective curfew is rigidly enforced.
(4) Assimilation of portions of the consolidation zone into the secure area will
occur when the level of security within that portion is determined by province
officials to fall within the prescribed definition for designation as a secure area.
c:. Clearing Zones. Operations in this zone concentrate on VC/NVA main and local
forces to prevent their intruding into consolidation zones. Rules of engagement for
the clearing zone must emphasize that civilians are not unnecessarily exposed to
friendly fires. The objective is to separate the enemy from the population in order
to facilitate establishment of effective security.
(1) RVN regular forces, assisted by FWMAF, operate within this zone to engage
or drive the enemy therefrom and to prevent enemy forces from entering con-
solidation zones.
(2) Neutralization of enemy base areas will be conducted in accordance with the
priorities contained in Annex K (Neutralization of VC/NVA Base Areas) to
AB 146. Isolated bases, located in areas of low population density, can best
be controlled by conducting operations to prevent enemy egress or reinforce-
ment. As long as the enemy is prevented from leaving such bases, he is
Approved GONFIDE T1' L CIA-RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004001WI AER001100010001-4
effectively kept from reaching the, people. Continuous surveillance, patrolling
and ambushes, and air and artillery strikes will be employed to keep the enemy
confined in his base area.
Enemy base areas located closer to major population areas constitute a dif-
ferent type of threat. Friendly operations will concentrate on effectively neu-
tralizing these base areas or forcing the enemy to abandon them, and thus
increase the distance between the enemy and the population. Methods employed
will vary and are best left to the judgment of the commander in whose TAOR
the base area is located.
(4) As the enemy threat is reduced or neutralized, and base areas are abandoned
or isolated, the newly cleared area will be added to the consolidation zone.
The province chief must have adequate resources to insure that he can hold and
govern the newly cleared area. Refugees and original inhabitants of the area
should be encouraged to return and resettle. Coordination for transfer of the
newly cleared area to the consolidation zone from Infantry division responsibi-
lity to Province responsibility will be made under the authority of the RVNAF
Corps and Military Region commander.
d. Border Surveillance Zone. This zone is contiguous to the national borders of RVN.
MR commanders are responsible for this zone. The primary task here is to
detect, engage and deter enemy forces attempting to infiltrate RVN. Operations
conducted herein will be closely coordinated with border camp and unconventional
warfare forces.
7. (C) COMMAND AND CONTROL. The commander charged with responsibility for a
specific area must be provided adequate resources and authority commensurate with that
responsibility. Assignment of primary responsibility will be as follows. (The RVNAF Corps
and Military Region commander is responsible for assuring that adequate resources are
assigned in each case.)
b. Clearing Zone. Infantry division commanders or special sector commander as
designated by the RVNAF Corps and Military Region Commander.
d. Annex M (Procedures for Coordination of RVNAF Mobile Field Forces and GVN
Province Forces) to AB 146 is applicable.
e. TAB 3 illustrates the organization for Territorial Security.
TAB 1: Perceptions of Threat
TAB 2: Area Security Definitions
TAB 3: Organization for Area Security
TAB 4: Responsibilities for Preparation of Territorial Security Plans
Approved For Release 2004001H TFIAt0R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIACON 71 10001-4
TYPES
CROP DESTRUCTION
TAXATION
IMPRESSMENT, KIDNAPPING
ASSASSINATION
TERRORIST ATTACKS
GROUND OPERATIONS
MORTAR/ ARTILLERY
MINES
BOOBY TRAPS
,
KEY
11ENEMY" (VC/NVA)
"FRIENDLY" (US/FWMAF/ RVNAF)
BOTH "ENEMY; "FRIENDLY"
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA ID I(Tt 10001-4
 Approved For Release 2004gNFN7tALOR001100010001-4
1. Area Security. A strategic concept for the national security program, aimed at provid-
ing protection for the population already in secure areas, extending security to people not
yet living in secured areas, neutralizing the enemy found among the people, and eliminating
armed enemy units from the country. The concept is not dependent upon FWMAF and allows
for the transition from military to civilian control, with the ultimate objective of providing
effective security for the entire population of RVN. Security responsibility for an area is
assigned to a single individual. The Principles of Area Security are based upon a technique
of defining that area of responsibility assigned to a province chief/sector commander, an
Infantry division commander, or a Border Defense Forces commander.
2. Secure Area. A populated area where the normal functions of local government are con-
ducted under,the control of the province chief. There is freedom of day and night movement;
no imminent attack by enemy formations and only occasional acts of terrorism and indirect
fire attacks can be expected. The great majority of precincts and hamlets have an A or B
HES rating.
3. Consolidation Zone. The transitional area, under the province chief's control, between
the Secure Area and the Clearing Zone in which intensive pacification is being undertaken.
Population and resources control is thorough and night curfew is strictly enforced. Attacks
by enemy formations are not imminent, but frequent acts of terrorism and indirect fire
attacks may be expected. A purpose of the zone is to prevent the enemy forces from reach-
ing the Secure Area. The predominant number of hamlets in the consolidation zone will have
a HES rating of C.
4. Clearing Zone. The contested area under the Infantry division or other tactical unit
commander's control, that is divided into TAOR's assigned to tactical units, in which mobile
operations are conducted to neutralize enemy forces and base areas. It contains friendly
operational bases and includes unpopulated and temporarily VC controlled areas. Selected
areas in the clearing zone may be transferred to the control of the province chief and be
occupied by territorial forces in preparation for inclusion in the consolidation zone. The
province chief retains responsibility for all civil functions in the clearing zone.
5. Border Surveillance Zone. The area contiguous to the national borders of RVN. Tacti-
cal commanders have the responsibility for the detection of enemy buildup and reinforcement
of security.
Approved For Release 200t1f HD y1At0R001100010001-4
 ApproveCO JOE fAL : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
RT
t.I U)'
HE'S TYPES OF AREAS FORCES
RATING TERM RESPONSIBLE
A, B SECURE
(SOME C) AREA ------NP, PD, PSDF
C (SOME .\\\~CONSOLIDATED
D, E, VC)--- ZONE --NP, RF, PF,
PRU,RVNAF
MOBILE FIEL
FORCES,
FWMAF AS
REQUIRED
(SOME D, F) 71ZONE --- RVNAF MOBI
FIELD
FORCES, VNN,
FWMAF
BORDER
1111111 SURVEILLANCE
ZONE RVNAF MCBILI
FIELD
FORCES, VNN,
FWMAF
COASTAL
SURVEILLANCE
ZONE
Appro N FtDN1i/A01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
.~~III~II~N~oIAI~
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA-R fNN 4Aj01-4
TOC
FSCC
TOC
FSCC
SA -F FCG
DIV,0THE
K//, C G //
PROVINCE-CHIM
actor ?----?-'---?--- PSA
Commander
PIOCC
MST
Sub- actor SA
-Command ?
/
DIOCC
VILLAGE
CHIEF
? GVN
Command / Control
____.Close Support
___ Technical Control
0,04' Constant Communication
SUS
PIOCC and 01000-Completely interrelated
Intelligence and Operation Coordination centers,
should encompass TOC
? Clearing&Operations Zone
? Secure & Consolidation Zones
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA-
NfIDfMi4Y14??1
 Approved For Release 2004/eIffiTtMR001100010001-4
TAB 4: Responsibilities for Preparation of Territorial Security Plans, to Appendix A:
Territorial Security
1. (U) PURPOSE. This Tab outlines courses of action and determines responsibilities and
procedures for formulating the sector military plan for providing territorial security. It
includes security for secure areas and consolidation zones. The Province Community
Defense and Local Development Plan will contain a Territorial Security Annex as prescribed
below.
2. (C) RESPONSIBILITIES.
a. RVNAF Corps and Military Region.
(1) Provides Military Region-wide guidance for formulating plans for the pro-
vision of territorial security.
(2) Reviews and approves the sector Territorial Security Annex of the Province
Community Defense and Local Development Plan.
(3) Submits those plans to the JGS (Office of the Assistant for Pacification
Development and J-3) and the CPDC for final approval by 31 January 1971.
(4) Reviews and comments upon the situation for each quarter and submits reports
to JGS/J3.
(1) Assists in preparing RVNAF Corps and Military Region campaign plans for the
provision of territorial security, when requested.
(2) Coordinates and assists the sector commander in the preparation of territorial
security plans.
C. Infantry Division Senior Advisor or Special Tactical Zone Senior Advisor: Assists
and advises on matters pertaining to provision of territorial security.
(1) Formulates the plans for provision of territorial security assisted by the pro-
vince senior advisor.
(2) Submits the plan to Military Region Commander for approval who forwards two
copies to Assistant for Pacification Development and JGS J-3.
(3) Submits all changes to the plan to the Military Region Commander for exami-
nation and approval.
Approved For Release 2004CDN:H T1At0R001100010001-4
 Approved For t1NT`&1Vr19t'8&N(0TjjrDP80R01720R001100010001-4
(1) Assists the sector commander in formulating plans for the provision of terri-
torial security.
(2) Establishes liaison with FWMAF commanders and ARVN unit advisors in the
province to insure close coordination in the implementation of the plans.
a. The preparation of the Sector Security Plan will be based on the enemy situation,
available territorial security forces, and the Province Community Defense and
Local Development Plan. The format for the Sector Security Plan is outlined at
Inclosure A.
b. The plan will contain 5 overlays, scale: 1:100, 000
(1) Overlay showing disposition of enemy forces, enemy infiltration routes and
base areas.
(2) Overlay showing disposition of Infantry division forces, Regional Forces, and
FWMAF, if any.
(3) Overlay showing delineations of the security areas (secure area, consolidation
zone, clearing zone, and border surveillance zone).
(4) Overlay showing outposts and disposition and coverage of all organic and
support artillery by weapon type.
(5) Overlay showing the security condition of LOCs designated in Annex J (Resto-
ration and Protection of Rail, Road, and Water LOC) to AB 146.
c. The overlay showing the security areas will be enclosed with the list of hamlets in
those areas. The format for the hamlet list is outlined at Inclosure B. Significant
changes to overlays and to the list of hamlets will be promulgated as necessary.
d. Reports on territorial security progress during the month will be sent to the appro-
priate Military Region headquarters by the 10th of the following month.
[ncl
Inclosure A: Format of the Sector Security Plan
Inclosure B: Format of the Hamlet Lists
Approved For F tU!NT:t4LRDP8OROI 720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/91 191KHRUR001100010001-4
Incl A: Area Security Principles, to TAB 4: Responsibility for Preparation of Territorial
Security Plans, to Appendix A: Territorial Security
1971 Sector Security Plan
Sector
Sector Location
Date Month
Reference: 1971 Combined Campaign Plan, AB 146.
1971 Provincial Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map scale: 1:100, 000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. SITUATION.
a. Description of weather and terrain.
b. Enemy situation. Appendix A (Intelligence).
c. Organization of Sector Forces:
(1) Territorial forces: Appendix B (Forces Deployment Overlay).
(a) Regional Forces.
(b) Popular Forces.
(2) Other Security Forces.
(a) People's Self-Defense Forces.
(b) National Police Forces.
(c) RD/Son Thon Cadre Forces.
(d) Armed Propaganda Teams.
(e) Provincial Reconnaissance Units.
(3) The FWMAF and RVNAF units stationed in the sector's territory. Appendix B
(Infantry Division - RF Forces Deployment Overlay).
2. MISSION. (Outline the territorial security missions aimed at maintaining and improving
security, and protecting resources in support of the Province Community Defense and Local
Development Plan. )
Approved For Release 2004CeN FIDFNIIAt0100110001 0001-4
 Approved For tUWr1UfWTi1rDP80R01 720R001 100010001 -4
a. Concept. (Establish guidelines for continued improvement of security in accordance
with the phases of the Province Community Defense and Local Development Plan.
Outline the plan's purpose, and objectives as assigned in paragraph IIIA 1 of Annex I
(Local Self-Defense) of Community Defense and Local Development Plan, 1971. )
h. Tasks: (Define the responsibilities of each commander, to include the village chief,
each organic or attached unit including the other pacification forces, and Infantry
division, Mobile Field Forces and FWMAF stationed in the sector. )
4. ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS. (Outline the logistics system and maintenance of
military equipment for organic and attached units including pacification forces. Prescribe
the training and logistic requirements. )
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL. (Outline the chain of command and lines of communications
between the territorial commanders and various units and the sector communications
system. )
APPENDICES:
A. Intelligence (with overlay)
I~. RF-PF Deployment Overlay
C. Hamlet List
D. Security Areas Overlay
F. Fire Support of Outpost Overlay
'. LOC Security Overlay
Approved For PIfNflnlRDP80R01720R001100010001-4
IAL
 Approved For Release 2004/0jNfJDT
t001100010001-4
WAt
Incl B: List of Hamlets, to TAB 4: Responsibility for Preparation of Territorial Security
Plans, to Appendix A: Territorial Security
1. List of hamlets in secure area.
a.
b.
List the hamlets in secure areas by order in each district-village.
Location of the hamlets: ID No. - Coordinates (6 figures).
c. Hamlet security condition: A, B or C.
d. Hamlet defense forces.
(1)
Popular Force:
Unit designation of the platoon
or squad.
(2)
National Police:
Strength.
(3)
People's Self-Defense Force:
Number of armed members.
(4)
RD Cadre and/or Son-Thon Rural
Group, team or cell (strength).
Development Cadre:
2.
List of hamlets in consolidation zones.
a. List the hamlets in consolidation zones by order in each district-village.
b. Location of hamlets: ID No. - Coordinates (6 figures).
c. Hamlet security condition: C and D, E, or V, if any.
d. Hamlet Defense forces.
(1)
Regional Force:
Unit designation of the intersquad
- company - platoon of the unit
(2)
Popular Force:
Platoon designation.
(3)
National Police:
Strength.
(4)
People's Self-Defense Force:
Number of armed members.
(5)
RD Cadre and/or Son-Thon
Group - team or cell (strength).
Rural Development Cadre:
(6)
Infantry Division Forces:
Approved For Release 2004/c O NROMO R001100010001-4
 Approved For'lONF IDENTI:At-R DP80R01720R001100010001-4
3.
List. of hamlets in clearing zones (if any).
a.
List the hamlets in clearing zones by order in each district-village.
b.
Location of the hamlet: ID No.
- Coordinates (6 figures).
c.
Hamlet security condition:
d.
Hamlet defense forces: Unit designation.
4. List: of hamlets established as follows: Areas (secure, consolidated or clearing).
Protection Forces
ai
Name
u
Order
;'
District
of
o
u
a
P
0
No.
q m
0
Q u
e
o y
Hamlet
a
a
.? ~
--
0 w
s~ v
o
d a u
s.
on
.t u
.:d
0
u
(V 0
(d /o~
(a~) a)
/ rd
o 0
~J
Q )0
Q
U
Z W
W Q
~.
W U
a W
W W
H.
X
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
Y
0
P
Approved For UUNF II ALRDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20 NFIDENTtA 72OR001100010001-4
Appendix B: People's Self-Defense Force
A. During the past years, the Government has supported and guided people of all walks
of life in forming the ranks of the Support and Combat People's Self-Defense Forces
(PSDF). The PSDF Improvement Plan includes programs for the training and arming
of regular combat key Inter-Teams of the PSDF and at the same time making the
training and education of the Support more effective. The purpose of these programs
is to make the people believe in, and contribute to, the Self-Defense, Self-Govern-
ment and Self-Development objectives.
B. In order to preserve the PSDF achievement of 1970, the quality of the PSDF will be
continually improved by careful refresher training. Special emphasis should be
placed on proper use of PSDF Members in accordance with their capabilities. Awards
should be used to create a competitive spirit in study sessions and the performance
of their mission. Although competitive, they must have a spirit of mutual support
which will help all the members to carry out their duties of hamlet defense especi-
ally in populous areas. This task requires an effort to improve the organization and
training of key Inter-Teams.
A. In 1971, the PSDF will place emphasis on the consolidation and improvement of the
quality of 1, 500, 000 Combat PSDF Members (this strength includes 1, 000, 000 Hard-
core Combat Members and 500, 000 Regular Combat Members) and 2, 500, 000 Support
PSDF Members. The people will be organized into Teams and Inter-Teams so as to
increase their capabilities to protect their villages and hamlets, and participate more
actively in the Phung Hoang Campaign to neutralize and identify the VCI.
B. Emphasis will be placed on the control and screening of PSDF Members especially
Team Leaders, Inter-Team Leaders, and armed combat members in order to com-
plete the PSDF Improvement Plan and effectively execute the local Self-Defense Plan.
C. Emphasis also will be placed on collective activities and periodic seminars in
order to encourage PSDF Members to participate more actively in the People's Infor-
mation Program; participate in and support the elections to be conducted in 1971,
and local Self-Development Programs; and, to join occupational groups such as
People's Common Activity Groups and Farmers Associations, and Youth, Gymnas-
tics, and Sport Programs, particularly in urban areas.
III. IMPLEMENTATION.
A. Basic Standards.
1. Organization and Admission of PSDF Members.
a. Admission of Regular Combat PSDF Members. Local authorities will conduct
a census of all young men of PSDF ages, who are
Approved For Release 2004 FffN1Ut0R001100010001-4
 ApproNF1IBENCHio1 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
not participating in the PSDF Organization and recruit them for PSDF Teams
and [nter-Teams in order to fill up all understrength PSDF units and replace
deserters, aged (over 51 years old), killed, and disabled PSD:F
Members. In addition, young girls will be encouraged to voluntarily join
Combat PSDF ranks.
b. Admission of Hardcore Combat PSDF Members. Strong, loyal, with good
behavior, and honest elements among Regular Combat PSDF Members will
be selected and admitted to 15, 000 Hardcore Inter-Teams (525, 000 Mem-
bers), 10, 000 Hardcore Teams in rural areas (110, 000 Members), and
33, 182 Hardcore Teams in urban areas (365, 000 Members) to increase the
strength of Hardcore PSDF Members to 1, 000, 000 in 1971.
c. Admission of Support PSDF Members. Local authorities will conduct a
census and properly motivate the population in order to encourage old men,
women, and children over seven years of age to voluntarily join in the
Support PSDF ranks so that 15, 000 Development Inter-Teams can be acti-
vated to support all the Hardcore Combat PSDF Inter-Teams.
a. Training of PSDF Members. All Support PSDF Members and Hardcore and
Regular Combat PSDF Members will be trained and retrained right in their
respective localities.
All mobile and on-the-spot Training Teams from the Prefecture, Provinces,
and Cities will have to coordinate with the Military Sectors and Sub-Sectors
to consolidate and reinforce their strength with qualified personnel in order
to fully meet training requirements.
The training schedule and documents will be disseminated by the PSDF
General Directorate to the Prefecture and the Provinces and Cities for
implementation.
b. Training of Team Leaders and Inter-Team Leaders. Hardcore Combat
Team Leaders and Inter-Team Leaders will be trained, on a rotating basis,
at the National and Inter-Provincial PF Training Centers in all Military
Regions, according to a program coordinated between the central govern-
ment and the respective Military Regions, which will be disseminated later.
a. Armament. PSDF Members will be armed on the basis of one weapon per
two Members or one weapon per five Members as required by the local
situation. Prefectural, Provincial, and City Authorities will be flexible in
distributing weapons giving priority to the most enthusiastic members and
to those localities where the armament requirement is must urgent.
b. Replacement of Weapons: All seriously damaged weapons will be returned
to the concerned Sector Direct Support and Management Logistics Center
(SDSMLC) and lost weapons will be reported so that procedures for 100%
replacement may be initiated.
ApproNf'BENTI/01 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20HU FI A-4
a. The Prefecture and all Provinces and Cities will carefully study the imple-
mentation of this Program in each hamlet and determine the time for test-
ing and evaluating the capabilities of all Hardcore PSDF Inter-Teams which,
in conjunction with the National Police, will replace the Popular Forces
in maintaining security in hamlets.
b. Provincial and City authorities will make plans for RF and PF troops to
coordinate with, and provide Support to, PSDF Inter-Teams which assume
the protection of hamlets based on the general defense and defensive prac-
tice plans of villages and hamlets.
c. Local authorities should encourage PSDF Members to participate in, and
support, National Police Teams in issuing Identity Cards to all people in
the villages and hamlets so as to dispel any fear that the people will
encounter difficulties when they request ID Cards. Local authorities should
also urge PSDF Members,who meet the requirements, to enlist in local
National Police.
a. Prefectural, Provincial and City authorities will establish a schedule for
screening all Regular and Hardcore Combat PSDF Members, especially
the Leaders, in order to eliminate traitors.
b. Issue control cards to all Hardcore PSDF Leaders, using the card format
distributed by the PSDF General Directorate.
c. Encourage and properly reward those PSDF Members who discover by them-
selves, or help to discover,VC underground agents during competi-
tive campaigns to eliminate the Communists.
a. People's Information Program. Local authorities should provide ample
opportunities for all PSDF Members to conduct and participate in
seminars in order to study and popularize all subjects within the People's
Information Program. This operation aims to develop a sense of community
cooperation, patriotism, and belief in the inevitable victory against the
Communists in all members of the PSDF.
b. Phung Hoang Campaign. Each PSDF Inter-Team should select some
members, having an aptitude for intelligence activities, for training and should
establish a people's information and liaison organization in order to coordi-
nate with, and support the Phung Hoang Campaign in protecting the people
from VC terrorism and eliminating the VCI.
c. Chieu Hoi Program. Besides the Phung Hoang Campaign, PSDF Members
should participate in the Chieu Hoi Program which induces enemy cadre
and troops to return to the just national cause. Also, they should be eager
to encourage families, who have relatives in the VC ranks to encourage
Approved For Release 200 FDfNI[720R001 100010001-4
 Approved FCr N t> TA CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
those relatives to rally to the just national cause, and thereby rejoin their
families and live in happiness.
d. Election of President, Vice President, and Lower House Representatives.
All PSDF Members will be employed to effectively support the elections to
be held for President, Vice President and Lower House Representatives
to be held in the Prefecture, all Provinces, and Cities in 1971.
e. Farmers' Associations. Local authorities should encourage and support
PSDF Members to participate in activities of Farmers' Associations and
People's Common Activity Groups, and support the implementation of local
self-development projects under the 1971 Community Defense and Local
Development Plan.
f. Youth Program. PSDF Members must participate in youth, gymnastics,
and sports activities (camping, seminars, youth rallies, sports contests,
entertainment shows, campfires, etc. ). There will be a coordinated pro-
gram of activities in which all PSDF and abled-bodied youth can parti-
cipate.
Distribute the goals of PSDF armament, training, and organization to subordi-
nate provinces. A copy of thisdistribution of goals must be forwarded to the
Coordination Center, CPDC, and the PSDF General Directorate, MOI, in order
that these agencies can follow progress and expeditiously establish essential
procedures for the provision of equipment and the training of leaders of the
hardcore PSDF Inter-Teams.
Follows, supervises, controls, inspects, and publicizes strong points, and
corrects weak points found in the PSDF by the prefecture, provinces, and cities.
a. Establish a PSDF Plan for their respective localities based on the guide-
lines set forth by the National PSDF Committee, and the objectives distri-
buted by the respective Military Regions.
b. Distribute goals to each village, and supervise, control, guide, and monitor
the implementation of the PSDF Program.
c. Forward periodical reports on the weekly and monthly results in the imple-
mentation of the Program to the PSDF General Directorate, MOI.
All PSDF activities from central to local levels will be closely coordinated with
those of the concerned Ministries and Agencies in order to get mutual support for
the attainment of established goals. PSDF requires the support from the following
Ministries and Agencies:
t-B-4
Approved FC11IfflMfAt1A-RDP80RO1 720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004 NrI AtOR001100010001-4
1. Ministry of Defense and JGS/RVNAF. These agencies will provide logistics and
weapons support and detach personnel (Officers and NCOs of the Regular Force
and Regional Forces) to PSDF Management Agencies, especially at the local level
in order to activate additional mobile and on-the-spot Training Teams. Officers
from Military Sectors and Sub-Sectors will take part in the training of all hard-
core Combat PSDF Inter-Team Members in intelligence techniques.
2. National Police General Directorate. This agency will support the screening of
Combat PSDF Members, coordinate with the PSDF to exploit and eliminate VC
infrastructures, and train PSDF Members in the techniques of maintaining
security and performing intelligence operations.
3. Ministry of Chieu Hoi. This Ministry will instruct all Armed Propaganda Teams
in the provinces to coordinate with Hardcore PSDF Inter-Teams in order to con-
duct security, propaganda, and seminar operations in their localities.
4. Ministry of Social Welfare. This Ministry will assign Social Welfare Cadre to
guide the activities at all the Provincial Community Centers, and to train all
Support PSDF Teams in Social Welfare operations.
5. Ministry of Information. This Ministry will provide cadre and documents which
provide study guides on political subjects, train all Support PSDF Teams in
methods of information, and publicize all essential information in the molding of
public opinion.
6. Ministry of Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development. This
Ministry will assign cadre and Land Surveyors to provide technical guidance on
cultivation and utilization of fertilizers, vocational training, animal husbandry
and fishing to be used in self-development by the PSDF Teams.
7. Ministry of Rural Development and Ministry for Development of Ethnic Minori-
ties. These Ministries will assign cadre to take part in the training of Support
and Combat PSDF Members and to participate in VSD projects which are reser-
ved for PSDF development.
8. Ministry of Health. This Ministry will assign cadre to guide and train female
Support PSDF Team members in first aid and public sanitation procedures based
on the health and first aid Support Training Program.
Ministry of Education. This Ministry will authorize all Primary School Teachers
to take part, after their teaching hours, in the PSDF training and vocational
training programs and assist PSDF Members in combating illiteracy.
10. Youth General Directorate. This Directorate will provide cadre, documents, and
facilities to train PSDF Members in leadership and youth organization as well as
to implement the youth, gymnastics, and sport activities program, and hold mass
games within the PSDF organization.
1. Planning. The Prefecture, Provinces, and Cities will write their PSDF Plans
according to the following format:
Approved For Release 200
I-B-5
N flDTtA [20R001100010001-4
 Approved For rONyFNTFkLRDP80R01720R001100010001-4
General situation and PSDF main operations in the Prefecture, Provinces, and
Cities.
Section 2. Concept.
(Operational concept is set forth to accomplish PSDF operations.
Section 3. Implementation.
Basic standards.
Tasking.
Coordination (with other military and civilian agencies).
Planning and reports.
Section 4. Goals.
Goals distributed to provinces and to districts for the whole year.
a. At central level. The PSDF General Directorate will collect and summarize
all reports from the Prefecture, provinces, and cities and submit weekly
and monthly reports to higher authorities. This agency also will urge,
control, and enjoin local authorities to insure the timeliness and accuracy
of these reports. (Ref: Letters 824-BNV/KH. 14, 10 January 1968, and
203-BNV/KH/21/M, 23 January 1969).
b. At Local level. The Prefecture, all Provinces, Cities, Districts, and
Villages will submit their weekly and monthly reports and summarized
reports to central authorities. These reports will be completed on forms
disseminated to all localities by Postal Message 3883-BNV/NDTV/6 MOI,
23 June 1960, Circular 108-BNV/NDTV/KH9, MOI, 21 March 1970, and
Postal Message 378-BNV/NDTV/KH9, MOI, 14 April 1970.
IV. GOALS.
A. PSDF Goals for the whole country.
1. Organization. Fifteen thousand Hardcore Combat PSDF Inter-Teams will be
activated in 1971 as follows:
a. In addition to 500, 000 Hardcore Combat PSDF Members, who were trained
and armed in 1970, 500, 000 additional Hardcore Combat PSDF Members
will be specially trained in order to increase the efficiency of security
activities in villages and hamlets. Accordingly, there will be 1, 000, 000
Hardcore Combat Members and 500, 000 Regular Combat Members to bring
the total strength of Combat PSDF Members to 1, 500, 000.
I-B-6
Approved For ONFIDiNTFAtRD8OROI 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20C"FENTI 720R001100010001-4
b. Support PSDF Members will be organized into 15, 000 Development Inter-
Teams. Each of these Inter-Teams will provide support for one Hardcore
Inter-Team. Each Development Inter-Team will consist of one Old-MenspSDF
team one Female PSDF Team, and one Youth PSDF Team. Each of these
PSDF Teams will conduct weekly activities, and part of their activity program
will deal with the People's Information, theme, methods of information
dissemination, and political indoctrination.
a. The newly recruited five hundred thousand Hardcore PSDF Members who have
just been added to make 1, 000, 000 Hardcore Combat PSDF Members will be
trained in their respective localities, and 710 Inter-Team Leaders, 45, 312
Team Leaders (to be assigned in 1971), 15, 000 Assistant Inter-Team Leaders
and 45, 000 Assistant Team Leaders will be trained at National and Inter-
Provincial Training Centers.
b. Emphasis will be placed on the training and maintenance of PSDF weapons.
All local basic training courses for Combat PSDF Members will have to be
completed.
c. The Support PSDF Members (five prestigious Members per Team) within the
15, 000 Development Inter-Teams will be trained in the techniques of
People's Information so as to enable them to participate more vigorously in
the People's Information Program.
d. Local authorities must also place emphasis on training PSDF Members in the
collection of information and procedures for making simple and discreet
reports to support the Phung Hoang Campaign; and on indoctrinating all PSDF
Leaders so that they can clearly understand the Phung Hoang Campaign and
participate actively in the neutralization of VCIs.
e. Emphasis also will be placed on vocational training, activities, seminars,
and political indoctrination in order to encourage PSDF Members to do the
following:
Participate actively in the improvement of the people's livelihood and support
development projects.
Participate vigorously in People's Common Activity Groups, Farmers'
Associations, and other people's organizations as inspired by genuine
patriotism,
f. Coordinate with the Youth General Directorate to develop all Youth Activity
Programs in PSDF Organizations such as campfires, sports contests, Youth
rallies, and culture drama.
The various localities will also assign youth cadre to train and guide members
of the PSDF in leadership and youth organizations so that they participate in
the operations of,the above mentioned activities.
Approved For Release 2cCONF1K#ftAt720R001100010001-4
 Approved FC of NyIA (IARDP8oRo1 720R001 100010001-4
a. in 1971, 700, 000 weapons will be issued to the PSDF. These weapons will
be distributed as follows:
(1) Six hundred thousand weapons will be distributed to 1, 500, 000 Combat
PSDF Members based on the ratio which will meet the local require-
ments and situation.
2) One hundred thousand weapons will be used to replace damaged or lost
weapons and to meet other unexpected requirements.
b. Emphasis will be placed on the maintenance of weapons collectively used by
PSDF Members. In addition, a proper and timely Logistics Program for
the replacement of damaged and lost weapons must be formed in 1971.
13. PSDF Objective for Military Regions.
1. Organization.
a. Common organization.
Combat PSDF Objective for 1971 (2)
MR
Hardcore
Regular
Support
Grand
Remark
Combat PSDF (1)
Combat PSDF
Total (2)
PSDF (2)
Total
1
115, 105
88, 075
203, 180
422, 000
625, 180
2
159,235
104,765
264,000
466,000
730,000
3
332, 570
199,430
532,000
730,000
1, 262,000
4
393,090
107,730
500,820
8Z2,000
1, 382,820
Total: 1, 000, 000 500, 000 1,500,000 2, 500, 000 4, 000, 000
Remarks:
(1) Hardcore Combat PSDF goal for 1970 was increased to bring the Hardcore
Combat PSDF strength throughout the country to 1, 000, 000 members.
(2) Combat (hardcore and regular) and Support PSDF objectives remain unchanged
in 1971.
Approved FUMFIDIVIA [IA-RDP8OROI 720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200CIJNFIDENT1At20R001100010001-4
Hardcore Combat PSDF Goals for
Hardcore
1 71
Grand Total
Combat PSDF
Additional Rural
MR
Goals for
Hardcore Combat
Rural Hardcore
Urban Hardcore
1970
PSDF Inter-
Combat PSDF
Combat PSDF
Teams
Teams (1)
Teams (2)
2, 300 Inter-
.115 Inter-
1, 607 Teams
1, 173 Team
2,415
Teams
Teams
Inter-Team
1
(80, 500 mem-
(4, 025 members)
(17,677 member
)(1Z, 903 mem-
2, 780 Team
bers)
hers)
(115,105
members )
2, 730 Inter-
135 Inter-
1, 925 Teams
3,435 Teams
2, 865
Teams
Teams
Inter-Team
(95,550 mem-
(4, 725 members)
(21, 175 members
) (37, 785 mem-
5,360
2
bers)
hers)
ms
Teams
(159, 235
member
000 Inter-
200 Inter-
2, 800 Teams
14, 070 Teams
4, 200 Inte
Teams
Teams
Team
3
(140, 000 mem-
(30, 800 mem-
(154, 770
16, 870
bers)
(7, 000 members)
bers)
members)
Teams
(332, 570
members)
5, 260 Inter-
260 Inter-
3, 668 Teams
14, 504 Teams
5, 520 Inter
Teams
Teams
Team
4
18,17Z Tear
(184, 100 mem-
(9, 100 members)
(40, 348 member
)(159, 544 mem-
bers)
bers)
(393, 090
member
14, 290 Inter-
710 Inter-
10, 000 Teams
33, 182 Teams
15,000
Teams
Teams
Inter -Team
TOTAL:
(500, 150 mem-
(24, 850 members
(110, 000 mem-
(365, 000 mem-
43, 182 Tea
bers)
bers)
bers)
(1, 000, 000
members
s
s
s
s)
r-
s
-
s
s)
s
ms
)
A"' I-B-9
G
Approved For Release 200INF1O-[NIIAL2OROO1 100010001-4
 Approved FcCONFI DN41IAtA RDP80R01 720R001 100010001-4
Remarks:
(1) Eleven-man Rural Hardcore Combat PSDF Teams will be activated in:
- Hamlets where PSDF strength is not enough for an Inter-Team.
- Hamlets where PSDF Inter-Team was activated, and the extra strength can be
formed into one Team.
(2) Eleven-man Urban Hardcore Combat PSDF Teams will be activated in populous
urban Hamlets and Khoms (Sub-Wards).
Approved FC 1 IEIT JASIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200
fIDEN1UAL720R001 1 00010001-4
MR
Support PSDF Goal
for 1971 (1)
Development
(Support) PSDF
Inter-Team
Goal for 1971
Remarks
1
422, 000 Members
2, 415 Inter-Teams
Support PSDF Members will be
(84, 525 Members)
organized into Development PSDF
2
466, 000 Members
2, 865 Inter-Teams
Inter-Teams. Each Development PSD
(100, 275 Members)
-Team consists of three Teams:
Inter-Team
730, 000 Members
4, 200 Inter-Teams
One Old-Men Team, one Female Team
(147, 000 Members)
nd one Youth Team in order to effec-
and
882, 000 Members
5, 520 Inter-Teams
tively support hardcore Combat PSDF
(193, 200 Members)
Inter-Teams.
-Teams.
2,500,000
15, 000 Inter-Teams
(525, 000 Members)
Note: (1) Support PSDF goal remains unchanged in 1971, but 525, 000 support members
will be organized into 15, 000 Development PSDF Inter-Teams to support
hardcore Combat PSDF Inter-Teams.
F
,
Approved For Release 2000 FIp-[NII1&20R001100010001-4
 Approved For REONFIID!cN:TtAtD80R01720R001 10 0010 001-4
a. Regular Combat PSDF training objective for 1971.
88, 075
104, 765
199, 43 0
107, 730
(1) Regular Combat PSDF training objective for
1971 will be 100% of the total strength of
Combat PSDF Members who are organized
into Teams and Inter-Teams, the training
will be conducted in the respective localities
by local authorities.
Approved For R fIDN T1IALDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2009f WNf -4
Hardcore
Additional
Rural
Urban
Inter-
Rural
Hardcore
Hardcore
MR
Functions
Teams
Hardcore
Teams
Teams
Total
Remarks
in 1970
Inter-
(a)
Teams
Inter-Teamldr
0
115
0'
0
115
(a) These hard
1
core Combat
Asst Inter-
PSDF Teams
Team leader
2,300
115
0
2,415
are not include
in other hard-
Team leader
345
1,607
1,173
3,125
core PSDF
Inter-Teams
Asst Team ldr
6,900
345
0
0
7,245
Member
0
3,105
16,070
11,730
30,905
Total:
9,200
4,025
17,677
12,903
43,805
Inter-Teamldr
0
135
0
0
135
2
Asst Inter-
Team leader
2,730
135
0
0
2,865
Team leader
0
405
1,925
3,435
5,765
Asst Team ldr
8,190
405
0
0
8,595
Members
0
3,645
19,250
34,350
57,245
Total:
10,920
4,725
21, 175
37,785
74,605
Inter-Teamldr
200
0
0
200
3
Asst Inter-
Team leader
4,000
200
0
0
4,200
Team leader
0
600
2,800
14,070
17,470
Asst Team ldr
12,000
600
0
0
12,600
Members
0
5,400
28,000
140,700
174,100
Total:
16,000
7,000
30,800
154,770
208,570
-
d
Approved For Release 9Nf1D[Nj'1AJ172oRoo1100010001-4
 Approved For ?flU=Wr1D[*T:j#RDP80R01 720R001 100010001 -4
Inter-Teamldr
0
260
0
0
260
4
Asst Inter-
Team leader
5,260
260
0
0
5,520
Team leader
0
780
3,668
14,504
18,952
Asst Team ldr
15,780
780
0
0
16,560
Members
0
7,020
36,680
145,038
188,738
Total:
21,040
9,100
40,348
159,542
230,030
--
-------------
Grand Total:
-------------
---------
57,160
----------
----------
24,850
-----------
----------
110,000
I -----------
----------
365,000
----------- i
--------
557,010
----------
1. The training of Assistant PSDF Inter-Team Leaders and Assistant Team Leaders
is only partially implemented to date. Therefore in 1971, the Prefecture, Pro-
vinces, and Cities will send Assistant PSDF Inter-Team Leaders and Assistant
PSDF Team Leaders to the appropriate Training Center for training based on fol-
lowing order of priority:
Priority 1: All Assistant Inter-Team Leaders and and Assistant Team Leaders of
additional rural hardcore Combat PSDF Inter-Teams to be organized in 1971.
Priority 2: All Assistant Inter-Teams Leaders and Assistant Team Leaders of hard-
core Combat PSDF Inter-Teams which were organized in 1970.
2. The selection of hardcore Combat PSDF Leaders for training must be implemented
based on following criteria:
One Inter-Team Leader selected for training must be accompanied by three
Team Leaders who are subordinate to his Inter-Team.
One Assistant Inter-Team Leader selected for training must be accompanied
by three Assistant Team Leaders who are in the same Inter-Team with him.
Assistant Inter-Team Leaders and Assistant Team Leaders will attend the
same training program and at the same Training Center with Inter-Team
Leaders and Team Leaders.
3. Hardcore Combat PSDF Members who will attend on-the-spot training will be orga-
nized into Inter-Teams and Teams with following strength:
Rural hardcore Inter-Team consists of 27 Members (because Inter-Team
Leaders, Team Leaders, Assistant Inter-Team Leaders and Assistant Team
Leaders will be sent to Training Centers).
Approved For UN Fl EN1Tkt0P801017201001 100 010001-4
 Approved For Release 2001cO: MA!OR001100010001-4
MR
PSDF Leaders
PSDF Members
Total
1
12,900
30,905
43,805
2
17,360
57,245
74,605
3
34,470
174,100
208,570
4
41,292
188,738
230,030
Total:
106,02Z
450,988
5 57, 01 0
c. Goals of training of Support PSDF Members within the Development Inter-
Teams in 1971.
MR
1
84,525
(2415 Inter-Teams)
Remarks
Training goal will be 100% of the goal for organiza-
tion of Development PSDF Inter-Teams
100,275
(2865 Inter-Teams)
147,000
(4200 Inter-Teams)
193,200
(5520 Inter-Teams)
525,000
(15,000 Inter-Teams)
Goal for weapons to be issued in 1971
MR
Hardcore Combat
Regular Combat
Total
Remarks
PSDF (1)
PSDF (2)
1
80,500
16,200
96,700
(1) Average ratio is one weapon per
two Members.
2
95,550
16,000
111,550
(2) Average ratio is one weapon per
five Members.
3
140,000
33,000
173,000
4
184,100
34,650
218,750
Total:
500,150
99,850
600,000
Approved For Release 200~N F1q f j?jW 20R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20000N FIIDRRAL20R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
ANNEX I: LOCAL SELF-DEFENSE
Appendix C: National Police
I. GENERAL.
A. GENERAL SITUATIONS.
The National Police have contributed to the improvement of security by increasing
the activities of all their branches, improving local organizations and deploying
National Police personnel down to the villages and hamlets. In this manner they
have contributed to efforts to achieve the objective of "control and protection of
90% of the total population and the realization of national sovereignty throughout the
nation" in the 1969 Pacification and Development Plan, and "to provide 100% security
for all the people of which 90% live in AB security areas" as stated in the 1970 Paci-
fication and Development Plan.
The National Police presence in villages and hamlets has contributed to the improve-
ment of security at the local level and helped the people understand and respect
national laws. Therefore, the presence of National Police in rural areas has gained
rapport with and support from the people as well as from the village and hamlet
officials.
Because of the achievements made under the above-mentioned plans, the Communists
have gradually lost the environment in which to carry out their activities and have
completely changed their strategy and set forth their main tasks as follows:
- Return to guerrilla tactics and step up terrorist acts and sabotage to destroy
our Pacification and Development Plans.
- Use every means to undermine the Nationalists politically.
In order to exploit the successes gained in all fields, the 1971 Community Defense
and Local Development Plan has been structured to consolidate and develop previous
accomplishments based on the three following objectives:
- Local Self-Defense
- Local Self-Government
- Local Self-Development
B. MISSION.
The National Police, in association with the RF and PF, become the territorial
security force responsible for insuring territorial security and elimination of the
VCI under the "Local Self-Defense" objective which is to bring an AB level of se-
curity to 95%6 of the people throughout the country. In close coordination with the
RF, PF and PSDF, the National Police must continue to increase its activities
for the defense of villages, hamlets and the protection of pacified and densely-
populated regions. Furthermore, the NP must be strong enough to protect its own
installations, documents and personnel. Duties are:
Approved For Release 200O K: Ti J0R001100010001-4
 Approved For F CON FttDNlTALRDP8OROI72OII 100010001-4
1. Consolidate law enforcement and the maintenance of order in both cities
and rural areas in order to protect the people's lives and property.
2. Play the main role in the neutralization of the VCI with the support of ARVN,
RF, PF and PSDF in order to improve territorial security and prevent the
enemy from using our manpowe r and material resources against us. In
order to discharge this duty all NP personnel must directly or indirectly
participate in the neutralization of the VCI.
In coordination with the PSDF, assume responsibility for the protection of
completely pacified areas so as to release those RF and PF for operations
in the outer perimeter of those areas.
A. Promote and maintain a spirit of cooperation among the people, between the people
and the government, and among government agencies under the objectives of Local
Self-Defense, Local Self-Government and Local Self-Development.
B. Employ the villages and hamlets as the foundation for the improvement and consolida-
tion of security and order and for the enforcement of national laws.
C. Improve the operational relationships between the NP and the PSDF, to gain coordina-
tion with and provide guidance for the latter in support of NP operations such as the
ID Card program, family census, identification of the VCI; also preventing the enemy
from collecting and purchasing food, conducting patrols, laying night ambushes,
guarding administrative installations and communication networks, and ensuring
safety for village and hamlet officials.
D. Abolutely respect the rights, interests and dignity of all people through humane treat-
ment as prescribed by law and under all circumstances in order to avoid illegal
detention.
E. Create close coordination among those Divisions at the GDNP, as well as among the
services and sections at the various Directorates, provincial services and district
sections, in the program of neutralization of the VCI so that all NP personnel take
part in this task.
F. Encourage and motivate the people to cooperate closely and voluntarily with the NP
in the eradication of social evils and in the maintenance of security and public order
through impartial enforcement of laws in an equitable and disinterested manner.
The 1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan requires not only external
cooperation (among government agencies, between the government and the people,
and among the people themselves) but it also needs internal cooperation on a lateral
basis (among Divisions) and a vertical basis (from GDNP to the Village NP Sub-
stations) in accordance with the spirit of joint responsibility.
Those Divisions directly subordinate to GDNP must workout realistic plans in their
technically assigned fields and strengthen their organization and management realis-
tically. This must be based on a clear definition of mission, concepts and objectives.
Approved For cONFtENTIAtR0P801017201001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20O f JNFIAL720001 100010001-4
Make plans for the rec-ruitment and assignment of personnel based on
the personnel strength demands of NP units so as to bring the total
personnel strength of the NP branch up to 122, 000. Recruitment prior-
ity is reserved for local people, including ethnic minorities. Two-thirds
of the personnel of village NP sub-stations will be recruited at rural
villages and hamlets and recommended by Village Councils or Hamlet
Administrative Committees.
Assign personnel and provide enough fillers for NP units, with priority
to those eight provinces confirmed as having the most VCI (Quang Nam,
Quang Tin, Quang Ngai, Binh Dinh, Dinh Tuong, Vinh Long, Kien Hoa,
An Xuyen) and for other NP units in secure and densely populated areas.
Re-examine the use of facilities used by NP units, and give priority
of use of those facilities to NP units in the said eight provinces which
are confirmed as having the most VCI and to those NP units operating
in secure and densely populated areas.
(4) Prepare the draft budget and determine the priority for use of funds
based on the requirements of NP units to ensure the effective implemen-
tation of this plan.
Study in coordination with the Office of Legislative Research and other
sections in order to improve and modernize both the organizational
system and its working methods in order to obtain efficient and
standardized technical and administrative operations.
(6) Help organize the NP Supply Services at the NP Directorates in order to
support the provincial NP Services with daily staples and establish spe-
cial programs to assist NP units operating in localities where the cost of
living is high.
(7) Study the construction of NP dwelling quarters with priority for NP units
in remote areas.
(8) Give political education, based on the People's Information Plan, to
all police personnel.
(9) Guide and instruct personnel so that, apart from discharging their
technical duty, they must participate in the neutralization of the VCI.
Study and improve the organizational system and working methods so
that technical operations will be more effective with priority to the Judi-
cial Police Service, the ID Card Service, the General Archives Service
and the Identification Service.
Approved For Release 20MF:I fl FTIM720R001100010001-4
 ApO fi fi fIflENsy[kL04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
(2) Expedite the issuance of ID Cards to the people, so that the ID Card Pro-
gram can be completed no later than June 1971. Priority to Military
Region 4.
(3) Remind and encourage NP units to initiate campaigns of traffic control
and elimination of social evils. Control the implementation and measure
the results of these campaigns.
(4) Prepare program to explain traffic regulations (with the help of such
media as radio, TV, press, pocket illustration books, etc. ). Coordi-
nate with the Training Divisions to form "Police Students" organizations
in school.
(5) Assign judicial interrogators and administrative investigators to rein-
force the personnel strength of NP units operating in secure and densely
populated areas where many breaches of the law occur.
(6) Establish programs for the close control of aliens to prevent them from
staying illegally in Vietnam.
(7) Guide and instruct personnel so that, from discharging their technical
duty, they must participate in the neutralization of the VCI.
(1) Emphasize the organization of people's intelligence nets by National
Police units, especially among the PSDF.
(2) Keep close contact with and support Phung Hoang Bloc so as to neutra-
lize a maximum number of VCI. (Neutralization goal of VCI is 1, 200
monthly.)
Coordinate with the Phung Hoang Bloc to devise a plan to destroy com-
munist tax and finance cadre to prevent their collection of taxes and pur-
chase of food to support the war.
(4) Check the status of Special Police personnel and interrogator strength
in the eight Provinces confirmed as having the most VCI(Quang Nam,
Quang Tin, Quang Ngai, Binh Dinh, Dinh Tuong, Vinh Long, Kien Hoa,
and An Xuyen) in order to reinforce and replace personnel in these
locations.
Remind and guide National Police units to establish control dossiers and
monitor the activities of ralliers who have returned to their homes and
of persons released who were confined for offenses against national se-
curity.
(6) Notify National Police units to detach interrogators to Province Chieu
Hoi Centers in order to help them in the interrogation of Hoi-Chanhs and
detect false rallying.
(7) Improve organizational and working methods to make technical opera-
tions more effective with priority to Planning Activities, Operations
ApOON FIflENIAtb04b01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2002 mflft" cAt0R001100010001-4
(8) Place emphasis on special police basic training and supplementary
training for personnel of the Central Intelligence Training Center and
Intelligence Training Divisions of Directorates. Notify National Police
units so that they may properly employ those personnel already trained
in Special Police operations.
(9) Take responsibility for intelligence training of Field Police personnel
in Training Divisions of the Directorate and the Central Intelligence
Training Center.
(10) Coordinate with the Central Training Command and JZ/Joint General
Staff in order to instruct National Police units to provide intelligence
training to RF, PF, and PSDF when requested.
(11) All Special Police personnel must directly participate in the task of
neutralizing the VCI.
(1) Coordinate closely with the Phung Hoang Bloc in the task of neutralizing
the VCI.
(Z) Form 19 additional platoons of Field Police for Districts which have no
Field Police, replenish Field Police strength, provide equipment to
Field Police units, grant priority to those in the eight Provinces con-
firmed as having the most VCI (Quang Nam, Quang Tin, Quang Ngai,
Binh Dinh, Dinh Tuong, Kien Hoa, Vinh Long, and An Xuyen).
Form additional River Patrol Police units in Provinces having many
waterways, with priority reserved to the eight Provinces listed above,
and to localities having many rivers and where provincial security
evaluation of hamlets is rated mostly category C (75% or higher).
(4) Design a plan to reinforce Field Police in Districts having a very large
surface area, to give effectiveness to the program of neutralization of
the VCI. Also strengthen large and populous urban Centers in order to
support the uniformed police and the Special Police in their work of
population control and the prevention and control of disturbances.
Send at least two field policemen from each District Field Police pla-
toon for intelligence training at the Directorate's Intelligence Training
Division or the Central Intelligence Training Center at the Directorate
General of National Police.
(6) Continue sending Field Police cadre for training at Military Schools.
Coordinate with the Special Police Bloc to devise a plan to destroy
Communist tax and finance cadre.
Approved For Release 20 V ONF ETMt20R001100010001-4
 N FIEtWW W/04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
Complete and improve the formation of Village Phung Hoang Committees.
Grant priority to the eight Provinces confirmed as having the most VCI
(Quang Nam, Quang Tin, Quang Ngai, Binh Dinh, Dinh Tuong, Kien Hoa,
Vinh Long, and An Xuyen).
(3) Pay special attention to and guide and assist the above eight Provinces
and densely populated urban areas in the task of the maximum neutrali-
zation of the VCI.
(4) Plan to form Phung Hoang Committees in wards and sub-wards when
administrative organization in these places becomes standardized.
(5) The monthly objective of neutralization of VCI is 1, 200. The main target
remains communist hard-core cadres of A and B categories.
(6) Coordinate with the Ministry of Chieu Hoi and the Special Police Bloc
to devise a plan for the employment of Hoi Chanh Armed Propaganda
Teams in the neutralization of the VCI.
(7) Continue developing the Phung Hoang Program to motivate all people
to actively participate in the neutralization of the VCI.
Emphasize the training of personnel of Phung Hoang committees at
various levels to gain greater effectiveness in the elimination of the
VCI. At least 50% of Phung Hoang Committees' total personnel must
receive training.
(9) Complete the modernization of the system for preparing records,
following up, and identifying the VCI.
(1) Design a basic plan for the training of 30, 000 newly recruited members
according to the personnel requirements of 122, 000 persons for the en-
tire Branch.
Coordinate with and contact the National Training Center, Vung Tau to
establish a Program in which at least 50% of the total of newly-recruited
personnel will participate in a two-week training course at this Center
to imbue them with the Nationalist Cadre spirit.
Remind the National Police Services to establish programs to send
Chiefs of Village National Police sub-stations to training along with
other village and hamlet officials at the Province Training Centers
and Provincial In-Service Training Centers.
(4) Continue organizing supplementary training courses for command eche-
lons from district and above in order to complete training for all Chiefs
of provincial NP Services and Deputy Chiefs of provincial NP Services
and to provide training to 50% of the Chiefs of district NP stations and
Chiefs of NP Offices and Sections.
(5) Coordinate with the Police Bloc to design programs and have local
elements train "Police students" organizations (school personnel and
DNF1DETl AI_4/04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20 COFINF720R001100010001-4
students) in schools on the utilization of public roads /application of
traffic control during the hours students are entering or leaving school.
(1) Continue periodic and unannounced inspections of National Police units
to assist, guide, and control the execution of Central Directives and to
evaluate the units' operation.
Continue technical guidance and assistance to Regional Inspection Teams
so that these teams may inspect the provincial police services, district
police services, and NP sub-stations at least twice this year (1971).
(3) Organize study sessions and give guidance on the protection of classi-
fied material and installation security and to check security procedures.
(4) Continue screening the National Police ranks to develop the people's
confidence in the National Police Agencies.
(5) Improve temporary detention camps and modernize systems for moni-
toring prisoners.
Guide recruitment and distribute newly-recruited personnel to the pro-
vincial police services according to criteria fixed by the Directorate
General of National Police, and check the implementation of these
criteria.
Assign manpower and relevant facilities in order to make operations
efficient (grant priority to the Provinces confirmed as having the
most VCI and to the densely populated areas).
(3) Direct and guide operating units to speed up the organization of people's
intelligence nets. Give special emphasis to the execution of this task
in the PSDF.
(4) Supervise the provincial Police Services in the completion of 100% of
the control and classification of the population prior to June 1971.
Encourage and guide National Police Provincial Services, district
police services and sub-stations to complete 100% of the establishment
of control dossiers and monitoring of activities of Hoi Chanhs and
ex-convicts who were confined for offenses against national security.
(6) Set up special programs and liaison with Province Chiefs to obtain
assistance in personnel and facilities in order to complete 100% of the
ID Card programs of the various provincial police services prior
to June 1971.
(7) Notify the provincial Police Services to regularly organize traffic
campaigns and campaigns for the eradication of social vices. A
necessary preparatory period must be allotted for study and the
guidance of personnel. Specify the time for simultaneous initiation
I-C-7
Approved For Release 2091FI*L720R001100010001-4
 A FI INY IAt/04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
(8) Complete the training for 100% of the total Chiefs of Village National
Police stations.
(9) Organize training on command techniques for Chiefs of the National
Police at all levels. Provide training for 100% of the districts Chiefs
and 50% of chiefs of offices and sections.
(10) Take charge of the intelligence training given to NPFF members of
District NPFF platoons. Coordinate with G-2 Corps Headquarters,
for providing intelligence training to PF and RF soldiers when re-
quested.
(11) Continue inspections and provide guidance for the subordinate National
Police provincial services, district services and village sub-stations
at least twice a year.
Conduct recruitment in conformity with the distribution table of the
concerned Directorate. Two thirds of the total personnel strength of
village sub-stations must be recruited in the village and hamlets and
those who are recruited must have been recommended by either the
Village Council or Hamlet Administrative Committee.
Improve the organization and personnel of Village National Police
Sub-stations established by recruitment efforts. Continue to
establish National Police Sub-stations in villages within 45 days after
elections.
(3) Play a main role in the neutralization of local VCI and guide all per-
sonnel to actively participate in this task.
(4) Complete the organization of the people's intelligence nets, especially
within the PSDF.
(5) Establish control dossiers and monitoring procedures to follow Hoi
Chanhs and ex-convicts who were confined for offenses against
national security.
(6) Continue the detachment of special Police Interrogators to the Province
Chieu Hoi Center for interviewing Hoi Chanh and detecting false rallying.
Effect liaison with the Province Chief to obtain assistance in personnel
and facilities for the ID Card program so that this program can be
100% completed prior to June 1971. Suggest the use of sanctions against
the people between 15 years of age and older who have not yet been issued
a laminated ID Card in the areas for which the ID Card program
has been completed. Make public announcements of completed ID cards
so that the concerned people can receive their new ID cards.
I-C-8
AGO IE TI f [4/04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 290 li:DElN1 1720R001100010001-4
(8) Conduct round the clock mobile patrols in areas of responsibility for
timely intervention in any crime committed and highlight that the pre-
sence of policemen is everywhere.
(9) Regularly open traffic campaigns and campaigns to eliminate social
vices in order to improve the use of the public roads and to create
stability among people.
(11) Replace RF/PF in the protection of security for the people in completely
pacified areas in coordination with PSDF so that RF/PF units can con-
duct operations outside these areas.
(12) Coordinate with and guide the PSDF in conducting patrols, protecting
security for administrative agencies, communications works, and in
supporting police-operations.
(13) Estimate the supplementary training requirements for district police
services and Chiefs of offices and sections. Adhere to the policy of
sending personnel for training to the National Police Directorate and
the Training Center of National Police General Directorate.
(14) Establish liaison with the Province Headquarters to send Chiefs of
village sub-stations to the Province In-Service Training Center for
training along with Village and Hamlet officials.
(15) Conduct regular inspection tours of district services and village sub-
stations and assist and guide them in their respective operations.
(1) Supervise and guide village National Police sub-stations to complete
village population control and classification.
(2) Complete the establishment of control dossiers and monitoring proce-
dures to follow Hoi Chanh and ex-convicts who were confined for
offenses against national security.
(3) Neutralize the maximum number of VCI in the District, with the support
of RF, PF, and PSDF.
(4) Complete the organization of the people's intelligence nets especially
within the PSDF.
(5) Coordinate with, and guide, the PSDF in patrols and provision of security
for public utilities and Village/Hamlet Administrative Officials.
(6) Actively coordinate and support friendly agencies in the People's Infor-
mation Program and elections.
Approved For Release CONFIDE TIAL01720R001100010001-4
 ApproCDfNffAt01 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
Contact the District Chief requesting support of the ID card program
at the district. Make public notice of completed ID cards so that the
concerned people can receive their new ID cards.
Conduct regular inspection tours of subordinate sub-stations at least
once a month for the purpose of guiding and assisting them in the en-
forcement of law, maintenance of security and order, organization of
people's intelligence nets and in neutralization of village VCI.
Establish village VC infrastructure dossier and neutralize the maximum
number of these elements with the support of RF, PF, and PSDF.
(3) Coordinate with PSDF, RD Cadre, and STRD Cadre in carrying out
the tasks of completing a family census and the ID card program in
the village.
(4) Coordinate with, and guide PSDF in conducting patrols, laying ambushes,
and protecting security for village installations and Villages and Hamlet
officials.
(5) Organize People's Intelligence nets in the village with Hamlet Chiefs,
family inter-group leaders, and PSDF members.
(6) Explain regulations to villagers before the law is enforced and applied
to them.
a. Closely coordinate with ARVN, Regional Force, Popular Force units for
overall defense as well as for exchange of intelligence information, neutra-
lization of VCI, control of movement, and checking enemy penetrations into
the secure areas.
b. Coordinate with Administrative Agencies, RD Cadre Groups, and STRDC
Groups in the performance of population control and classification. Pay
attention to preparing the voting list and slate in order to make timely detec-
tions of Communist elements who are trying to penetrate into our Admini-
strative and elected systems.
c. Cooperate closely with Chieu Hoi elements for the use of Hoi Chanhs in
neutralizing VCI. Discreetly control and monitor returning Hoi Chanh, and
help the Chieu Hoi elements discover false Hoi Chanhs.
Expedite the issuance of ID cards to Hoi Chanhs in order to facilitate the
control of returning Hoi Chanhs.
d. Coordinate closely with Economic agencies in exerting a tight: control over
national resources, thus preventing them from falling into the communists'
hands. Abolish unnecessary check points to facilitate the transportation of
Approiff FI ATI/H01 : CIA-RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20C f HPEN1TIAL7201001 100010001-4
e. Coordinate closely with Information agencies in launching campaigns to en-
force traffic regulations and eliminate social vices. Publicize the Phung
Hoang and ID card programs, the advantages of the People's intelligence
net and information on laws and regulations.
f. Work shoulder to shoulder with PSDF to guide this force in the protection
and control of security in densely-populated areas of Government buildings,
and in support of NP operations such as the ID card program, the neutra-
lization of the VCI and the organization of people's intelligence nets.
a. Planning. The detailed Community-Defense and Local Development Plan
of NP Directorates and Services must be forwarded to GDNP no later than
15 January 1971 for review.
b. Reports: Beginning 1 March 1971, the NP Provincial Services and Director-
ates must send their monthly reports to GDNP so that the latter can follow
up all activities and solve difficulties encountered during the implementation
of the 1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan.
1. Recruit 30, 000 additional personnel to bring total NP personnel strength in
1971 to 122, 000. Those newly-recruited personnel must have a high dedication
to service and be carefully trained in techniques. Recruitment priority will go
to local inhabitants, including the Ethnic minorities, who after training will
return to their native places for assignment. Two thirds of the total Village
NP Sub-station personnel must be recruited in the local village and hamlets
and recommended by the Village Councils or Village Administrative Committees.
2. Strengthen the organization and personnel of 2, 051 existing Village NP Sub-stations.
At the same time additional Village NP Sub-stations will be set up within 45 days
in Villages which have held elections.
3. In comparison with 1970, terrorism and sabotage incidents are to be reduced by
50% in areas undergoing pacification and by 75% in secure areas.
4. Complete the issuance of 3, 175, 489 ID cards to citizens aged 15 and older.
Priority to MR 4.
Approved For Release 2000*f IEN A720R001100010001-4
 Approved FC"TIoliA jIARDP80R01 720R001 100010001-4
Region
Authorized
Strength
Strength
Added
NP Directorate MR I
16, 075
12,
554
3, 521
NP Directorate MR 2
2 0, 894
13,
121
7, 773
NP Directorate MR 3
19, 872
13,
655
6,417
NP Directorate MR 4
32,340
18,
938
13, 402
Prefecture
18, 131
16,
136
2, 000
DGNP and training
14,683
centers
(1) In the supplemen-
tary phase, it is ex-
pected to recruit 4, 075
members. So, in this
plan it is planned to re-
cruit an additional
30, 000 members to raise
the strength of the en-
tire National Police to
120, 000 members.
Total
Village Police sub-
Village Police sub-
Villages
stations already
stations to be established
established which
_are to be imRroved
NP Directorate MR 1
461
NP Directorate MR 2
568
NP Directorate MR 3
385
NP Directorate MR 4
737
Total:
Unit Monthly Goal
Prefecture
MR, 1
MR 2
53
Approved OONfIDEN'TIA [cIARDP8oRo1 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200tjj HlD!NTF UOR001100010001-4
ID Cards to be Issued
Population to be
Issued ID Cards
ID Cards Issued by
the End of the 1970
Supplemental Phase
under 1971 Community
Defense and Local
Development Plan
NP Directorate, MR 1
1, 942,
916
1,
071,617
870,299
NP Directorate, MR 2
1, 959,
514
1,
390,433
569, 081
NP Directorate, MR 3
2, 111,
980
1,
931,676
180, 244
NP Directorate, MR 4
3, 913,
520
2,
671, 091
1,242,429
Capital NP
Directorate
1,433,
185
1,
120, 749,
312,436
Grand Total
11, 360,
055
8,185,566
Approved For Release 2041 NF1 ifflAt72OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200
I FIDf:NYtAt20R001 100010001-4
Appendix D Protection of the People Against Terrorism
A. In 1971, first priority is given to the "Phung Hoang Plan" which is designed to coordi-
nate, guide, and a`upervise all efforts of military and civilian intelligence and opera-
tional agencies in the neutralization of the Viet Cong Infrastructure (VCI).
B. The Phung Hoang Plan is long-range and continuous. It is designed to operate not only
in wartime but will continue to be operational when peace or ceasefire is attained, be-
cause the VCI cadre will still conceal themselves among the people to carry on sabo-
tage, insurrection, and harassment of innocent people.
C. The principal operational agency of the Phung Hoang Plan is the National Police. All
military forces and other member agencies are responsible for providing support to
the National Police to fulfill their mission. Close collective coordination of activities
by all agencies concerned will permit an early restoration of peace with freedom and
independence.
A. In 1971, the districts and villages will remain the basic echelon responsible for dealing
directly with all activities of the VCI.
B. Priority targets will be key VCI elements, especially finance/ economy, sapper, com-
mo/ liaison, troop proselyting cadre, and the subordinate echelons of the Communist
Provisional Government.
C. Publicize the personal data and pictures of confirmed VCI who hold key positions in
local VCI organizations.
D. The local Phung Hoang centers will take an aggressive part in simultaneous, area wide
operations by making blacklists available to operational units in order to screen the
people and identify the VCI.
1. Improvement of Dossiers. All Phung Hoang committees will put emphasis on the
preparation and maintenance of accurate political order of battle pertaining to
local VCI organizations; improve the system of dossiers; and develop effective
people's intelligence organizations in order to discover VCI organizations and in-
dividuals and neutralize them.
2. Community. All member agencies must adhere strictly to the spirit of inter-
agency cooperation and the close coordination of forces in the collection of intelli-
gence information on the VCI.
Approved For Release 200CBN FID-[INT4A{20R001 10 0010001-4
 ApproON[ RA 01 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
Full advantage must be taken of all available forces and assets such as SP, PFF,
GZ G3, MSS, RD Cadre, STRD Cadre, Chieu Hoi, APT's, VIS, PSYOP, Civic
Action, PSDF, and RF/PF for collecting information, conducting operations a-
gainst the VCI, and publicizing the Phung Hoang Program.
3. Developing and strengthening the Phung Hoang Committee Organization at Village,
Ward and Quarter Levels. In 1971, we must complete the establishment of Village
Phung Hoang Committees; already existing village. Phung Hoang Committees should
be strengthened by improving their operational techniques. This will aid in identi-
fying and attacking VCI organizations and individuals in their operational areas and
in keeping track of those families who have members among the VC. Dossiers on
former VC offenders and returnees will be updated and monitored. The Prefec-
ture, provinces, and cities must expedite establishment and/or improvement of
the organization of ward and quarter Phung Hoang Committees. These organiza-
tions must keep abreast of all activity in the districts to ensure security for the
people and fight VC terrorists.
4. Publicity of the Phung Hoang Plan. More aggressive activities are necessary to
publicize the Phung Hoang Plan. This is necessary to make the people understand
the purpose of Phung Hoang and the advantages to be derived from it for themsel-
ves and their families, to induce them to support the government in the neutrali-
zation of VCI. Public information facilities, including radio and television, should
be utilized to the maximum extent possible to publicize the personal data, includ-
ing pictures of important VCI cadre and their status of neutralization. Posters,
leaflets, cartoon booklets, etc. , which show the purpose and advantages of the
Phung Hoang Program in protecting the people against terrorism, must continue
to be distributed to the villages and hamlets. In addition, and in order to expedite
this task, photographs and biographic data of wanted VCI cadre should be widely
published in daily newspapers and other media if possible, with the support of the
Ministry of-Information and the General Political Warfare Department.
Training. In 1971, the Military Regions will continue to conduct Phung Hoang train-
ing at the MR Training Centers of the Training Divisions of the National Police
Regional Directorate. To ensure uniform instruction, a National Phung Hoang
Training Center will be established to conduct refresher courses for Phung Hoang
officials throughout the country from district level upward.
6. Equity and Law. In order to gain the confidence of the people and their support
for the Government's program to neutalize the VCI, all personnel working with
Phung Hoang must closely adhere to the policy of treating the population and the
V&;6 detainees with a sense of high respect for the law and not abuse their autho-
rity in t eir performance of duty. Consequently, Phung Hoang committees of all
echelo fs must concentrate on the following points in 1971:
a. Cooperation and coordination with village, hamlet, ward, and quarter officials
when performing missions in their areas, to include notification of these offi-
cials regarding the disposition of any people arrested.
b. Screening should be performed quickly, humanely, and fairly with emphasis
on immediate release of innocent people without causing them undue trouble
and annoyance.
c. Perfection of target dossiers. Arrests are to be made only when sufficient
evidence and accurate information is available.
ApprovcNNIRT4A1 : CIA-RDP80R0l 720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2C I D E NT *L1720R001100010001-4
d. Province and City Security Committees must meet at least once a week (or
more often depending on requirements) to consider detainee cases and sen-
tence the VCI as appropriate.
e. Notification of detainee disposition must be made to the appropriate govern-
ment echelons and agencies to ensure effective monitoring.
7. Measures Regarding VCI Cadre Arrested. The time limit prescribed by the Cen-
tral Phung Hoang Committee for interrogation and investigation of detainees must
be adhered to.
MOI Circulars #757-BNV/CT/A-13/M dated 21 Mar 69 and #2212-BNV/CT/A-13/
M dated 20 Aug 69 must be strictly followed for proper classification of VCI and
recommended An-Tri sentences.
All A and B category VCI who have been sentenced should be transferred from the
Provincial Rehabilitation Center to Con-Son, Tan-Hiep, or Thu-Duc National
Rehabilitation Centers without waiting for the approval of the Ministry of Interior.
1. Central Phung Hoang Committee. Encourages, supervises, and guides the activi-
ties of all Phung Hoang Committees in the implementation of the Plan.
Monitors all changes in the overall VCI situation and initiates short-term cam-
paigns or other appropriate reaction measures for local Phung Hoang committees.
Cooperates closely with member agencies to prepare appropriate programs of
action, emphasizing the exchange of information and the publicity of the Phung
Hoang program.
2. Military Region Commanders and Military Region Phung Hoang Committees.
Determine the VCI neutralization quota of each province and city, based on the
local situation, capabilities, past achievements, and the number of identified VCI.
Supervise and instruct all chiefs of member agencies and commanders of military
and paramilitary units to coordinate their activities and support Phung Hoang
within their areas of responsibilities, particularly in the collection and exchange
of intelligence.
Constantly inspect, oversee, and guide the implementation of Phung Hoang-by
provinces and districts. Instruct province and district chiefs to work actively fob
Phung Hoang and ensure that province chiefs convene the Province Security Com-
mittee once a week.
Instruct military units to coordinate activities with local Phung Hoang Committees.
Arrest and detention of civilians suspected of working for the communists must be
reported to the local prosecutor.
Establish a VCI order of battle book of VCI in the military region and provide a
copy to the Central Phung Hoang Committee.
Publicize personal data and pictures of confirmed VCI occupying key positions in
local VCI organizations (Re: Circular No. 35 87 / P. Th. T/BDPT/CT promulgated
Approved For Release 2
HF I DENT1A11720R001100010001-4
 Approvt Iff NTI?L1 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
Province Chiefs and Provincial Phung Hoang Committees. Convene the Province
Security Committee at least once a week, or more often depending on the number
of detainees, in order to process and sentence detainees on a timely basis and eli-
minate the backlog of unsentenced detainees.
Instruct chiefs of Province Phung Hoang member agencies to be more active in the
collection and submission of information concerning VCI and in their support of
Phung Hoang. Agency chiefs will personally attend the weekly Phung Hoang meet-
ings chaired by the Province Chief.
Organize mobile inspection and training teams and send them to districts, villages,
wards, and quarters to provide supervision, training, and guidance on operational
techniques.
Instruct all district chiefs to collect photographs for the maintenance of a VCI or-
der of battle photo book by province, one copy of which will be sent to the Military
Region Phung Hoang Committee.
Emphasize the establishment of VCI dossiers on the standardized forms and sub-
mit reports on time.
Publicize personal data and pictures of confirmed VCI cadre occupying key func-
tions in local VCI organizations (Re: Circular No. 3587/P. Th. T/BDPT/CT pro-
mulgated on 18 Nov 70).
4. District Chiefs and DIOCCs. Consolidate and develop the people's 'intelligence
organization; improve VCI dossiers, card files, charts, and other intelligence
tools in order to develop and maintain an accurate current analysis of the VCI
activity in the district.
Completely neutralize the VCI in the specified number of villages and hamlets
within the district and conduct at least three Phung Hoang operations per week
specifically targeted against selected VCI.
Exploit to the maximum extent the information provided by prisoners, Hoi-Chanhs,
and captured documents. Use this information to update dossiers and/or conduct
rapid response neutralization operations.
Provide support and operational guidance to village Phung Hoang Committees which
have been established and complete the organization of village Phung Hoang Com-
mittees in the remaining villages.
Organize mobile training teams and send them to villages, wards, or quarters to
provide respective officials with guidance on Phung Hoang operations.
Put special emphasis on the publicity of the Phung Hoang program.
Effect proper coordination with all appropriate local agencies or operational units.
Make maximum use of APTs and Chieu Hoi teams to publicize Phung Hoang in
ApprovOe fl fl*Nf4c i : CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
 Approved For Release 20O f Il1EN1I*L720001 100010001-4
villages and hamlets, and to contact the relatives of VCI so that these relatives
will induce the VCI to rally and to participate in Phung Hoang operations to iden-
tify VCI cadre.
Publicize personal data and pictures of confirmed VCI occupying key positions in
local VCI organizations (Re: Circular No. 3587/P. Th. T/BDPT/CT promulgated
on 18 Nov 70).
5. Village Chiefs and Phung Hoang Committees. Actively supervise operations of
Phung Hoang Committees at village level.
Coordinate with all concerned agencies in the village to increase operational effi-
ciency and to collect VCI information.
Establish files classifying the population in villages, particularly the families
having relatives. Keep the files current and include former Communist ddeainees
and ralliers who have returned to their villages and hamlets.
Closely cooperate with forces operating at village level, furnish VCI listings, and
participate in screening suspects in order to identify VCI.
All member agencies must apply the spirit of community cooperation in the neutraliza-
tion of the VCI, organize internal training sessions to make all subordinate cadre fully
knowledgeable of Phung Hoang, and encourage more active participation in the Phung
Hoang Program.
Representatives of member agencies must contact the concerned Phung Hoang Centers
regularly to exchange intelligence information, receive information requirements, and
respond to the requirements expeditiously.
Member agencies should limit to the maximum extent the replacement of Phung Hoang
representatives, except in cases where they are appointed to a higher position. Each
military region, province, and city should carefully study this plan in order to esta-
blish their implementing plan. The member agencies of local Phung Hoang committees
must coordinate closely to suggest ideas for correction of deficiencies encountered in
the past year (1970) in order to strengthen organizational structures and at the same
time to increase operational efficiency.
Fully implement Memo #0770/UBPHTU of 30 Jun 70 aimed at ensuring complete co-
ordination of operations on province/ district boundaries and exchange information, in-
cluding blacklists, among neighboring provinces, and villages.
VCI information must be exploited rapidly to inflict maximum losses on the VCI.
Special attention should ge given to the collection of accurate information in order to
perform the operations with the smallest possible force. 4
The province chiefs should insure that the subordinate district chiefs have adequate
and appropriate reaction forces with which to exploit intelligence information. The
VN Military forces and allied forces operating in local areas should coordnatclos ly
with concerned Phung Hoang Centers and transfer captured VCI to local w4ho safor
exploitation.
Approved For Release 20LRKFIBEILTJAL20RO01 100010001 -4
 Approved For FeON
RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
The unit commanders of member agencies of Phung Hoang Committees should
strongly support close coordination in order to furnish the necessary requirements
and instruction to subordinate echelons to ensure that they increase their activities
in the collecting and furnishing of information concerning the VCI.
The Phung Hoang Centers at military region, capital, province, and ity levels
should submit the following reports accurately and by the suspense date fixed by the
Central Office:
1. Computer report on "VCI neutralization" and the VCI biographic report.
2. Monthly written report.
3. Reporting: The capital, provinces and cities should send the aforesaid reports
by courier to military 'ttcgion by the first of following month at the latest. The
military region should consolidate these reports and ensure that they arrive by
courier at the Central Office no later than the 5th of the following month.
The weekly report will be submitted by telegraph (using communication faci-
lities of National Police).
b. Additionally, after each phase, Phung Hoang Committees of military regions,
provinces, and cities should consolidate the results obtained in that phase
and identify the oustanding individuals and units that should be rewarded.
At the same time, strong and weak points should be pointed out and recom-
mendations made for appropriate measure for improvement. A report on
this will be sent to the Central Office 15 days after the end of each phase.
A. VCI Neutralization
To assure the accomplishment of their assigned goals each MR Phung Hoang Com-
mittee must carefully consider the following factors in prescribing monthly neutrali-
zation goals for provinces and cities of the MR: local VCI situation, capacity and
performance of the subordinate Phung Hoang Committees. The monthly VCI neutrali-
zation goals are prescribed numerically; however, each Phung Hoang Committee must
aim for quality as well as quantity in seeking to attain the goals.
The Phung Hoang Committee at each echelon will maintain an accurate analysis of
their corresponding VCI organization and the key cadre thereof (e. g. , the province
Phung Hoang Committee will be knowledgeable of the VC province level officials,
the district that of the district VCI, and village that of the VC village officials).
Districts must put emphasis on the neutralization of Communist cadre of district
bevel, while the provinces must aim at the VC province party committee, and the
MRs at COSVN and the Communist provisional government.
In 1971 the main objective of the Phung Hoang Plan will continue to be category A
an'dss key Communist cadre.
I-D-6
Approved For GOjIFID[NTIA[RoP8oRo17 20R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20cfNF1fAt720R001100010001-4
Emphasis will be placed on quality rather than quantity in prescribing the goals for
neutralization of the VCI. The monthly neutralization goal for the country is fixed at
1, 200 VCI cadre, allotted as follows:
MR 1 - 300 VCI monthly (150 sentenced).
MR 2 - 200 VCI monthly (100 sentenced).
MR 3 - ` 200 VCI monthly (100 sentenced).
MR 4 - 500 VCI monthly (250 sentenced).
VCI are counted as neutralized when they are (1) killed, (2) rallied, (3) captured and
sentenced for a period of at least one year. Those who are referred to military eoutt's-
for prosecution will be counted as neutralized (sentenced). Of special note luring
1971, 50% of the total neutralization goal must be represented by VCI senten ed.
In addition to the goals previously established for 1970 (841 villages) Phung Hoang
committees at all levels will strive to increase their activities to enable the complete
elimination of VCI from an additional 25% of the remaining villages.
In Phase I, Phung Hoang Committees at all levels will give emphasis to the confirma-
tion of identified VCI suspects. Efforts will be made to collect information
that will confirm at least 30% of the identified VCI suspects estimated to exist at the
start of the plan.
D. Phase I/ 1971 Goals (1 March 1971 - 31 August 1971):
VCI
NEUTRALIZATION
VCI TO BE
CONFIRMED
VILLAGES IN
WHICH VCI ARE TO BE
COMPL. NEUTRALIZED
1, 800
(900 sentenced)
700
70
1, 200
(600 sentenced)
1,
500
70
MR 3
1, 200
(600 sentenced)
MR 4
3, 000
(1, 500 sentenced)
110
F
TOTAL
7, 200
(3, 600 sentenced)
I-D-7
Approved For Release 294191DNTM 11720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200 LALIMD20R001100010001-4
A. In upholding its tradition of Greater National Unity, the government of the Republic
of Vietnam has promulgated the Chieu Hoi program in an attempt to reduce the blood-
shed of the Vietnamese people and to bring a rapid end to the war provoked by
North Vietnamese Communists.
B. As of late October L970, 168, 303 communist cadre and soldiers have rallied to the
just cause of the nation. Twenty eight-thousand ralliers were received in the first
ten months of 1970 alone.
C. Satisfactory achievements of the past are chiefly attributed to the following:
1. Attainment of the objectives of the Pacification and Development Plans.
2. Permanent pressure of the RVNAF and Allied Forces on all battlefields.
3. Effectiveness of propaganda activities in support of the policy of Greater
National Unity and the psychological warfare offensives jointly conducted
by the Ministry of Chieu Hoi and all civilian and military psychological
warfare agencies of the Republic of Vietnam and its allies.
4. Increased participation by the people in Chieu Hoi inducement and rehabilitation
activities.
5. The morale of the enemy cadre and soldiers has been adversely affected by
their serious defeats on all battlefields and their serious problems in strength
replenishment and in the supply of weapons and provisions.
6. All military, civilian, and administrative personnel have actively and correctly
implemented the Chieu Hoi Policy in their inducement, reception, security,
and rehabilitation activities.
D. Considering the growth of our forces and the progressive weakness of the enemy's
force, the Chieu Hoi operation will greatly contribute to the 1971 Community Defense
and Local Development Plan.
A. The purpose of the Chieu Hoi Program is twofold: to decrease our enemy's potential
and to increase ours. This purpose cannot be achieved unless we obtain the direct
participation of the people in the Chieu Hoi Program in addition to the efforts of the
Ministry of Chieu Hoi and its friendly agencies to effectively conduct the inducement,
reception, security, and rehabilitation tasks.
Approved For Release 200UNO L
IFIED2OROOII000I000I-4
 Approved Fog: tA1Z1 E1'-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
B. Therefore, these basic objectives of the Chieu Hoi Program remain valid:
1. Publicize the Chieu Hoi Policy and urge enemy cadre and soldiers to rally.
2. Exploit information on the enemy volunteered by ralliers.
3. Help ralliers to create a new life and to be fully reinstated in the national
community.
4. Motivate and provide opportunity for ralliers to contribute their abilities to the
anti-communist struggle and to nation building.
5. Guarantee ralliers' security.
III. IMPLEMENTATION.
A. Inducement activities.
1. Guidelines.
a. Give wide publicity to the Chieu Hoi Policy.
b. Encourage civilians, servicemen, civil servants, cadre, ralliers, and
especially those families whose members have joined the Communists
to call on the Communist Cadre and soldiers to rally.
~. Improve overt propaganda activities: radio and television broadcasts and
propaganda publications.
1;. Make full use of new ralliers in the appeal to former comrades to rally.
Coordinate Armed Propaganda activities with the District Intelligence
and Operation Coordination Centers in order to proselytize families
whose members are serving as members of the enemy infra-structure.
District Intelligence and Operation Coordination Centers must furnish
Armed Propaganda Teams with the lists of members of the enemy
infra-structure and their families.
Organize Special Armed Propaganda Platoons of ralliers and
employ them in Psychological Warfare and Chieu Hoi operations
against North Vietnamese infiltrators.
d. Organize ralliers' lecturing teams. Hold regular lectures by ralliers on
the true nature of the Communist regime and on the Chieu Hoi Policy
before people's groups, People's Self-Defense Forces training courses,
military units, and communist prisoners. Coordinate ralliers' lectures
with culture drama programs.
C. Support of Chieu Hoi inducement operations in Villages and Hamlets by
PSDF. As a popular organization and a very important manpower resource,
Approved ForIffAI& kSSM 0-RDP80R01720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2001JN0 LA/SSIf ED 208001100010001-4
the People's Self-Defense Forces can persuade the families of Communist
followers in Villages, Hamlets, Wards, and Sub-wards to call on their
misled family members to rally to the national cause.
f. Conduct Chieu Hoi Campaigns. Organize a ceremony for reception of the
200, 000th rallier.
Uphold the personal prestige of high-ranking ralliers and provide them with
assistance to demonstrate the fairness of the Government's policy toward
ralliers.
h. Propagate the Chieu Hoi Policy abroad.
Organize visits to Chieu Hoi institutions for the foreign press corps and
VIPs to permit them to understand our Chieu Hoi Policy and the true
nature of the Communist regime through their contacts with ralliers.
(3) Send ralliers' delegations abroad for publicity of the Chieu Hoi Policy
and the just cause of our nation.
a. Remove the feeling of culpability and suspicion from the mind of ralliers
during their first contact with us.
c. Concentrate on the defense of Chieu Hoi Centers against enemy subversive
plots.
d. Improve political indoctrination in order to inspire ralliers with a nationalist
and non-communist spirit.
e. Pay special attention to the confirmation and classification of ralliers.
f. Improve the exploitation and verification of information on the enemy.
g. Complete the census of and continue to follow the ralliers released to go
home and continually update the record of their status.
2. Planned operations.
a. Give an initial warm welcome to ralliers.
b. Minimize the time for transfer of ralliers from their original receiving points
to Chieu Hoi Centers.
c. Completely repair and furnish 53 Chieu Hoi Centers at Province, City, MR,
and national levels.
I-E-3
Approved For Release 2004JNC:LC'k IEDOR001100010001-4
 Approved VNtASTflt 0CIA-RDP80R0l 720R001100010001-4
d. Strictly abide by the principle of organizing ralliers to be materially self-
sufficient in the Chieu Hoi Centers.
f. Expedite the issuance of laminated identity cards to ralliers who must be
,liven temporary ID cards when leaving Chieu Hoi Centers.
(1) Recruit 85 political instructors as authorized, and train 115 general
instructors selected from among Armed Propaganda Cadre.
(2) Conduct training, in-service training, and refresher training for politi-
cal instructors and general instructors.
(3) Correct and update political indoctrination materials to adapt them to
the political background of each category of ralliers: low, middle and
high ranking.
(4) Conduct political instructions in the field.
(1) In addition to the exploitation of tactical intelligence for military opera-
tions which has been accomplished satisfactorily, special attention
must be paid to the exploitation of intelligence on the enemy infra-
structure.
Train Armed Propaganda Cadre on methods of approaching new ralliers
in order to help interrogators to obtain the maximum amount of infor-
mation on the enemy.
(4) Contact must be maintained on released ralliers by District Intelligence
and Operation Coordination Centers in order to obtain information and
indications from them to be used in neutralizing communist infrastruc-
ture agents.
(5) Enemy Situation reports must be immediately distributed to all intelli-
gence Agencies.
i. Increase effectiveness of the detection of false ralliers; check and update
the record of the status of released ralliers and monitor their political
viewpoints. This is primarily the task and responsibility of special police
personnel working under the Central Committee for Reception of ralliers.
Rehabilitation activities.
1. Guidelines:
a. Create favorable conditions for ralliers so they may be reinstated in the
National Community.
I-E-4
Approved llNCFASS1f1{Dd1 RDP8OROI 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 204NOLAS
IE42OR001100010001-4
b. In order to meet the needs of ralliers, who are peasants for the most part,
vocational training for ralliers will center on agricultural techniques in
addition to handicraft and industrial training. Handicraft and industrial
training is given to ralliers on an optional basis only.
c. Employment of ralliers in government agencies must be based on these two
criteria: possession of qualifications corresponding to the needs of the
civil service;and,a reliable nationalist conviction.
d. Follow closely the status of released ralliers in order to assist them when
necessary.
a. During their stay at the Chieu Hoi Center, ralliers will be trained in farm-
ing and animal husbandry techniques.
c. Recruit ralliers who are North Vietnamese infiltrators in order to activate
special Armed Propaganda units.
e. Recruit as Chieu Hoi Cadre, those ralliers who are over 38 years old and
meet established criteria and standards.
f. Recruit ralliers for Mobile Popular Force units, Regional Force (Political
Warfare Companies), and Regular Force units.
g. Recruit ralliers with appropriate qualifications for National Police and
other government agencies.
h. Employ ralliers in lecture teams to give lectures on the true nature of the
communist regime and to give publicity to the Chieu Hoi Policy.
i. Send Hoi Chanhs abroad to publicize the Chieu Hoi Policy and the just
cause of the nation.
Provide training and in-service training for vocational instructors selected
from ralliers.
k. Establish Employment Committees for ralliers at province, MR, and
central levels.
1. Study and implement cultural and specialized methods for the rehabilitation
of ralliers.
m. Encourage ralliers to participate actively in People's Self-Defense Forces.
n. Check and update the record of the status of ralliers resettled in Hamlets,
wards and sub-wards.
Approved For Release 200119=I1~MEA02OR001100010001-4
 Approved For FUNtLO DP8OR0172OR001100010001-4
It a Sff Iff-Uff
o. Establish a liaison system between the Chieu Hoi Administration and released
ralliers.
A. Province Chieu Hoi Service will use a special reporting system to submit monthly
and weekly reports to the Ministry of Chieu Hoi.
1. Report by special radio message the reception of high ranking ralliers, mass
rallyings, special incidents such as sabotage of Chieu Hoi installations, important
results achieved by Armed Propaganda units, discovery and destruction of weapons
caches or logistical depots due to information provided by ralliers, etc.
2. Report by radio message every Saturday afternoon, the general status of reception
of ralliers to include classification of ralliers.
3. Report monthly, using the report form prescribed by the Ministry of Chieu Hoi,
the general nature of Chieu Hoi operations and achievement in the month.
4. Copies of reports must be forwarded to the prefecture, province, and city pacifi-
cation councils and the offices of MR Chieu Hoi Representatives.
B. In meetings held in the Military Regions, the prefecture, province capitals, or cities
for review of pacification and development plans, officials in charge must fully report
on all operations and achievements of the plan, and compare different phases, as
follows:
- Total of families whose members are communist followers and have been con-
contacted and rallied by Armed Propaganda cadre, People's Self-Defense mem-
bers, and other cadre, and the percentage of successful inducement operations.
- Total of indoctrinated ralliers and total of indoctrination courses.
- Total of ralliers trained in the techniques of agriculture and animal husbandry.
- Total of ralliers receiving vocational training and total vocational training
courses.
A. In 1971, the goal is to bring 25, 000 ralliers to the just national cause. Military
Region's goals are:
MR 1
4, 000
MR Z
2, 000
MR 3
5,000
MR 4
14, 000
Approved For UNCt2ASShFFIEOR0P80101720100110001000 1-4
 Approved For Release 200 NCL$rIfl> OR001100010001-4
B. Give political training to 100% of ralliers received in the year.
C. Issue plastic covered ID cards to 100% of ralliers received in the year.
D. Give vocational training on planting and animal husbandry to 100% of ralliers return-
ing home who request the training.
E. Train 71 vocational lecturers and 115 political instructors recruited from among the
ralliers.
A. To achieve the goals of 1971 and to implement scheduled tasks, requires coordina-
tion between the Chieu Hoi and military/civil agencies of the GVN and allied forces
through the PDCs of all levels.
1. Ministry of Information: Publicize the Chieu Hoi policy and employ the mobile
cadres and village/hamlet Information Chieu Hoi cadre in propaganda efforts
using radio, TV, movies, and printed Chieu Hoi inducement materials.
2. Ministry of Defense/Central PolWar Office: Through the network of psy-war
units, radio, TV, aerial broadcasting, leaflet drops, and outpost broadcasting.
Publicize the Chieu Hoi policy and inducements. Create understanding between
the ARVN servicemen and returnees. Supply printed propaganda materials.
3. Ministry of Rural Development and Ministry of Ethnic Minority Development:
Coordinate the publicity of the Chieu Hoi policy and inducement undertaken by the
Chieu Hoi armed propaganda cadre,, RD cadre, and Ethnic Development cadre.
4. Ministry of Interior /Director General of PSDF: Commit to the PSDF the task of
supporting the Chieu Hoi inducement effort in villages, hamlets, city wards,
especially in establishing contact with the families whose members support with
Communists to induce them to rally.
5. Ministry of Interior /Directorate General National Police/Central Phung Hoang
Committee: In neutralizing VCI, (DIOCC provides information on and names of
VCI cadre and their families to the APT cadre); and in coordinating the inducement
plans to persuade VCI to rally to the government.
C. In receiving returnees and providing security for them, it is necessary to coordinate
with:
1. MOI/DGNP, various local administrative echelons, JGS/J2: This coordination is
needed for completing the processing and to receive and transfer the returnee
promptly to the Chieu Hoi Center, interview and identify him to verify personal
data, and to determine the circumstances of return to the government. Also,
exploit information on the enemy situation, issue L a permanent ID card or at least
a temporary one within two months while at the Chieu Hoi center. Detach police
personnel to Chieu Hoi Centers as specified in the SOP pertaining to the receiving
of ralliers, 222/HT/CH dated 15 November 1968 by the Prime Minister,
Approved For Release 20 V LAS I920R001100010001-4
 Approved VldltaAEftD CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
2. :MOI/DGNP/JGS/J2/MSS, and the Central Intelligence Office: Within the frame-
work of the Central Returnee Receiving Committee to plan and take security
measures for the Chieu Hoi program.
D. In giving political indoctrination to ralliers (documents and instructors), it is
necessary to coordinate with MOI information (provincial VIS) and JGS (S5 of the
Sector).
E. In rehabilitating the returnee, it is necessary to coordinate with:
1. Ministry of Land Reform and Agricultural/Fishery Development: In teaching
cultivation techniques to returnees received at Chieu Hoi Centers throughout the
country.
2. Ministry of Social Welfare: In supplying foodstuffs under the "Food-for-Peace"
Program to returnees living in Chieu Hoi Centers to increase their rations and
to those returnees who have been returned home and are in need of food.
3. Ministry of Labor: In assisting the returnees to look for employment. Assisting
to train 71 vocational instructors who are former ralliers and to vocationally
train new ralliers.
4, Ministries of Education, Public Health, Public Works, National Defense.. . . :
In planning and providing rehabilitation measures for ralliers who are originally
technicians such as; doctors, engineers, professors, etc... trained by the Com-
munist Regime, and former Communist military commanders.
F. In carrying out the overall Chieu Hoi mission (propaganda/motivation, reception,
rehabilitation, survey and updating the status of returnees who have been returned
to their home villages), it is necessary to coordinate with the MOI through the village/
hamlet, phuong/khbm administrative system.
0. In training and giving in-service training to Chieu Hoi cadre, it is necessary to
coordinate with:
1. Ministry of RD in sending 1, 800 APT cadre to the 4-week training course and
300 Chieu Hoi members to the 2-week training course at the NTC in Vung Tau.
2. Ministry of Ethnic Minority Development in sending Montagnard APT cadre to
training courses at the National Training Center, Pleiku.
3. Ministry of Interior in sending local cadre and personnel to basic administrative
training courses organized at the province level.
Approved LJ jaA3Sjf f E1DCIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 10001-4
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : ClOUPASSME-V FMO
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : Cl"OLF AIMIN
 Approved For Release 20INCLAM120R001100010001-4
ANNEX II: LOCAL SELF- GOVFRNMWNT
Appendix A: People's Administration
I. GENERAL:
In 1970 we have made considerable progress in the establishment of a sound basis for
regional administration with decentralization of powers to local authorities in order to
progress towards objectives of self-government, self-sufficiency and self-development.
From province down to village the administrative system has undergone a sweeping reform.
in order to improve its efficiency to the maximum. The democratization of local govern-
ments has been accelerated. The terms of city and province councils have been renewed
by elections for the second time, elections characterized by the participation of local
notables and personalities in a spirited contest and the exercise of voter prudence in the
selection of their representatives.
More than 95% of villages and hamlets have been provided with elective governments work-
ing on the spot. Ninety-five percent of the posts of village and hamlet officials have been
filled. More remarkable is the fact that the satisfactory progress of pacification has per-
mitted a number of provinces to extend their control over and establish governments in
some new villages and hamlets not anticipated by the" 1970 Pacification and Development
Plan.
While exploiting the good results achieved in 1970, we will work harder in 1971 to develop
efficient and better administration, with unity of command, maximum efficiency in all
fields, and harmony between all activities of the people and the government in order to
advance rapidly toward self-development and self-sufficiency.
In order to achieve the 1971 national objectives we will concentrate all our efforts on the
development of a local administrative machinery capable of self-government in all fields:
efficient administration, developed economy and financial self-sufficiency. All officials
and cadre will be thoroughly trained in administrative techniques, thoroughly familiarized
with national policies and theme s, and inspired with a high spirit of service.
A. Completion of the organization:
1. Complete elections in 100% of the villages and hamlets.
2. Assign all officials required for village and hamlet agencies.
3. Disseminate, explain and properly use the Village Management Book.
4. Form mobile teams headed by district and province chiefs to operate in
villages and hamlets.
II-A- 1
Approved For Release 204HC1LASI20R001100010001-4
 Approved For
tt2Ac TFIERDI8OROI72OROOI 100010001-4
IN J91
6. Provide financial means to give substantial and constant support in order to ex-
pedite all projects, even if the budgets of agencies involved are not yet approved.
Minimize pre-audit and rely on post-audit procedure.
I. All newly elected and appointed officials will participate in a basic training pro-
gram.
2. Officials trained in Vung Tau will be given additional in-service training on ad-
ministrative techniques in the provinces.
3. All province and district authorities must be trained. Their training program
will center on the contents of government programs and their management.
4. Province and district chiefs must pay periodic visits to all villages and hamlets
for the purpose of inspection, assistance and training of their subordinate
officials.
5. Hold open, periodic meetings with the participation of local inhabitants to give
them an opportunity to take part in the management of their villages and hamlets.
Increase the local use of taxes collected by the villages and improve tax collec-
tion procedures so that revenues will meet the needs and aspirations of villagers
in the years to come.
2. Take effective measures to improve local revenue. In 1971, 200 villages will
become entirely self-supporting, 300 villages, 501/o self-supporting, and 500
villages, 25% self-supporting.
All programs, projects, and budgets must be given wide publicity among the popula-
tion.
III. EXECUTION.
A. Tasking.
Local governments will carry out the following operations:
1. Hamlet and village elections.
New elections. After completion of the 1970 Pacification and Development
Plan, an estimated 31 villages and 328 hamlets will still not have elected
governments because they do not yet meet all the required conditions of
population and other prerequisites for self-government.
In 1971 these villages and hamlets will be pacified and consolidated in order
to meet all the conditions required for the organization of elections,
Approved For F
L0
StFIEDD80R01720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20 CLASNE ft20R001100010001-4
In addition, the number of villages and hamlets holding new elections could
increase if the survey of newly established villages and hamlets planned in
early 1971 shows an increase in the total of surveyed villages and hamlets
in this country.
b. Supplementary elections: All provinces must be ready to hold supplementary
elections for village councils and hamlet chiefs whenever a vacancy occurs
in accordance with the regulations in force. (Articles 8 and 38, Decree
198-SL/DVHC, 24 December 1966. )
c. Elections for the second term of office: The 3-year term of office for
Village Councilmen and Hamlet Chiefs elected in 1968 will expire in 1971.
The election for the second term of office of these positions will be held
within a period from two weeks to two months prior to the expiration of the
current term of office.
All Village Administrative Committees and Hamlet Management Boards must be
fully staffed by properly using available manpower resources in order to stop
the appointment of members of the Popular Forces as village and hamlet officials
(except for the positions of military commissioner and military assistant) as well
as the appointment of RD Cadre as village and hamlet officials. Screen the
ranks of local cadre to eliminate undesirable elements, fence-sitters, and es-
pecially elements sympathetic to the communists.
In sparsely populated villages, Village Administrative Committees do not neces-
sarily require a different indivi4ual for each position. Instead one man may
concurrently hold several different positions depending on the demands of the job.
A Village Administrative Committee will be regarded as fully staffed only if
somebody is assigned responsibility for each position.
The Village Management Book must be fully understood and properly used by all
Village Council Chairmen, Village Chiefs, and other related officials. Province
authorities must constantly monitor the proper use of this book. Moreover, this
book must be widely available so that anyone who is concerned about the village's
management may examine its contents.
In order to supervise, assist, and guide villages and hamlets in implementing
their plans, especially to monitor the implementation of development projects,
mobile teams must be established in the Province with the Province Chief,
Deputy Province Chief or Chief of PPDC/CC as the leader of the team. These
will be composed of a number of technical service chiefs. Each mobile team will.
operate at village/hamlet at least once a week. At village/hamlet the team lead-
er will coordinate the activities of team members who, each in his sphere of
responsibility, will contact the village/hamlet officials concerned to review their
works in order to:
Approved For Release 200C LASSIF1E020R001 100010001-4
 Approved UNt Of [D CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
- Record (to report to higher echelon) or resolve problems in place if possible;
- Supervise and expedite completion of projects which are behind schedule;
- Plan priority activities to be conducted in the forth coming days;
- Consolidate deficiencies and determine if additional training is necessary.
- Send a mobile instructors' team to the village/hamlet to give supplementary
training to the concerned officials.
5. In order to simplify procedures and reduce paperwork the Prefecture, Provinces
and Cities will make a study,of presently used local administrative procedures
and record all deficiencies and out-of-date procedures which are riot appropriate
to the present situation and slow up the administrative mechanism and otherwise
prevent effective and rapid service to the people. Recommendations are to be made
for improving and simplifying procedures in order to effectively serve the people.
Improvement of the tax system must be accelerated in order to increase the reve-
nues available for local budgets, and also to improve the collection of taxes in order
to provide financial means for development programs.
In 1971 efforts must be made to achieve the following:
200 villages to be completely self-sufficient
300 villages to be 50% self-sufficient
500 villages to be Z5% self-sufficient
Until the budget of the new fiscal year is approved, all agencies must receive an
initial allocation of sufficient funds in order to continue work without losing momen-
turn. Pre-audits will be minimized and maximum reliance placed on post-audits.
All programs, projects and budgets of the government must be made public know-
Ledge. This publicity will help the people to thoroughly understand their rights
and responsibilities and prevent cases of malfeasance and injustice.
Use must be made of posters and information bulletins or displays of pictures and
documents relating to the programs, projects and budgets at public buildings and
con-irr unity centers.
8. Training.
a. Training at the Vung Tau National Training Center:
(1) Nine training courses will be organized at NTC, Vung Tau for the
following:
ApprovecuN CIAS D CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
 Approved For Release 2004/I f C[IA"Ift R001100010001-4
- All commissioners for taxation and commissioners for Economy and
Finance.
- All chairman of Village (;ounciLs, Village Chiefs, Deputy Village Chiefs
in charge of administration, Deputy Village Chiefs in charge of security,
and Hamlet Chiefs in the following cases:
- Have been elected or appointed at newly-established villages and
hamlets.
- Have been newly elected or newly appointed for replacement of
officials whose term of office will expire in 1971.
Schedule for organization of training courses is fixed as follows:
Course
Opening Day
Closing Day
1/71
1 March 1971
29 March 1971
2/71
5 April 1971
3 May 1971
3/71
10 May 1971
7 June 1971
4/71
14 June 1971
12 July 1971
5/71
19 July 1971
16 August 1971
6/71
23 August 1971
20 September 1971
7/71
27 September 1971
25 October 1971
8/71
1 November 1971
29 November 1971
9/71
6 December 1971
3 January 1972
About 500 students will attend each course.
The training program will emphasize taxation, budgets and people's
information, so that students can have sufficient capability to play a
leadership role in their home areas in order to progress to self-govern-
ment in 1971 and the following years.
(2) Five training courses will be organized at NTC, Vung Tau for all Village
Commissioners for Social Welfare and Culture on the following schedule:
Course
Opening Day
Closing Day
1/71
1 March 71
15 March 71
2/71
22 March 71
5 April 71
3/71
12 April 71
26 April 71
II-A-5
Approved For Release 2004/UNCUMBR001100010001-4
 ApprIN Ct *811 FcI!/DII01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
4/71 3 May 71
5/71 24 May 71
About 420 students will attend each course.
In addition to the technical subjects relating to the duties of these Com-
missioners, the training program will reserve a number of hours for
presentation of people's information subjects.
(3) Nine training courses will be organized at NTC, Vung Tau for Deputy
Hamlet Chiefs for Security in order to provide them with enough
capability to accelerate local self-defense.
Schedule for organization of these courses is similar to the schedule for
organization of nine training courses mentioned in Item (L) above.
With the purpose of obtaining better results in the training of officials of
Montagnard villages and hamlets (except for Nung and Cham villages and
hamlets), the following Montagnard officials will receive training at the
National Training Center, Pleiku: Chairmen of Village Councils, Village
Chiefs, Deputy Village Chiefs for Administration, Deputy Village Chiefs for
Security, Commissioners for Taxation, Commissioners for Economy and
Finance, Commissioners for Social Welfare and Culture, Hamlet Chiefs,
and Deputy Hamlet Chiefs for Security.
Montagna.rd officials who have been trained at the NTC, Vung Tau will also
be sent to the National Training Center, Pleiku for attending refresher
courses. Training priority will be reserved to Village Chiefs, Commissioners
for Taxation, Commissioners for Economy and Finance, and Hamlet Chiefs.
Training subjects for the village and hamlet Montagnard officials at the
National Training Center, Pleiku will be similar to training subjects provided
village and hamlet Vietnamese officials at NTC, Vung Tau but Montagnard
dialects will be used in teaching at the National Training Center,, Pleiku.
Training in Provinces.
(1) Training Courses.
(a) Provinces will be charged with the training of village and hamlet
officials who are not sent for training at the NTC, Vung Tau. These
officials are:
Military Commissioners
Commissioners for Agriculture and Land Reform
Commissioners for Civil Records
ApprcJNrCjFAIS 34-1 f IE001 : CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
 Approved For Release 200VNCLAAS I D20R001100010001-4
Village Chief Clerks
Village Clerks
Village Service Members
Deputy Hamlet Chiefs for Administration
Hamlet Military Assistants
Village and Hamlet Information Cadre
(b) In-province training subjects will go deep into technical fields to
include finance, taxation, security, civil records, information,
agriculture, land reform, etc. , so that officials of each element
can. thoroughly understand their duties. Additional hours will be
specially reserved for subjects relating to taxation and people's
information. For new officials, the provinces must make arrange-
ments for them to attend a basic course, that is, a course on General
Administration, immediately after they have been elected or appointed,
in order to help them to gain a general concept on the duties they must
execute.
The duration of each course is as follows:
Training course on General Administration: from 7 to 10 days.
Training course on technical matters: from 4 to 6 days.
Seminar session: not exceeding 5 days.
For the seminar to achieve satisfactory results, the province should
organize in such a way that:
- General subject training classes have no more than 60 students;
- Technical training classes have no more than 30 students;
- The number of participants in the village council members'
seminars may vary according to training requirements.
(c) In addition, the provinces will organize supplementary courses for
village and hamlet officials already trained at NTC, Vung Tau. The
training of these officials will be carried out in the same way as men-
tioned above. The duration of the supplementary training courses is
similar to the training period for technical training courses.
As scheduled, the total training courses and seminar sessions to be
locally organized in 1971 will be about 500 courses with about 50, 000
students. It is important that the in-province training schedule for
village and hamlet officials be closely matched with the require-
ments and capabilities of the province in order to prevent too large a
disparity between the number of courses planned and the number of
courses actually organized.
Approved For Release 200#K1(ASSIFIEO2OROOII000I000I-4
 AV FArfI /04/01 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
Except for cases of absolute necessity, each training course or sem-
inar session planned for a specific period must be conducted within
this period so that training of local cadre and officials is regular
and continuous.
(a) In 1971, based on its area and population, each province will organize
an additional Instructor Team whose strength varies from 8 to 12 mem-
bers. This Instructor Team will be called "The Province Instructor
Team" and placed under the disposition of the Province Administrative
Headquarters (Training and In-Service Training Center). Each In-
structor Team consists of the following:
One Team Leader
One Assistant Team Leader
One Program Cadre
One Organization Cadre
One Training Aids Cadre concurrently in charge of training
documents.
A Study Cell including three cadre for the smallest team and
seven cadre for the largest team.
(b) In general, the Province Instructor Team is responsible for assisting
the Province In-Service Training Manager to organize the training
and retraining of cadre of all branches in the Province, especially
local officials.
Thus, with the purpose of obtaining maximum results in the training
of cadre, in addition to local training and in-service training, the
provinces must use these Instructor Teams in training in the villages
and hamlets in order to give additional on-the-spot explanation to the
local village officials so that they can gain a clearer idea of the lessons
they may not have thoroughly understood during previous courses con-
ducted in the province. In this case provinces must strictly carry out
the following points:
1.. Divide the detached instructors team into 2 or 3 small teams
which can be sent to the villages to give additional training
in place.
2. Supply transportation means so that they may visit many villages
on each tour.
To attain maximum results from the mobile instructor team's the
team leader should coordinate with his team members prior to
going to a village to work. The team must:
AUNCjF I f D4104/01 : CIA-RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20oU#CL ff l20R001100010001-4
village /hamlet officials, through inspection reports and previous
deficiency lists prepared by mobile inspection teams after their
inspection tours in the area;
- Include in the additional training program the appropriate sub-
jects to meet the training requirements determined from study.
- In supplementary training classes, the lecture portion will be
reduced to the minimum while more time will be given to practical
work. The instructors must guide the trainees until the latter can
practice what they have been taught.
(c) In addition the province and district chiefs must periodically visit
village /hamlet to determine if village /hamlet officials are practicing
what they have been taught at the training centers. If deficiencies are
found, guidance and additional training will be given them.
(d) Village and hamlets will periodically organize public meetings with
participation of the people, so they may contribute to the management
of village /hamlet.
9. The central government will provide guidance and support for local planning and
project implementation.
(t) Form at the Ministry level a committee to study local recommendations
pertaining to the simplification of administrative procedures; prepare
a draft and submit to higher authorities for promulgation the documents
necessary for the improvement of procedures.
(2) Form a section of experts experienced in local administration to study
training requirements and compile and update training documents for
issue to Province training and in-service Training Centers.
(3) Form a section to monitor, supervise, and control the establishment of
a taxation registry and the collection of local taxes.
b. The Ministry of Rural Development:
(1) The Ministry of Rural Development will detach to Province Training and
in-service Training Centers the number of RD Cadre necessary for the
formation of the Provincial Training Team. These Cadre will receive
careful and preliminary training from the National Training Center, Vung
Tau to enable them to start working immediately after they have rejoined
their posts in the provinces.
(2) The National Training Center, Vung Tau will organize and schedule the
training courses referred to in paragraph 8a above.
II-A-9
Approved For Release 200UKL[
o20R001100010001-4
r_Lr
 Approved For IU SI 1 ORDP80R01720R001100010001-4
(3) The Ministry of Rural Development will provide air transportation
for trainees from provinces to the National Training Center, Vung Tau
and return them to provinces whose road travel is inconvenient.
The National Training Center, Pleiku,will study and compile training docu-
ments for Montagnard Village and Hamlet officials, set up training schedules,
and organize training courses for these officials as referred to in paragraph
8c above.
1. The Ministry of Interior will coordinate with the Ministry of Rural Development
in the management of training courses held at the National Training Center,
Vung Tau.
2. The Ministry of Interior will coordinate with the Ministry for Development of
Ethnic Minorities to set up the training schedule and conduct training courses
at the National Training Center, Pleiku,for Montagnard Village and Hamlet
officials.
3. The Ministry of Interior will coordinate with the Ministry of Finance and the
Directorate General for Budget and Foreign Aid to study the modernization of
the local taxation system.
4. The Ministry of Finance will coordinate with the Directorate General for Budget
and Foreign Aid to study promulgating new expenditure procedures in accordance
with the concept of simplification of those procedures by placing reliance on post-
audit rather than pre-audit.
The 1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan (People's Administa-
Lion Program) will be established in the Prefecture, Provinces and Cities, based
on Forms II/A, II/A1, II/A2, II/A3, II/A4, II/A5, II/A6, II/A7 and attached
he re to.
The Prefecture and Autonomous Cities need not concern themselves with the sec-
tions concerning Village and Hamlet elections and Village and Hamlet budget suf-
ficiency.
Beginning March 1971, the province will use Report Forms BCII/A1, BCII/A2,
BCII/A3, BCH/A4, BCII/A5, BCII/A6, BCII/A7 and BCII/A8 to report results
of work accomplished during the month.
Approved For R tOkS F DP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
 Approved For Release 2 A'yI I720R001100010001-4
L. New elections. All villages and hamlets which have no elected governments must
complete elections within the first six months of the year. (An accurate number
is not available because the results of the census made at the end of December
1970 are not known as yet. )
2. Supplementary Elections. Supplementary elections will be organized within three
months beginning the date the vacancy exists.
Approved For Release 201JNCAIS-&IIF[[fl720R001100010001-4
 Approved For FIJNCUSS f FItDRDP80ROl720R001100010001-4
Number of Villages
Number of Hamlets
Province or MR
whose Councils must be
whose Chiefs must be
Remarks
re-elected during 1971
re-elected during 1971
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
MR 1
43
365
MR 2
07
101
MR 3
03
045
MR 4
01
052
Grand Total
_
54
563
MR 1
Quang Nam
01
013
Quang Ngai
00
000
Quang Tin
01
005
Quang Tri
41
347
Thua Thien
00
000
Total:
_
43
365
PAR 2
Binh Dinh
00
031
Binh Thuan
02
002
Darlac
00
000
Khanh Hoa
00
000
Kontum
00
000
Lam Dong
00
000
Ninh Thuan
00
028
Phu Bon
03
012
Phu Yen
01
028
Ple iku
01
000
Quang Duc
00
000
Tuyen Duc
00
000
Total:
07
101
MR 3
Bien Hoa
00
000
Binh Duong
03
009
Binh Long
00
002
Binh Tuy
00
003
Gia Dinh
00
013
Hau Nghia
00
013
Long An
00
000
Long Khanh
00
005
Phuoc Long
00
000
Phwx Tuy
00
000
Tay Ninh
00
000
Total:
03
045
Approved For Flu NG ASSIF1EDRDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/tNCtASS1 f $ R001100010001-4
MR 4
An Giang
00
004
An Xuyen
00
000
Ba Xuyen
00
000
Bac Lieu
00
014
Chau Doc
00
002
Chuong Thien
00
009
Dinh Tuong
00
000
Go Cong
00
000
Kien Giang
00
006
Kien _Hoa
00
000
Kien Phong
01
006
Kien Tuong
00
000
Phong Dinh
00
002
Sa Dec
00
000
Vinh Binh
00
009
Vinh Long
00
000
Total:
71
052
The number of Villages which must attain budget sufficiency is as follows:
No. of Villages which must attain
Order
Province
budget self-sufficiency
Total
100%
50%
25%
MR 1
1
Quang Nam
4
4
14
22
2
Quang Ngai
1
4
33
38
3
Quang Tin
1
2
19
22
4
Quang Tri
1
2
28
31
5
Thua Thien
1
3
35
39
Total:
8
15
129
152
MR 2
6
Binh Dinh
3
4
47
54
7
Binh Thuan
2
4
17
23
8
Darlac
2
3
0
5
9
Khanh Hoa
3
4
18
25
10
Lam Dong
1
3
2
6
11
Ninh Thuan
2
3
10
15
12
Phu Bon
1
1
0
2
13
Phu Yen
2
4
13
19
14
Pleiku
1
2
6
9
15
Kontum
1
2
0
3
16
Quang Duc
0
1
2
3
17
Tuyen Duc
1
4
0
5
Total:
19
35
115
169
Approved For Release 2004/0ur"HI IE001100010001-4
 Approved For tJNCL2*SStF I EDRD80R01 720R001 100010001-4
No. of Villages which must attain
Order
Province
budget self- sufficienc
Total
100%
50%
25%
MR 3
18
Bien Hoa
7
7
10
24
19
Binh Duong
5
7
7
19
20
Binh Long
1
2
0
3
21
Binh Tuy
1
0
1
2
22
Gia Dinh
13
12
19
44
23
Hau Nghia
1
2
8
11
24
Long An
7
6
22
35
25
Long Khanh
6
3
1
10
26
Phuoc Long
1
1
0
2
27
Phuoc Tuy
3
5
0
8
28
Tay Ninh
3
5
13
21
Total:
48
50
81
179
MR 4
29
An Giang
11
15
10
36
30
An Xuyen
2
5
2
9
31
Ba Xuyen
13
20
2
35
32
Bac Lieu
4
8
3
15
33
Chau Doc
7
16
25
48
34
Chuong Thien
4
10
7
21
35
Dinh Tuong
9
20
17
46
36
Go Cong
3
10
10
23
37
Kien Giang
8
14
6
28
38
Kien Hoa
12
13
18
43
39
Kien Phong
14
12
17
43
40
Kien Tuong
1
2
3
6
41
Phong Dinh
12
14
4
30
42
Sa Dec
5
10
13
28
43
Vinh Binh
9
14
8
31
44
Vinh Long
11
17
30
58
Total:
125
200
175
500
Approved For UW Sff IE1 -RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200"tLAfD20R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
ANNEX II: LOCAL SELF-GOVERNMENT
(Plan Format to Be Completed by the Province)
Appendix : Local Self-Government
Program: People's Administration
1. MISSION.
Establish a local administration based on democratic fundamentals, which meets people's
requirements and aspirations and is qualified in administrative, economic, and financial
self-government, and is strongly supported by the people in the community self-defense
and self-development tasks.
As of 28 Feb 71, the Village and Hamlet general administrative situation is evaluated as
follows:
Villages:
Villages with elected governments working in place
Villages with elected governments in exile
- Villages with provisional governments working in place
- Villages with provisional governments in exile
- Villages without governments
- Villages scheduled to be surveyed
Hamlets:
- Hamlets with elected governments working in place
Hamlets with elected governments in exile
- Hamlets with provisional governments working in place
- Hamlets with provisional governments in exile
- Hamlets without governments
- Hamlets scheduled to be surveyed
Approved For Release 2004/Cgfl R*61FOR001 100010001 -4
 Approved For F j tISSff. fff DP80R01720R001100010001-4
Number of Villages which will hold elections
Month
New elections
Supplementary
Second Term
elections
Office elections
Total
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Total:
II-A- 16
Approved For lJ?NCEl_2SIS4f' ED-10180101 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/dUN jPII 1R001100010001-4
Number of Villages which will hold elections
Month
New elections
Supplementary
Second Term
Total
elections
Office elections
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Total:
Village Administrative Committees
Village Administrative Offices
Hamlet Management Boards
Approved For Release 2004/#H I*94%Fi f DR001100010001-4
 Approved For 01CLASSIRM-RDP80R01 720R001 100010001 -4
Chief of Province PD/Coordi-
nation Center (or Deputy Sec-
tor Commander)
(Description of activities of each Team at Village and Hamlet. )
d. Simplification of procedures. List some procedures which the locality believes are
outdated. Recommend measures for improvement.
e. Local budget self-sufficiency.
- List measures taken to increase local revenues.
- List those Villages targetted by the Province to achieve self--sufficiency in 1971:
1. Phu Nhuan Village
2. Binh Hoa Village
Village
1. An Nhon Village
2. Tang Nhon Phu Village
3.
1. Village A
2. Village B
3.
f. Publicity. Describe the publicity plan for local programs, projects, and budget.
g. Training.
(1) At National Training Center, Vung Tau:
-- Social and Cultural Commissioner: Students
- Deputy Hamlet Chief for Security: Students
Officials of other category: Students
Students
(2) At National Training Center, Pleiku (for Provinces' having Montagnard
Officials)
Students
II-A- 18
Approved For #NGkAUIF DRDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200 L(AMIFETOR001100010001-4
(3) At Province
- Training for new Village/Hamlet Officials:
- Seminar for new members of Village Councils:
- Re-training for Village/Hamlet Officials
graduated from Vung Tau NTC in 1969 & 1970:
Total:
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
The Province Training and in-service Training Centers reinforced by RD Cadre
trained at the NTC, Vung Tau, will organize two or three Mobile Instructor
Teams and dispatch them to Villages for on-the-spot training of village and ham-
let officials on those matters which they do not thoroughly understand, although
having received training in them.
II-A-I 9
Approved For Release 2001UNC= I[1DOR001100010001-4
 Approved FIJ NCtASS1PIE 0CIA-RDP80R0I 720R001 100010001-4
asllTuzuso0 I'll
0
popaia srga ;o ssagwow JO sagtunN
Ouxa uT aa41Tuauzo0
aATleslstuTuzpy a9rTTTA Pa100T0 u1TM
TToufOO sTUI ;o szaqusauz ;o zaquznN
u "0
`~ + o ?~' Pu~u u0 w
'O
u "0
'
y
OmyU o,
~ par,TaOtilny
I
l
W
0)
aiTxa uT Ttouno0 a2E1TTA g1iI
v
uu+w v Pupil u0
Ui
EO ~, uU
p azta oq;ny
To
w
0
aopid uT SuT~iJOM aalltuzuzo0
m O
.~ N
La
L: rn
u
_ a p11iA
uoEa ;o s;aluzEH JO a aquxnN
r- 0
luauzua 0AOJ 1fOrT1iJ
oo;;Tu no0 iEUOTs a
-TAOad stria ;o ssagtuaui;o zaquznN
aiTXa UT aa11TUILUOD 0ASI
_slu!-_ py __..-._. l _..._.._., _a .._-..
rn
o
N
co
Cl
n
9C
aAilpslsTuTuzpy aSETT1A Paloala LI1TM
TTounoo sTtll ;o s.i aquzauz ;O z oqulnN ~f
o
aopTd in
k
uT .ioM T. unoO alpTTTA 1
>i P 1441M
H
H
>
W W
A
0 0
N
E-{
L7
:J ai
d
z za
r u
c
H
0
a
II-A-20
Approved FU CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001100010001-4
NE6LASStFtEID
 Approved For Release 2004/DKLA-Swff f EVOR001100010001-4
O
HxP~ U
O td O
HlP
TuauzuaanoO tnog4tAk
HNH JO 9T$ZOt3JO 3O aaquxnN
aTTxa N
UT gUauluaaAOO TeUOtsTAOad gatM
p.I'2Og SUT~i"2UEj^T .-'
TaTLU H JO S1 Tz)TJJO JO a aquznN
aTTxa ut JUaWUaaAOO p010013 ggjNI
pau9tssv rn
v
rti .~ ~
w
O
paztaogjnv
@D PT UT u x
~IOAA 1uaLUJOAOO 12uoTslAOad LjjTI
paUOTssv
O o
pazTaogrnv
ao-eid ut
~ut~aom iUaulUaanoO pa1OaTa g1TJYt
G~ H
O W
r4
zx
91aTcu2H JO aapaO N
cd
O
H
II-A-21
Approved For Release 2004/09ict1 REiOR001100010001-4
 Approved F11 NCLA SS I MOCIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
x
uoT30 aIa
O^
N
O
00
00
paTnpai:)s szaquiayq jo TagLunK
.~
o
oo
w
al
) U
y
d'
N
N
11M
N
00
wry ro N
H
i
o
0
(D
0
0
C)
oo
M
Pa O~
M
N
H
z aquz a o aQ
R
s agU1 AOM
o
aagcgoo
aaquids
Isn$ny
U)
ATnr
0
u
aunt
d rw
O
TT.Ldv
0
H
0
T4 0.1 2yq
N
o
luaLuuaanoo anoT43IM
n
o
aTTxa ut ;uauz
-T
H
-uaaAOJ T-eUOTsTnoad IPTM
-
ox
??~ ~ v
aTtxa ut
W
;uaUZUS anon p a4D aTa LATH
?~
o
DVA TEUOTstnoad L14TA
d
o J
IL61 ut aztdxa
o oI
d
uzaaa aOt33o
LI, sTto
5 yL7
-unOD a2iETTIA 3O ragLunN
H
Ca
uJ
q
0 0
d
Fq
U
(~
F' W~
N
m
-
zH z;
H
sa2JETTTA JO aapao
,_.,
N
n
1 ai
0 U) n
~Q a3i m (m
w -
0 bA O a) co A
U ti
N
0
U 00 .r+ f.' c?1
N cd 0 -
4-4 cd H C^ O N
H ~ N U ,-
O o 0
~, y m x >
N z
1.4 w 0 O` i
O O cd ~O N
U) ,-r
W U -0 $4 0 W
Q 0 ii y is
N U 0 U) d
z W GS v O
uJ
O rd u 0 O"
L
H H H w H U
II-A-26
A~ILFASIH~0D/04/01 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA-RDPI1fI
x
o
c
ro
ro
0 :J
O
H
pp
N .may O
d C
v
U
N
H i7
~D
U N
N U
U H
L(1
t3
x
U
r
u
N
an
P. b
r'1
O
O
H -N
(
ii
--11
O
?
0
^
- N
U '~ H
w m
U H
0
a
ti .?+ N
II-A-27
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA-RDPI AGUSS IFII01-4
 Approved Fo"tteASSI fitDIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
ro
0 0
W w H
'
C
0
i 0
a
a d
a
u
44
'"
3 ~ro z
N k ~ z C c y a -~
q) O
H
O N
D it id
l
w O
w a'Nx ."
w
bJD
H ro ro V N _
Q~ y a y ro
C -
t(u
N ~ y C b.0 U -C
U ro C C O
z 0 w
ro
N
N ro
U O C
w
U y
N H
W
C C
O .,y
Z7
U ro
a C7
N y O
U C
N
N N
cd
N T y d
A I bD i. y
0 0 ' 'O O
Z a a'U
C ro ~ ~ ~ y
y
0 0 ro 0 .. bD U
Q)
r,
w d ~a NFU
'~I N 5: N ra
1
r
- C
`LJ
~N "0 0 H
V b))
id
~ O 0 O V fA
0
N
0 -I.a N U id bA 4) " Ci
N t"i
DD Q to "
O
C
C
C V
Cl)
Z O
-
.,
II-A-28
Approved For UNOL*SISIFI f A-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIAOAt"fiff10001-4
>
~
C:.
H SS
y N
W
N J
ao
N H
.~
0
x ?5
0
a)
N
?
W
~ >
an
N ~
N
0
.
I
u
N
rd
x(1)
P'.
o Q~
U
y.4 CO
O U
1
0
0 cd q H
bA Ya -
0 N
0 N
U
a4
o
-
W
w
4
-0 of
ya u
W
bZ
bjD
N
b
g
.N
cd
en
P q u
A
a " cd
N
0)
?'
O
X
U
w
o
an
bb
0
0
cd
(d
w a
a
O
N
N U
m cd bJD Q)
4
O
y ti -
H .,a
II-A-29
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA-UGLA5~1'~B10001-4
 Approved For FVN[OA4 S1 DP80R01 720R001 100010001 -4
REPORT ON IMPLEMENTATION RESULTS
OF
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
List of supplementary Village/Hamlet personnel
as of end of 1971
Village Adm. Committee
A - Authorized personnel (Village Chief, Deputy Village Chief for Adm. , Deputy
Village Chief for Security, and Commissioners:
----------------
B - Assigned personnel:
-------------------------------
C - Positions in the Village Adm. Committee vacant:
---------------
Office of Village Adm. Committee
D - Authorized personnel:
------------------------------
E - Assigned personnel:
-------------------------------
Hamlet Management Board
G. ?? Authorized personnel:
-----------------------------
H ?? Assigned personnel:
------------------------------
Village classification
I - Villages with over 5, 000 people:
------------------------
K - Villages with under 5, 000 people:
-----------------------
L - Surveyed villages(1)
-------------------------------
II-A-30
Approved For FLINGLASSI f :I1/lDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA-RDP80'INUISSIM D
0
a
a
x
-~
o x
~
u m
a) bD
C
H o ti
c
u
u
.I.1
0
0
0
z
a) 0 x
0
(d
O
H
H 0 W
PL4
H O
0
u o
v~G
-~ y
H Cd
Q
W
U
Gi
O
m
_
O d
a
0
0
xi
..+ cd
H~3
H a)
~,0
dd
44
0
a
oa
H
II-A-31
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA-RDP80 J R*SSI f J E#4
H
a)
a)
H
-
k
vbiD
A
o
H
0
bbD P
rd .N
y
O
w
.~ u
5 m
b0
H
g 0 0
O w
y a' I5C
0 W H
o
m
y N
N
 Approved For ~0~~1~~DP80R01720R001100010001-4
REPUBLIC OF VIETNAM
Province:
R E P O R T
of
COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
1 9 7 1
--+-+-+-+--
Population control goal achieved in the month of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1971.
A. Total population of the province: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
B. Population controlled as of 28 February 1971:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. Percentage of population under control compared with total province population: .
D. Additional population coming under control since 1 March 1971: . . . . . . .
E. Percentage of population goal achieved: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
II-A- 32
Approved For ReUN&A~'~ F1[D0p80R01 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release wftZwAW
RADIO MESSAGE
FROM: Province . . . . . . . . . .
TO MOI
INFO : CPDC/CC
Report of the 1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan from Province
of . . . . . . . . . for the month of . . . . . . . . . 1971:
I. REPORT FORM II/A1:
B- C- D- E- G- H- K- L- M-
N- 0- P-
II. REPORT FORM II/AZ
A- B- C- D- E- G- H- I- K- L-
M- N-
III. REPORT FORM II/A3
A- B- C- D- E- G- H- I- K- L-
IV. REPORT FORM II/A4
B- C- D- E- G- H- I- K- L- M-
V. REPORT FORM II/A5
II-A-33
Approved For Release 2004/04/0U:NlC- 98I f 1
 Approved
rRp-lrxg~f/DNEoCIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
WNC F1
NOTE: After letters A, B, C . . . . in the Message, enter plus (+) figures as included
in the related written report in Columns A, B, C.
If nothing is to be reported, put zero (0) after the appropriate letter in the
Message. In Item VI, Miscellaneous, include information contained in the
remarks column of the written report or other details.
II-A- 34
Approved F11 I7 20R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/0uNCtASSt01100010001-4
U)
TE30.L
zaquzaT^T
fiaE3aa'oa~'
N
ao
TEZauaO
o
U
uetzzztEtlO aDTA
uELUatEww'J
N }4
auE~SiS S'Ff
H
r (d
d 0
liaE~iTtT~T
Q
0
'WDV JO3 3OTT 0
m
3aT" H djndaQ
x u
3a?uj aaTWEH
O
zagLUaW Tat13O
f~zETazOaS
~
AaeaaTOaS 3attT0
0
aauOIS StLU uoJ
V
spaoaa2i TIAID
H
F[(1IOR001100010001-4
 Approved FU NCLsAtVf[ 0IA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
b. In accordance with areas of responsibilities, carry out points 4 and 5 in par A
above, and appropriate activities specified in other points.
c. Based on this general program, each organization prepares a detailed and
realistic program of activity for the future year and forwards it to the Ministry
for review in advance. Local organizations, when preparing their plans, should
closely plan in accordance with the local requirements and conditions, and with
the agreement of the local administrative commander concerned.
In short, after the 4 months supplementary Pacification and Development Plan
of 1970, from 1 Nov 70 to 28 Feb 71, we will have consolidated, strengthened
and, thoroughly prepared for the phase to actually launch the "People's Infor-
mation Program" in the "1971 Community Defense and Local Development
Plan", beginning 1 Mar 71 and lasting till 28 Feb 1972.
a. Organizations concerned should prepare their monthly and quarterly activity
schedules for continual operations.
b. Every month, all organizations (central and local) submit activity report to the
Ministry before the 9th of the following month.
c. Directorate General for Propaganda monitors the implementation of this program
and consolidates reports for submission to the CPDC/CC.
1. All Ministries that have their own Information Psywar Campaigns, disseminate
their specific themes within the framework of the National Information Committee.
2. In addition to the National Psywar campaign, during this period, the Prefecture,
Provinces and Cities may insert short-range psywar campaigns to disseminate
regional themes concerning the local area. Special Information facilities such
as radio and television in the local area will actively contribute to carrying out
these programs.
3. The Ministry of Information will provide special support to the Phung Hoang and
PSDF program.
2. Evaluate the people's morale on the basis of their cooperation with the government
and support to the nationalist cause by means of a program of questions and inter-
views on a number of problems regarding politics, economy, social welfare, etc.
The method of evaluation is to be studied and worked out in detail by the Ministry
of Interior and submitted to the Prime Minister for implementation.
II-B-8
Approved FUsASSi&lA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20ImhdhQ
LkSSTD720R001100010001-4
IV. GOALS:
A. Military Region Level:
1. Discussion seminars for military, cadre, and government personnel: monthly
Information technical training is provided to 100% of military, cadre, and govern-
ment personnel.
a. Level 1: Organize province military, cadre and government personnel conven-
tions: All civil servants in Provinces, City, or Prefecture councils (consolidate,
explain problem areas, disseminate new themes of the month): once a month.
b. Level 2: Province services, village and hamlet officials, PSDF members: once
every two weeks.
c. Level 3: Civilian population: once a month.
2. Information Technical Training.
Technical training is provided school teachers, Chiefs of Province Technical
Services, technical cadres, PSDF members, and RD cadres: 100%
Information cadre and personnel will contact all families: 2, 607, 603 (will be re-
vised in the census program).
In 1971, 1, 075 model Information villages will be completed, i. e. , half of the num-
ber of villages in the country.
5. Prefecture, Province, and City Information Campaigns:
Monthly.
6. Prefecture, Province, and City mobile Information teams operating in wards,
subwards, and villages: 1 (ward or subward) or village
II-B-9
Approved For Release 20(NZLAS I
 Approved For Release 200 UIC F 120R001100010001-4
Appendix C: People's Organizations
I. GENERAL.
A. Situation.
As a result of the RVN's military success, open warfare is gradually lessening. The
GVN Pacificat ion and Development effort has achieved clearly satisfactory results.
Despite this, the people's struggle must continue in order to achieve victory in the po-
litical field. In this political struggle, which is not less difficult, the organization of
the people is a pressing need in order to develop unity of will and action in the entire
nation. However, the free and democratic regime of the Republic of Vietnam cannot
adopt an autocratic policy to force organization of the people as in countries with dic-
tatorships. On the contrary, we must encourage the people to organize themselves on
a voluntary basis.
Initially, the Ministry of Interior is responsible for mapping out a program of action,
assigning duties, and coordinating with various agencies in the development of people's
organizations. In the future, when the movement has fully developed, this task may
be entrusted to a General Directorate or separate agency.
People's organizations should strengthen the development of a healthier society making the
people clearly understand their responsibilities to the village, district, and province. The
development of people's organizations helps the people to have an opportunity and the means
to undertake such tasks as are in the common interest and in the spirit of community coop-
eration and to assist rapid local progress in all areas.
III. IMPLEMENTATION.
A. Basic Criteria.
In accordance with the above concept, the organization of people must be based on the
following criteria:
1. People will be encouraged to organize at all different levels, i. e. , from village
and hamlet up to province.
2. Elected Councils have the mission of encouraging, guiding, and assisting local
people's organizations. Local authorities of all levels play only the role of help-
ing, counselling and fostering development.
3. All people's organizations must be private associations free from the Government's
direct control and management.
4. Newly-formed associations must be promptly legalized. The Ministry of Interior
II-C-1
Approved For Release 200JULUS 1E1DOR001100010001-4
 Approved FcUINttEA2 1 t0IA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
is in charge of simplifying the procedures of issuing permits to associations.
5. People may be organized into groups based on the following criteria:
- Common interests: Cooperatives, Economic associations, PCAGs, etc.
- Common avocations: Sports, Literature, Arts, etc.
- Common spheres of activity: live in same areas, common level of education, etc.
6. Religious groups and political parties are not considered as people's organizations.
7. People's organizations may be classified depending on their fields of action as
follows:
d. Youth
e. Entertainment, etc.
B. Organizational System and Duty Assignments.
1. At Village, Hamlet, Ward (Phuong) and Quarter (Khu Pho) levels.
The basic unit of people's organization is the Village. The Hamlet is too small to
form groups of people large enough for efficient operations. In Saigon Capital and
some Cities, the units equivalent to the Village are Ward (Phuong) and Quarter
(Khu Pho).
The Village Council is responsible for guiding, and assisting People's Organiza-
tions and encouraging their initiation.
In Wards and Quarters, having no elected Councils, People's Organizations will be
given assistance and guidance by the Province Council, through the Council mem-
bers of the concerned precinct.
Village and Hamlet authorities will only assist, counsel, and promote the growth
of organizations.
Since there is no elected Council at the District level, Prefecture, Province, or
City Council members of Districts concerned will assume the guidance of people's
organizations in Districts.
District authorities will only assist, counsel, and promote the growth of organiza-
tions in their respective districts.
II-C-2
Approved F411~, i~ BA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200UltLCI IF1ED2OROOu000b000l-4
Prefecture, Province, and City Councils are responsible for guiding, motitvating
and sponsoring the organization of groups in their respective localities.
The Prefecture, Province, and Cities will reserve 25% of the fund of their res-
pective Development Budget to use in providing effective and constant support to
people's organizations. However, only those organizations which are unable to
support themselves should rely on government financial support. Financial ac-
counting procedures will be simple and expenditures publicized.
Prefecture, Province, and City authorities legalize, as well as counsel, guide,
and foster people's organizations in their respective localities.
In principle the Central Government does not exercise direct control over local
people's organizations and associations.
The programs of people's organizations should not be too limited and fixed and thereby
be unattractive to the people. They should have the following characteristics:
- Vary according to operational spheres, technical fields, interests,benefits, and pur-
pose.
- Be broad and general in nature covering all areas of security, society, and economy.
Each program or activity may have two parts: one is devoted to study and the other to
activities.
1. Study sessions may be organized for the following:
- Pacification and development objectives.
- Plans of organizing, activating, and developing different associations and groups,
- Mass education: vocational training, orientation, science, arts, etc.
- Study subjects will be provided by local authorities.
- Study classes will be conducted by associations or groups themselves. The Gov-
ernment may provide material assistance if the group is lacking.
- Study sessions should be regularly organized but must not hinder people's daily
activities.
2. Activities:
- Mutual assistance.
- Professional improvement.
II-C-3
Approved For Release 200UCL IFCEE020RO01100010001-4
 Approved For fliNt f1ititbRD8OROl720R001100010001-4
- Local development.
- Social relief.
- Youth activities, physical exercise, and sports.
- Shows, entertainments.
3. In short, study and activity sessions must be regularly and constantly conducted in
accordance with the desire and field of action of each organization. The activities
of different people's organizations may be coordinated at Village, District, or Pro-
vince levels for programs or objectives which are beyond the capability of single
organization.
The Government should support the programs of these organizations to make them
viable based on the mission and facilities of each Ministry.
Each Ministry must provide support in the organization, management, and maintenance
of people's organizations. (See TAB 1 attached. )
The reporting channel is from village to district, province, to the Central Government.
Monthly reports will be submitted.
The reporting format is to be specified by the Ministry of Interior and must be simple
and easily implemented.
IV. GOALS FOR 1971.
A. Organization.
In 1971, the development of people's organizations will be encouraged throughout the
country.
B. Training and Study.
1. People (see the study section).
2. Cadres.
All cadre of all branches having attended training courses held in concerned Ministries
or at NT C, Vung Tau or Province In-Service Training Centers will study the training
documents on people's organizations (drafted and distributed by the Ministry of Interior).
Study subjects include:
Objectives of the People's Organizations Development Program.
Plans and methods for the organization of groups.
Criteria for evaluation of the organization and the programs of different associations.
II-C-4
Approved For R C1A F1EDDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004 fNg[A. fIJJOR001100010001-4
TAB 1: Coordination among various Ministries and Agencies for implementing the People's
Organization Development Program
1. Office of the Minister of State for Culture.
- Gives help to present cultural and artistic organizations.
- Encourages the establishment of new groups and organizations.
- Coordinates activities to safeguard the Vietnamese culture, etc.
2, The Ministry of Interior.
- In coordination with the Ministries of Justice, Economy, and Labor, reviews legal mat-
ters relating to activities of People's Organizations.
- Studies the development requirements of Village/Hamlet organizations and coordinates
with appropriate Ministries to request assistance to establish the organizations.
- Supervises the prefecture, provinces /municipalities in coordinating people's organiza-
tions in local areas.
- Trains cadre by adding lectures on people's organizations to the present cadre training
program.
-Uses all communications means to publicize the People's Organization Program. Adver-
tises it to encourage the people to join.
- Encourages, advises and gives assistance to existing organizations and groups such as
the PTAs, students and college students' associations, etc.
- Encourages the establishment of new associations, etc.
- Adds the adult education program to the study programs of the people's organizations, etc.
6. The Ministry of Land Reform and Agricultural/Fishery Development.
- Advises and gives assistance to people's organizations subordinate to it, such as: the
Farmers Associations, 4H Groups, etc.
Approved For Release 2004Dt L LAS SIF BOR001100010001-4
 Approved For RCrJ.FDP80R01720R001100010001-4
- Encourages the establishment of cooperatives to increase production output and surface
area of cultivation, etc.
7. The Ministry of Labor.
- Coordinates activities of Labor Organizations with those of other groups and associations.
- Includes the vocational training program in group activities of people's organizations, etc.
8. The Ministry of Economy.
- To attract more members, organizations may purchase commodities such as rice, milk
and sugar from agencies subordinate to the Ministry of Economy.
- Establishes separate programs to encourage people's organizations in the highlands,
aiming at the main objectives:
Improve the standard of living.
Improve the educational level.
Strengthen a national spirit.
- Advises and improves existing groups and associations, and encourages the establishment
of new organizations, etc.
10. The Ministry of Health.
- Includes in the People's Organization plan the program of establishing "Sanitation Hamlets."
- Teaches disease prevention and treatment methods through activities and local organiza-
tions.
- Encourages the establishing of organizations specialized in public health, advises and
gives assistance, etc.
It. The Ministry of Social Welfare.
- Organize war victims to help them expeditiously restore their normal living.
- Assists existing groups and associations: encourages the establishment of new organiza-
tions.
- Encourages people's organizations to operate in the social welfare field, etc.
1?. The Ministry of Justice, the Ministry of Chieu Hoi, the Ministry of Public Works (Directo-
rate General of Construction and Urban Planning), the Ministry of Communication and Pos-
tal Affairs.
II-CC-1-2
Approved For RU U In
L0kSS+F DP80R01 720R001 100010001 -4
WDIZU'll
 Approved For Release 2004fl$EA tOR001100010001-4
- Assist and guide subordinate organizations which have been established or will be estab-
lished, etc,
- Disseminate "mass housing" plan to people's organizations (Directorate General of Cons-
truction and Urban Planning).
- Coordinates activities of youth and sport organizations with activities of other organiza-
tions,
II-C-1-3
Approved For Release 2004/Ii/N CcI&ASS1EIEDROOl 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004J LC Q31?111VOR001100010001-4
The 1971 Youth Program is a continuation of the Youth Program of the Government's 1970
Pacification and Development Plan. Therfore, the guiding principles and objectives have
not changed in general.
A. Basic Criteria. The 1971 Youth Program will be implemented based on the following
basic criteria:
1. Keep the development of Youth, Gymnastics, and Sports organizations constant
through using self-support facilities in accordance with the spirit of community
cooperation.
2. Survey, guide, and support Youth Councils, Youth PCAGs, Youth Associations,
and Gymnastics and Sports Societies as a means of the social community.
3. Motivate the organization of Youth Councils and Youth PCAGs at national level,
and at the same time extend special assistance to local Youth Councils and PCAGs
to implement the Youth Program down to Hamlet level.
4. Initiate strong competitive movements for the development of Youth life activities
and gymnastics and sports operations throughout the country.
II. PHASING AND TASKING.
1. Domestic. Organize Youth Councils and Youth PCAGs at
National level.
Support the organization, maintenance, and development of
Youth and Children's Groups' activities throughout the coun-
try, at District, Village, and Hamlet levels.
II-D-1
Approved For Release 2004/1i/N LASS1EIEDRool 100010001-4
 Approved Fgtg[?AlfllE gARDP80R01 720R001 100010001-4
Organize Youth Assemblies at Province, City, and in the
Prefecture.
Organize Youth and Children's life activities in celebration
of solemn ceremonials such as the "Trung Sisters' Day,
Hung Vuong Day, Mid-Autumn Festival, and National Day.
a. Attend the Asian Youth conference held in Thailand (12
January 1971).
b. Attend the International Cooperation Assembly in Korea.
c. Attend the World Youth Seminar in the USA.
d. Attend the Asian Anti-Communist Youths' Conference in
Formosa.
e. Attend the World Catholic Rural Youths' conference.
f. Participate in Boy Scout Assemblies in Japan.
g. Exchange youths with friendly countries.
B. Gymnastics-Sports.
1. Domestic. Organize and support Sports Societies at Village
and District levels, at schools, in PSDF units, Government
agencies, public, and private enterprises.
Organize Sports tournaments at District level.
Organize Sports tournaments at Province level.
Organize Sports tournaments at Region level.
Organize National Games.
Organize "Vietnam Tour" bicycle race.
Send sports delegations for demonstrations throughout the
country.
2. International. Attend championship events of the following
sports:
Central Asian and Asian Soccer Championship (Youths
and Children)
Approved Foe
Fl
EB-RDP80R01 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004
C L'A-SStFtED?'??1100010001-4
AsianTennis Championship (Youths and Children
World and Asian Youths' Table Tennis Championship
Asian Bicycle race
Asian Youths' Swimming Championship
Asian - Australian Inter-zonal Swordmanship
Championship; Southeast - Asian and Asian Markmanship
Championship
Attend friendship sports contests on the occasion of
important holidays in friendly countries
Organize Seminars for Youth Service Chiefs throughout the
country.
Organize a training course to form 100 middle-level
instructors and continue to complete the middle-level instructors
training course opened in late 1970.
Organize training for basic instructors of youth, Gymnastics,
and Sports training courses for cadre at all levels.
Organize training course for leaders for Youth PCAGs and
Sports beginners.
The responsibility of developing Youth, Gymnastics, and Sports activities as a human
investment for the Nation will be shared by responsible circles both in the government
and in the private sector. Therefore coordination must be promoted.
Youth and Sports organizations in the PSDF, Army, at schools, in public and private
organs and enterprises will be guided in coordinated activities, and for the planning
and implementation of development projects throughout the country.
B. Coordination between Private Youth and Sports Organizations and the Government.
Those operational projects which promote a spirit of community cooperation will
require active participation of Youth Groups, Gymnastics, and Sports Associations.
On the other side, the Government will provide personnel, facilities, and technical
assistance to Youth Groups, Gymnastics, and Sports Associations.
II-D-3
Approved For Release 2004/09a ci4SISIfI1EDR001100010001-4
 Approved FINtUASS flIARDP80R01 720R001 100010001-4
C. Among Government Agencies.
1. Ministry of Education.
Organize school Youth, Teenagers, and Children into Groups.
Maintain Youth activities, Gymnastics, and Sports activities at schools, with the
support of the "School Activities Development Program" (CPS).
Create school leaders from the student body, School Sports beginners, and
athletes.
Establish programs in the educational curriculum for the teaching of School group
activities, Gymnastics, and Sports.
Set up Youth and Sports facilities at schools.
Organize physical fitness tests for students.
2. Ministry of Interior.
Specify conditions so that all People's Self Defense Youths and Children automati-
cally become members of Youth, physical fitness, and Sports Associations.
Train qualified People's Self Defense Inter-Team Leaders and Team Leaders to
guide the Youth, physical fitness and sports movement of PSDF units.
The Deputy Village Chief for Security and the Deputy Hamlet Chief for Security
are responsible for the implementation of the youth, physical fitness, and sports
program in Villages and Hamlets in accordance with the special capabilities of
the concerned Youth Services and Sections.
Maintain security and order for scheduled youth, physical fitness and Sport
Assemblies.
Rapidly review dossiers requesting establishment of associations.
Facilitate entry and exit visas of Sport and Youth delegations.
3. Ministry of Defense.
Complete the organization of servicemen's children into groups.
Return youth, physical fitness and sports facilities to normal uses.
Develop youth, physical fitness and sports activities among military ranks of
all branches.
Support organized youth, physical fitness and sports assemblies throughout the
country.
II-D-4
WELL JLI WTIfff DIA-RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
Approved FIN
 Approved For Release 20(UNI"Cl LASS11 0720R001100010001 -4
Review the consideration of legal draft deferments for Youth and Sport delegations
going abroad.
Detach Youth, physical fitness and Sports coaches from the Armed Forces to
work for the Youth Branch.
Regularize the organization of Boy Scout and Girl Guides and Military Sport
Associations so that they can operate within the National Sport and Youth Organi-
zation system.
RDC Groups will cooperate with Deputy Village Chief for Security and Deputy
Hamlet Chief for Security to do the following:
Bring the Youth, Sports and Gymnastics Programs into the Village Self
Development Program.
Support local authorities in establishing projects for the development of
Youth, Gymnastics and sports facilities through the Community Development
procedures.
Guide and encourage rural Youth to participate in the implementation of
Village and Hamlet pacification and development plans.
5. Ministry of Information.
Publicize the Youth policy widely among the people.
Publicize the role Youth plays in national salvation and nation-building.
Guide Youth participation in the People's Information Program.
Explain to the people the importance of Youth , Gymnastics, and Sports activi-
ties to restore society and to serve the country.
6. Ministry of Social Welfare.
Create favorable conditions for juvenile delinquents to return as good citizens.
Manage Community Centers.
Organize entertainment and social welfare activities.
Strengthen society and Vietnamese Youth's way of life.
7. Ministry of Health.
Guide young people to participate in sanitation operations (surroundings, family,
individual) and in public health.
Give training to Youth associations in community public health, first aid, and
II-D-5
Approved For Release 200USC LA&&IFIED2oRoo1100010001-4
 Approw"ro L OUaaak]TIET : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
"t S
Study and disseminate documents on sanitation and nutrition to be applied in
Youth activities and camps.
8. Ministry for Development of Ethnic Minorities.
Form Ethnic Minorities Youth into groups.
Develop the physical fitness and Sports movement among the Ethnic Minorities.
9. Ministry of Foreign Affairs.
Assist in helping Youth and Sport delegations enter and leave Country.
Provide Vietnamese Youth more opportunities to make contact with and exchange
experiences with international Youth.
Help Vietnamese Youth, Sports, and Physical Fitness Associations participate
in Youth and Sports Conferences and international sports contests.
Ini:ervene to get developed countries to provide technicians and support for
Youth, physical fitness, and Sports activities.
Form young people abroad into groups and sponsor their activities as well as
that of Vietnamese students.
Provide professional orientation and provide employment for illiterate young
people.
Develop many Vocational Training Centers for Young people.
11. Ministry of Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development.
Form rural youth into groups.
Regularize the organization of the 4H Youth Association and Family Activities
Associations to operate within the National Youth organizational system.
Provide rural youth with knowledge on farming techniques, animal husbandry,
and fishery by developing Agricultural animal husbandry and fishery centers.
Supervise the implementation of Youth programs in the Prefecture Capital,
Provinces, Cities, Districts, Villages, Wards and Quarters.
II-D-6
Approv fl JUASS+F4~1 : CIA-RDP80RO1720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004
t [IA S
S iMbOR001100010001-4
RLQP
Study incorporation of the youth, physical fitness and, sports projects into the
Province and City Self-Development Program.
Goals
Funds
Self
Activities
National
Develop
0
Units
Personnel
Budget
ment
Budget
YOUTH
A. Dom
stic Activities
1
Youth Council:
- Improve and develop Youth
Councils at all levels:
- Prefecture
01
09
X
- Province (except Con Son)
47
423
X
- City
09
81
X
- District
253
2,277
X
- Village
2, 151
19, 350
X
- Ward
56
504
X
- Sub-ward
61
549
X
- Form National Youth Council
: 01
108
Total:
2, 579
23, 301
2
Youth Organizations:
- People's Self-Defense Force
5, 261
2, 578, 300
X
- School
500
2,321,700
X
- Armed Forces
400
49, 000
X
- In various Associations
41
400, 092
X
Total
6, 201
5, 349, 892
0
X
3
Conduct, sponsor and develop
Youth activities for Youth
Councils
2,579
91,310
VN$1, 518, 000
X
-
Approved For Release 200411JNCcUMIEDR001100010001-4
 Approved FotMrrAS? EARDP8OROl 720R001 100010001-4
Organize Province, City and
Prefectural Youth Conferences
Organize Nationwide
Youth Conference
Conduct Youth Activities
during i'our anniversaries for
District Youths.
Organize Youth Co-activity
Camps:
506 50, 000 VN$5, 060, 000
3, 387 293, 010 VN$14, 468, 000
12, 167 5, 666, 203 VN$14, 468, 000
B. International Activities
Attend Asian Anti-Communist
Youth Conference in Taipei
Take part in International
Youth Camp in Republic of
Korea (August 1971)
Youth Seminars in Washington,
U.S.A. (July 1971)
Exchanges of Youth with USA,
Japan, and Taiwan
Conference
World Scout Meeting in Japan
Total
PHYSICAL FITNESS AND
SPORTS
Improve and develop Sport
II-D-8
Approved For" am
SS4f I:ED-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
nell
 Appro
ved For Release 2004/04/
y
lEff0110001
0001-4
- National Sports Commission
03
076
- Sports Federations
20
362
- Sports Sector Commissions
40
180
- Sports Associations
50Z
30, 120
- People's Self Defense Force
Teams
2, 151
64,530
- Armed Forces Teams
25
1, 500
- School Teams
315
22, 050
Organize Tournaments.
- At District Stadiums
50, 600
- At Province and Capital
14, 400
Stadiums
3, 600
VN$5, 500, 000
- At National Stadium
1, 188
VN$5, 500, 000
Total:
Organize regular sport prize
competitions:
- At Province and Capital level
48
11, 520
- At District level
253
151, 800
- At Village level
2, 151
430, 000
- At Ward level
56
67, 200
- At Sub-ward level
61
73, 200
- At Hamlet level
10, 522
2, 151,400
Organize special Tournaments:
- Cycle race around Vietnam
120
VN$2, 000, 000
- Mobile sport demonstrations
320
VN$ 600, 000
- National Day Tournament
154
VN$2, 000, 000
II-D-9
Approved For Release 2004/04/c N
MFM D1100010001-4
 Approved FU N(A2 r flDIARDP8OROl 720R001 100010001-4
B. World Tournaments
Attend Southeast Asia Olympic
in Singapore
Attend World Tournaments:
- Soccer
- Lawn Tennis
- Table Tennis
- Cycling race
- Marksmanship
- Volley ball
- Swimming
- Fencing
Continue training of 42 soccer
coaches in the eight remaining
months
Conduct a 3-day seminar for all
Chiefs of Provincial Youth Services 1
Conduct training of 100 new
soccer coaches (in 4 months of
the year).
Conduct training of basic
coaches (2 month course)
Conduct Youth/ Gymnastics and
Sports Courses for basic and
middle level coaches and Cadre
Conduct training of Leaders for
Youth PCAGs
7 Conduct training of Youth Leader's
for private Associations I 40
Approved Fo fte &A
120
20
16
20
15
10
10
EO-RDP80R01 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004 N [lAIFt!D0R001 100010001-4
Conduct training of new
athletes
Conduct training of National
athletes and players
Recovery, repair, and constru-
tion of provincial stadiums
Note: Funds paid by the General Directorate of Youth are estimated expenditures
only. The National Budget for 1971 has not been officially promulgated.
II- D-1 1
Approved For Release 2004/UN IEDR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20'UNCL~I20R001100010001-4
IM
III - I
Approved For Release 20aU 1/I;ASII '20R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2001WCtASW:Mft Fit 0R001100010001-4
sif
A. General situation. The government emphasis in the Land Reform Program is to ac-
celerate the "Making-Farmers-Land-Owners Program" so that the farmers enthusi-
astically increase production. This program will help make the people prosperous
and the country strong. The specific programs are as follows:
1. Land-to-the-Tiller Program.
2. Program of land survey for Montagnard People.
3. Program of regularization of squatter status on public land for cultivation.
4. Program of distribution of land in resettlement camps and land development
centers.
The Land-to-the-Tiller Program is considered as a most important program because
of its broad scope and its status as a unique symbol of Government policy. There-
fore, every resource and effort will be centered upon achieving the goals of this
program. Existing programs will be continued.
The preparation for the execution of Law 3/70 was completed and execution began in
the second half of 1970. In 1971, the Land-to-the-Tiller Program must be vigor-
ously executed, concurrently with other programs of land distribution, in order to
achieve established goals.
The program of land survey for the Montagnard people also plays an important role
because it aims at an objective of economic, political, and social development for
Montagnard People in the Vietnamese national community. It encourages them to
actively contribute their share to restoring security and prosperity to the highlands
and creates an advantageous condition for national activities that promote the national
harmony. Agencies concerned must review the existing plans in order to effectively
and promptly implement this program of land survey for Montagnards.
B. Duties of the Ministry responsible for implementing the program. With the mission
of expediting the program to distribute land to the rural people, the Ministry of Land
Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development has established the following goals
for each operational program in 1971:
1. Land-to-the-Tiller Program:
a. Four hundred thousand (400, 000) hectares of land will be distributed to
farmers.
III-A-..1
Approved For Release 200M MIFOI1020R001100010001-4
 Approved For VIN1E1 if:,WDP80RO1720R001100010001-4
b. Farmers will be issued land titles and their ownership will be entered in
the land register.
c. The compensation for land-owners will be expedited concurrently with the
distribution of land to farmers.
2. Land Survey Program for Montagnard People:
b. Survey of individual plots: 40, 000 hectares. Since the holdings of indivi-
dual Montagnards are rarely large, it will take much time to survey and
identify these individual plots. Therefore, although the land survey for
individuals will proceed, first priority must be given to the delimitation of
hamlet living areas in the Montagnard Hamlet Identification Program, in
order to give the individual Montagnards peace of mind until such time as
they can be given their individual plots of land. The delimitation of main
living areas must be made in such a way to be able to clearly and easily
recognize boundaries of these areas based on documents (aerial photo-
graphs and maps) and bench marks.
The administration of land by Montagnard hamlets will be established im-
mediately after completion of the land survey.
3. Program of distribution of land in resettlement camps and land development
centers: Fifteen thousand (15, 000) hectares of land will be distributed to
people in resettlement camps.
This operation will be implemented with priority in those areas which are pros-
perous and active.
4. Program of regularization of the status of squatters tilling Government land:
To be readjusted: 10, 000 hectares. (The adjustment of this land will proceed
based on current laws concerning the concession of Government properties and
through simple procedures specified in Circular 10, 601-BCTNT/HCTC/3/TT,
24 November 1964. )
II. CONCEPT (for task implementation)
In order to complete specified goals within time limits, the principle of decentralization
of authority must be adhered to so that local governments bear the major share of
responsibility for the progress of this work. Furthermore, simple, effective, technical
methods and all modern facilities such as aerial photographs and computers must be used
to the maximum. Lastly, the coordination and mutual support between jointly respon-
sible agencies must be properly effected.
All details concerning the organization and assignment of duties for implementing the
Land-to-the-Tiller Program are indicated in the Execution Plan which was prepared
and forwarded by the Ministry of Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development
to the concerned Administrative and Technical Agencies for execution. (Reference:
Letter 6625-CCDDNN/HCTC. 3, MOLRAFD, 27 June 1970. )
Approved For t1G ASN IEDRDP80R01720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004 INUAZIFNI
Circular 138-TT/ThT/PC2/3, Prime Minister's Office, 31 July 1970, approved the
Execution Plan and reasserted the Province Chiefs' role in the implementation of the
Land- to-the- Tiller Program.
The organization and assignment of duties for the implementation of programs of invest-
ing people with property other than under the Land-to-the-Tiller Program will continue
according to existing regulations and procedures.
Since the program of hamlet boundary identification for Montagnards is so important,
the current regulations and procedures must be organized into an implementing plan
which will contain the following main sections:
- Organization and mission.
- Goals for each Province and Montagnard hamlet.
- Implementation procedures.
- Training.
- Publicity.
- Recruitment of personnel and cadre.
- Funding.
- Support and operational coordination among cooperating agencies.
- Briefings and reports.
The plan of implementation for this land survey program for Montagnards must be
drafted and promulgated in early 1971.
A. Basic standards.
1. A Land Distribution Committee will be formed in each village. The Village
Land Registrar of this Committee must coordinate with the Agriculture and
Land Reform Commissioner and must hold the key position of collecting docu-
ments and preparing and establishing administrative and technical dossiers for
review by the Committee in considering the distribution of land, investigating
ownership, and determining land yield, etc.
2. For every five villages, there is a Team Leader who is responsible to guide,
control, and supervise operations performed by Land Registrars and Village
Land Distribution Committees, and who acts as a link between the Province
Land Affairs Service and his villages.
? 3. Every three Team Leaders are supervised by a Controller who is responsible
to guide, control, and supervise operations.
III-A-3
Approved For Release 2004 LIA i ~OR001100010001-4
%
 Approved MLA a~IA-RDP80ROl720R001100010001-4
4. In each Province Land Affairs Service, there is a Land-to-the-Tiller Project
Leader and various Sub-Sections to support and manage all operations per-
formed by Controllers, Team Leaders, and Village Land Registrars at work-
sites.
5. At central level, the Director General of Land Affairs is the agency that has
direct management responsibility for the Land-to-the-Tiller Program.
B, Tasking.
a. The Village Administrative Committee and the Hamlet Management Board
have the duty to disseminate notices and urge and guide farmers to make
applications for land.
b. The Village Land Registrar and the Village Agriculture and Land Reform
Commissioner have the duty to clear up worksites, identify land borders,
and collect documents and establish dossiers to submit to the Village Land
Distribution Committee for decision.
c. The Village Land Distribution Committee, under the chairmanship of the
Village Chief, meets to consider and decide upon applications for land, land
yield, investigation of land ownership, etc.
d. The Village Information Cadre has the duty to popularize the Land Reform
Laws and other information pertaining to the implementation of the Land-
to-the-Tiller Program.
e. After receiving land titles, the Village Chief, the Village Agriculture and
Land Reform Commissioner, and the Village Land Registrar present these
titles to the farmers who are new land-owners.
The Province Chief is responsible for the implementation of the Land-to-the-
Tiller Program in the Province to achieve all set forth objectives:
a. The Province Chief instructs all District Chiefs to follow up and provide
security support for operations to be performed in their own Districts.
District Chiefs are responsible to the Province Chief for the implementa-
tion of the Land-to-the-Tiller Program in their own Districts.
b. With the assistance of the Province Land Affairs Service, the Province
Chief drafts and promulgates an execution plan for the Land-to-the-Tiller
Program for his Province in which goals for each village must be clearly
fixed for easy follow-up, control, and supervision.
c. The Province Land Affairs Service provides documents and technical
guidance and continuously supervises the Village Land Distribution Com-
mittees.
III-A-4
Approved ~a~~1l~~'1OCIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200INCUISSITIEff OR001100010001-4
d. The Province Information Service conducts its information programs to
encourage farmers to submit applications for land and help them clearly
understand all essential details pertaining to policy, procedures, and
benefits of the Land-to-the-Tiller Program. The Province Land Affairs
Service estimates requirements for the information and publicity of the
Land-to-the-Tiller Program and reports these to the Province Chief and
the Province People's Information Committee.
e. A Province Control Committee is formed in each province to control all
documents for investigation of land ownership established by Village Land
Distribution Committees.
f. Province authorities must follow up until land titles are handed over to
farmers within 14 days after receipt from Saigon. Land titles must actu-
ally be handed over to farmers before they can count toward attainment of
the listed goals.
The Province Chief continuously monitors the execution of the Land-to-the-
Tiller Program to insure that it is properly implemented in accordance
with current guidelines and regulations, as well as to prevent local author-
ities from creating problems with the people.
h. The Province Chief must expeditiously settle all disputes and conflicts
which may cause disorder, or adversely affect the implementation of the
Land Reform Program, and report such events to the Central Pacification
and Development Council (Coordinating Center) and the Ministry of Land
Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development.
a. The Military Region Commander monitors all Land Reform operations in
his Military Region, studies and solves all problems which impede the
distribution of land to farmers.
b. The Military Region Commander controls and supervises province
authorities in order to expedite the implementation of the Land Reform
Program.
c. The Military Region Commander helps the Province People's Information
Committees in expediting the propaganda and publicity for the Land Reform
Program.
a. The Ministry of Interior instructs all Province Chiefs to assume respon-
sibility for the implementation of the Land Reform Programs in their
province.
b. The Ministry of Information coordinates with the Ministry of Land Reform
and Agriculture and Fishery Development to stimulate publicity of the Land
Reform Program as part of People's Information.
III-A-5
Approved For Release 2004ARC LASSIFFIEOOROOI 100010001-4
 Approved FU N?CrAIyTE IA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
c. When requested, the Ministry of Rural Development supports the Ministry
of Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development with a required
number of RD Cadre in order to reinforce the number of Land Registrars
and Team Leaders in all villages throughout the country.
d. The National Training Center, Vung Tau, coordinates with the Director
General of Land Affairs to retrain, if necessary, all cadre and village and
hamlet officials responsible for implementation of the Land-to-the-Tiller
Program. A supplementary training course for 1, 000 Village/Hamlet
Officials and Cadre concerned will be organized by March 1971.
C. The Ministry for Development of Ethnic Minorities supports the
Ministry of Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development with
the required number of Son Thon RD Cadre necessary for the identification
of Montagnard lands.
These detached Son Thon RD Cadre must be given supplementary training
in order that they have the minimum knowledge of the purpose and opera-
tional policy of the program of land identification for the Montagnard
People. The cadre can effectively support the local land agencies in the
popularization of the program among the Montagnards, and thereby avoid
unfortunate misunderstanding which could slow implementation.
f. The Ministry of Defense coordinates with the Ministry of Land Reform and
Agriculture and Fishery Development to do the following
Solve problems connected with personnel requirements and special
cadre needed to be detached to the Land-to-the-Tiller Program.
(Z) Meet requirements for aerial photography and conduct special air
sorties to take supplementary aerial photographs of areas where
Land Reform is slated but no photos exist.
(3) Make an agreement on the utilization of aerial photographs and provide
military maps needed for Land Reform operations.
(4) Instruct the Geodetic Directorate to provide aerial photographs for the
Director General of Land Affairs when requested.
(5) Instruct the General Office of Political Warfare to conduct training
and publicity of the Land Reform Program among RVNAF units.
The Ministry of Economy and the Ministry of Finance coordinate with, and
support, the Ministry of Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Develop-
ment to execute procedures for compensation of land-owners whose land
was expropriated,to include procedures for utilization of treasury bonds
for investment in industry.
C_._ Coordination. The close coordination between the Ministry of Interior, Ministry
of Information, Ministry of Defense, Ministry of Economy, Ministry of Finance,
Ministry of Rural Development, and Ministry for Development of Ethnic Minorities
that will be required for the implementation of the Land-to-the-Tiller Program is
discussed in the paragraph on Tasking.
III-A-6
fApproved DNgA 4I DCIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 S
Approved For Release UICUSSIff
D. Planning and Reports.
1. Planning. The Plan for the execution of the Land-to-the-Tiller Program
throughout the country was made and published by the Ministry of Land Reform
and Agriculture and Fishery Development on 26 June 1970.
All Provinces will make their own plans based on the general plan of Central
authorities and the goals to be achieved in their own area: Province Plans
will indicate the volume of work to be executed in each village.
2. Reports.
a. Every 15 days, all Province Administrative Headquarters will report by
radio message to the Central Pacification and Development Council
(Coordinating Center) and the Ministry of Land Reform and Agriculture
and Fishery Development the hectares of each type of land which were
distributed to farmers (land expropriated based on the Land-to- the -Tiller
Law, land in resettlement camps and land development Centers, land
squatted for cultivation, and Montagnard people's land), the number of
farmers who received land, and the number of land titles which were
issued to new land-owners.
b. Every month, all Province Administrative Headquarters report to CPDC/
CC and the Ministry of Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Develop-
ment all details of the operational progress during the month together
with the percentage of achievements compared with set forth objectives,
and all difficulties and recommendations.
IV. GOALS. Attached hereto is the table of goals for the 1971 National Land Reform
Program, broken down to each MR and Province.
III-A-7
Approved For Release 2004UCLMFt[DOR001100010001-4
 O .~
y,O
is
(n
a I
Approved For F [01
I
1
S-I
.N
(1) m
b-0
0
p a
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
00 to t.() Ifl to
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O
m 0 0 0
N O O O
m O
0 00 0 00 0 0 00o0 0
0 0 0 0 0
to M 0 1n In
- M N .-i
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o O O
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o0Loco ullnlfOo
o W d - .D tt d' ?-i
OA UI w
p y Id 0 0 0 0 0 0 In 0 0 0 0 0 'n 0 to .D If) O O
Sri In N Lf) 'r M In 'D -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O 0 O O
00 M In rM
~.~ cd O O
W i-1 m
~.
O
y
H
N N 1
4 y ,
N ,
Id
N 'ti 1
11) ~y
O 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 O O O 0 O 0 0 0
to 0 .-~ to .-i In ul
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O O O O O O
m + In 00 to O
U
O O Id u
d 0 Id
,=~ cd xi .0 O N Q
AE~a~ m QHCa~+~ 0
,ld-~ co
.~i .-4 cd Id d O
aaa~aQQxxazaaaa
III-A-8
Approved For FUND LASSIf :F iDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200410410u NctASlFI[B
AISIffto
O O O O O O N O 0 0 0 0 00 O
O O O O cr 0 O to
M O O O 0 t!1 t-
O 0 0 0 0 0 C. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O 00 00
N to O N
y to
N +~
bA 0 0 Ln Ln 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O
O
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O CO O 0 000
O - O Lo to Ln LO
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
00000000000 0 0 0 0
'r000CD 000Ln in0 o0uno
In f1 - - i 4 d' tIl O to N W Ln Ln }+ CO
t M M n N N M ~ M M
rd
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O
O
O
b
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cd
y x O
O
C.
fd cd
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O
0 O 0 00 0
CO N -+ Ln O 0
O O O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 O 00 O C. Cn M
00 O\ ti CO CO 0 .-~ CO
ca
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O
O O 0 0
00 O Q, O
N in
0
P U
bD - bOA by b0 b0 bA S;
~j ;j
cd O 0 c o
bD U H O cd O O q .a,
E, 0 xI: E-' A o xaH oaa 0
A Z M b0 0 0 0 Z bb U
N O cd M cd N N N N O '0
mPqPaoa0xaaaaH ~~mPquL) xxxwt~>>
H
III-A-9
Approved For Release 2004/04/0U NC&ASSIIFRkDl100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2IJfCt AWED 1720R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
ANNEX III: LOCAL SELF- DEVELOPMENT
Appendix B: Agriculture and Fishery
I. GENERAL.
A. General Situation.
Results of the 1970 Pacification and Development Plan indicate that good success has
been achieved in the field of Agriculture and Fisheries, especially in the extension of
miracle rice cultivation and the deep-sea fishing research program. Additionally,
the local people have clearly understood the real utility of the Self Development Pro-
gram and are giving more and more labor and financial contributions to the Program.
In 1971, the local development of agriculture and fisheries must be accelerated with
more effort to increase production so as to meet food consumption needs, to export
agricultural products, and at the same time improve the farmers standard of living.
In order to achieve the above mentioned objectives, the Ministry of Land Reform and
Agriculture and Fishery Development will expedite crop diversification, crop rotation
and modernization of agriculture.
All Local Agriculture Agencies are responsible for providing technical guidance and
assistance to the farmers in the implementation of the program.
The Central Agriculture Agencies should coordinate with all Province Pacification and
Development Councils to initiate and supervise program implementation, solve problems
in a timely way, and carry out recommendations presented by the local areas.
Parallel with the provision of technical guidance, research and training operations also
need to be expedited by the agencies concerned.
- A National Crop Experiment Center will be established to study the improvement of
seeds or new species of seeds more suitable for our country, in order to increase pro-
duction and obtain continuous successes. An amount of 100, 000 piasters will be utilized
for Long Dinh station development.
A National Animal Husbandry Training Center will be established at Thu Duc for the
following purposes:
- Support and assist private animal husbandry breeders on feed for domestic animals.
(Demonstrate methods of preparation of feeds, explain the formula for preparation and
analyze these feeds for the benefit of breeders. )
III-B-1
Approved For Release 20SULAS vII Ipf ~'20R001100010001-4
 Approved For Ot (SIIgiIED-RDP8OR01720R001100010001-4
Tasks of the Ministry of Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery Development have
been planned for 1971 as follows:
- Develop corn and sorghum growing programs to promote crop diversification and
supply essential cereals for animal husbandry requirements.
- Review the curfew situation and limit geographical restrictions so that fishermen
can do their job with more freedom of movement.
- Establish a National Crop Experiment Center to further practical research opera-
tions.
- Establish a National Animal Husbandry Training Center in order to support and assist
private animal husbandry.
- Increase the number of fishing boats, encourage private individuals to establish
refrigeration facilities, and enlarge fish breeding ponds.
A. In order to aid the production projects to attain good results, agencies concerned
should,in addition to technical guidance, create favorable conditions for large numbers
of farmers and fishermen to participate in the program.
Designated farmers cultivating miracle rice may be loaned seeds, and provided with
credits for the purchase of insecticide and fertilizer; seeds and loaned funds will be
paid back to the loaning agency after harvest.
- In order to develop animal husbandry, farmers will be taught improved breeding
methods as well as vaccination procedures and the use of veterinary medicine for
the protection of domestic animals.
- To develop the ocean fishing industry, fishing zones must be extended and river
mouths be dredged to facilitate navigation of fishing boats. Fish should be stored in
refrigeration facilities to prevent spoilage.
B. As production is increased, a search for consumer's markets and stabilization of the
prices of farm produce must be accomplished. The results of the 1970 Sorghum Pro-
gram have proved unsatisfactory because of a lack of a consumer's market for this
farm produce.
C. To attract the maximum number of people to participate in projects, the program
must be widely disseminated and publicized to the villages and hamlets.
D. In the implementation of projects, there should be close coordination between the
agencies concerned at the Central as well as the local level. Supervision and control
by responsible authorities are necessary in order to solve difficulties on a timely basis.
III-B-2
Approved For FOUPICSlFDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2011CLAS3fo720R001100010001-4
III. EXECUTION.
A. Basic standard.
1. Production projects will be implemented under the form of "Productive Credits"
through the Agriculture and Development Bank.
Regarding miracle rice, designated farmers growing rice can be loaned rice
seeds or cash to purchase fertillizer and insecticide. They must pay back rice
seed and cash after harvesting.
2. To encourage production and insure a consumer's market, a Market Committee
will be formed to systematize the cereal market. This Committee will be man-
aged by private persons and assisted by the Government.
3. As for animal raising, the main operation is to protect domestic animals. Four
mobile vaccination training teams will go to all Military Regions for training cadre
and farmers in inoculation methods as well as methods for storing vaccine.
Veterinary medicines will be provided to Provincial Agriculture Services for
special use in newly pacified hamlets when serious disease outbreaks occur.
4. Regarding ocean fisheries, fishery companies will be oriented in procedures
for borrowing funds from the Asian Development Bankinorder to purchase foreign-
made fishing boats with tonnages varying from 100 to 300 tons.
5. Five areas will be loaned funds to establish refrigeration rooms and purchase ice-
producing machines: Danang, Nha Trang, Saigon, Qui Nhon and Pleiku. The
money loaned will be gradually repaid by collections made each time the fisher-
man uses the refrigeration rooms.
In addition, the dredging of river mouths must be expedited to facilitate the move-
ment of fishing boats. It is necessary to recommend to the Ministry of Defense
that the extent of restricted areas and curfew times be reduced to permit fisher-
men to expand their activites.
6. Regarding irrigation, procedures should be established for rapid consideration
of technical dossiers and bidding so that operations can be started and completed
early in Central Vietnam prior to the typhoon and flood season.
1. Miracle Rice
a. Nationally
- Prepare a program for growing 750, 000 hectares of miracle rice and
make the following available:
Rice Seed - A Fund for rice seed will be established to loan funds to
Province Agriculture Services for purchase of rice seeds, particularly
IR-20 seeds, for distribution to farmers as loans.
III-B-3
Approved For Release 200UNUA WO 20R001100010001-4
 ApproftU l Y1 /01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
Fertilizer and insecticide should be adequately and regularly distributed
to the provinces prior to crop seasons.
- Credit. All qualified farmers taking part in miracle rice program
can easily borrow money from the Agricultural Development Bank for
production of rice.
- Organize seminars in the MRs to examine strong and weak points of the
recent harvest, and at the same expedite preparation for the next crop.
- Popularize the program to increase miracle rice production.
- Monitor and supervise the program locally.
- Provide technical training for Province personnel and cadre.
b. Locally.
- Popularize the cultivation of miracle rice at districts and villages.
- Plant 505, 800 hectares of miracle rice in the first crop season.
- Plant 244, 200 hectares of miracle rice in the second crop season.
- Collect, purchase and distribute an adequate quantity of good rice seeds
to farmers, especially IR 20 seed.
- Monitor distribution of fertilizer and insecticide to provinces, districts
and villages.
- Coordinate with the Agricultural Development Bank's branches to es-
tablish procedures for loaning money to farmers.
- Provide technical training for district cadre and farmers.
- Assist farmers to take care of rice fields and to protect corps.
- Survey land area and corresponding yields on miracle rice varieties.
- Seek a consumer's market for miracle rice.
Sorghum and Corn
a. Nationally.
A committee for the production and development of cereal grains, with the
Director of Agriculture as Committee Chairman, is responsible for for-
mulating a production program and plan for 17, 500 hectares of sorghum and
2, 000 hectares of corn.
III-B-4
ApprovE N1LASESIF1F4Dl : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20INCLASNIFF 20R001100010001-4
specialist to be in charge of the production program at Province level with
the following tasks:
- Initiate and popularize the program.
- Assist farmers to obtain seeds.
- Orient the people in the procedures of borrowing money from the Agri-
cultural Development Bank.
- Provide guidance in agricultural techniques.
Scheduled program
- Regarding sorghum, there are 17, 500 hectares divided as follows:
MR 2 : 6, 500 hectares
MR 3 : 7, 500 hectares
MR 4 : 3, 500 hectares
Concerning corn, there are 2, 000 hectares.
MR 3 500 hectares
MR 4 : 1, 500 hectares
3. Animal Husbandry
a. Training and seminars.
With the participation of the Chiefs of Veterinary, Animal Husbandry and
Agricultural Development Branches,seminars must be organized in order to
explain the 1971 pacification and development policy, with emphasis on the
need for positive and strong support of the Village Self-Development Pro-
gram. Frequently perform preventive inoculation for domestic animals
in newly pacified hamlets. Chiefs of all branches are also enjoined to
provide guidance to the farmers in the application of modern animal hus-
bandry techniques so they may increase family revenues.
The Animal Husbandry Development Service will give guidance to the paci-
fied hamlets on obtaining the best species of domestic animal breeds in
order to gradually improve poor strains. Five additional insemination
units will be established with the purpose of improving animal breeds. (It
is planned that 12 insemination units will inseminate a total of 7, 500 sows.
The Directorate will provide the Province Agriculture Services with veteri-
nary medicines for special use in case of serious disease outbreaks at
III-B-5 I
Approved For Release 2004IUNCLA iFRDE&R001100010001-4
 Approve TKUS /U : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
pacified hamlets in order to be ready to treat the diseased animals. Four
mobile vaccination training teams will go to the four Military Regions to
train cadre and farmers on vaccination methods and methods for preservation
of vaccines. These trained persons will then go back to their hamlets and
villages to be responsible to apply preventive measures for the protection of
domestic animals against epidemic diseases.
Forty, one-week training courses are scheduled to be organized with 30
students in each course; each graduated student will be provided with one
set of training aids including a thermos bottle, syringe, and needle.
In order to protect domestic animals throughout the country, the National
Institute of Bacteriology and Animal Pathology will produce vaccines against
some of the communicable diseases of water buffalo, cattle, hogs and
poultry. The Animal Protection Service will distribute vaccines to regional
and provincial vaccine banks so that they may rapidly support newly pacified
hamlets.
e. Veterinary and animal raising branch of the Province Agriculture Services.
This branch is responsible for organizing frequent meetings to explain the
program, and for training of pacification and development cadre on the
storage of vaccines, on techniques of inoculation, and on methods of raising
domestic animals. Additionally, the branch must control training aids distri-
buted to the cadre and monitor and expedite the appropriate use of medicine
by cadre in order to obtain maximum results in the treatment of domestic
animals in the pacified hamlets.
a. Objectives. The National Livestock Training Center will be established with
the following objectives:
- Provide technical assistance to the private animal industry in two ways:
by preparing formulas and analyzing animal feed for the benefit of breed-
ers and the livestock feed industry.
b. Location. The National Livestock Training Center will be established at
Thu Due, on a 16-hectare area of the National Agriculture Center within 500
meters of the Bien Hoa Highway.
c. Installations. This Center will include the following sections:
- Poultry section (incubation room)
- Small animal section
- Animal feed mill
III-13-6
ApproveUNA, r~ IAS391f/D : CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
 Approved For Release 200 tUnimb20R001100010001-4
- Nutrition laboratory
- Swine section (artificial insemination room)
- Training school for veterinary, animal husbandry cadre and livestock
producers.
d. Approximately VN$150, 000, 000 will be available as supporting funds. Most
machinery and operational facilities will be transferred from the Tan Son
Nhut Livestock Center. In addition, commodities for equipping the station
will be supported by USAID.
a. Extension of fish and shrimp breeding. It is important to construct inland
fish ponds as a source of protein which is necessary for nutrition, through
the following measures-
- Encouraging and guiding fishermen to rebuild fish ponds with brick walls
and dig new fish ponds.
- Use mechanized means to dig fish ponds in abandoned areas. Tuyen Duc
Province has dug 480, 000 square meters of fish ponds mechanically.
- Encourage the draining of brackish watered areas and transform them into
fish ponds.
- Fish hatcheries will provide breeding stock and speedy growing fingerlings
for issue or sale at low prices to fishermen. Examples are trench, carp
and "Chain" fish and as well as other species of fish living in brackish
water such as telapia, "Mang" and "Doi" fish.
- Train fishermen in methods of fish breeding, raising fish, and techniques
for establishment of fish ponds.
b. Increase the number of fishing boats.
The sea fishery development program will be carried out as follows:
- Guide and support fishermen.
- Guide fishermen in procedures for borrowing funds from the Asia Develop-
ment Bank and the Agricultural Development Bank to purchase fishing boats
and instruments.
- Encourage and guide the construction and purchase-of wooden or ferro-
cement fishing boats between 30 and 70 tons for ocean use.
- Help fishermen to mechanize 7, 700 fishing boats and equip them with 500
fish sonars and 1, 000 compasses.
- In 1971, help fishery companies purchase 14 foreign-made fishing ships
from 100 to 300 tons.
~~II III-B-7
Approved For Release 2001 1NC&SSJ1OftD2OROOl 10001 0001-4
 AuffE i 4/04/01: CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
In addition, American and Japanese Companies have promised to cooperate
and sell 9 fishing and shrimping boats to Vietnamese fishery companies.
c. It is also necessary to train fishermen in the use of fishing gear and in
modern fishing techniques in order to increase production.
Train and form fishery specialists and cadre. It is scheduled to organize
a training program for 50 fishery specialists and 300 cadre. These spec-
ialists and cadre will directly train fishermen.
- Training fishermen in:
Modern techniques of net fishing for catching fish and shrimp.
Use of different kinds of nets, shrimp nets, light nets, turning nets, etc.
Use of fish sonars and compasses.
Use and maintenance of marine engines.
d. Co].d storage installations.
The fish catch has been increasing in the coastal areas while in other areas
it has been insufficient. The problem of fish distribution must be solved. As
fish is a very perishable commodity, the installation of refrigeration faci-
lities is very important.
In L971, 5 localities will be granted loans to establish cold storage rooms
and ice making machines.
Da Nang
100 tons
70 tons/ day
Nha Trang
100 "
70 "
/ day
Saigon
100 "
70
/day
Qui Nhon
70 "
50
/day
Pleiku
40
20 "
/day
The loans used to construct cold storage facilities will be recovered gradu-
ally from rent of the facilities to the fishermen.
Most of the river estuaries at fishing centers have become very shallow due
to accumulated silt, particularly in the provinces of Central Vietnam, thus
making passage difficult and resulting in a loss of time to the fishermen
because they have to wait for the high tide to enter and leave the port. In
1971, Phan Thiet Harbor will be dredged using a fund of VN$13, 000, 000
and following that, Ninh Thuan Harbor. In the future, dredging is planned
for Ham Tan, Ben Da, Xom Bong, and Quang Ngai Harbors.
III-B-8
Ap [cASS4f ft: CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20INCUSIQ 9AM
D720R001100010001-4
f. Reduce the extent of restricted areas and curfews. Province Fishery Services
are requested to send recommendations to the Directorate about the reduc-
tion of restricted areas and curfews to permit fishermen to extend their
activities. The Directorate will forward recommendations to the Ministry
of Defense on this matter if the local security situation is satisfactory.
The implementation of the Agriculture and Fisheries Development Programs requires
coordination among the following Ministries:
- Ministry of Economy in the importation of means of production and the marketing of
agriculture and fishery produce.
- Ministry of Information. In the publicizing of the program and encouragement of the
people to implement the program.
- Ministry of Defense. In the detachment of agriculture specialists, review of the
curfew situation, and reduction of restricted areas to permit fishermen to extend
their activities.
- Ministry of Rural Development. In the implementation of Village Self-Development
Programs.
- Ministry for the Development of Ethnic Minorities. In the implementation of pro-
grams in provinces having ethnic minority people.
1. Planning. Unlike previous years and in order to meet local needs, the projects
will be locally recommended and reviewed by Central Authorities for approval
based on the Government Budget capabilities.
Province Agriculture Agencies report operational results, difficulties, and
recommendations to the Province Pacification and Development Councils conderned
and the Central Agriculture Agencies.
Attached hereto are 1971 goals of the miracle rice and sorghum programs. Goals of other
programs will be established after consideration of local projects presently under way by
Central Pacification and Development Council/ Coordinating Center.
III-B-9
Approved For Release 200u1GLASI20R001100010001-4
 Approv[fRt[eAS1f?/1 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
Nationally 17, 500 hectares
Distribution to MRs:
MR 2 6,500 MR 3 7,500 MR 4 3,500
Province levels
- MR 2
Quang Ngai (MR 1) 1,000
Binh Dinh 1,000
"
Khanh Hoa 1,000 It
Ninh Thuan 1,000
"
Darlac 1,000
"
Pleiku 1,500
"
-MR.3
Bien Hoa 2,000
Long Khanh 1,500
Phuoc Tuy 1, 000
Binh Duong 1,000
Binh Long 1,500
Tay Ninh 500
-MR4
Sa Dec 500
Chau Doc 1,500
Kien Giang 500
An Giang 1,000
III-B- 10
ApprovIJN&eA8SJfIi(4Ji : CIA-RDP8OROI 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/uNRAM ER R001100010001-4
Areas for cultivation
of varieties
Order
MR and Province
Miracle Rice
Remarks
Crop Season
Crop Season
1/1971
2/1971
Total
MR 1
37, 000 ha
20, 000 ha
57, 000 ha
1
Quang Tri
3,500
1,500
5,000
2.
Thua Thien
5, 000
Z'000
7, 000
3
Quang Nam
7,000
3, 000
10, 000
4
Quang Tin
1,500
3, 500
5,000
5
Quang Ngai
Z0,000
10,000
30,000
MR 2
57, 200 ha
34, 700 ha
91, 900 ha
6
Binh Dinh
25, 000
10, 000
35, 000
7
Phu Bon
800
800
8
Phu Yen
12, 000
8,000
20, 000
9
Khanh Hoa
8,000
7,000
15,000
10
Ninh Thuan
5, 000
3,000
8,000
11
Binh Thuan
2, 000
6, 000
8, 000
12
Lam Dong
500
500
13
Tuyen Duc
500
500
14
Quang Duc
300
200
500
15
Darlac
700
300
1,000
16
Pleiku
1,000
1,000
17
Kontum
1,000
1,000
18
Cam Ranh
400
200
600
MR 3
111, 600 ha
31, 500 ha
143,100 ha
19
Bien Hoa
15,000
5,000
20, 000
20
Long An
50, 000
10, 000
60, 000
21
Binh Duong
4, 000
3, 000
7, 000
22
Binh Tuy
2,500
1,500
4,000
23
Gia Dinh
15, 000
5, 000
20, 000
III-B-11
Approved For Release 2004/RKCLA JF .RO01100010001-4
 ApprovedN
IDLIS flifIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
IIN I I
Hau Nghia
6,
000
1,
000
7, 000
Long Khanh
3,
500
1,
000
4,500
Phuoc Tuy
3,
550
3,550
Tay Ninh
10,
000
15, 000
Phuoc Long
1,
000
1, 000
Binh Long
1,
000
1, 000
Vung Tau
50
50
300,
000 ha
158,
000 ha
458, 000 ha
31
Dinh Tuong
25,
000
35,
000
60, 000
32
Kien Hoa
40,
000
15,
000
55, 000
33
Go Cong
15,
000
5,
000
20, 000
34
Vinh Binh
20,
000
20, 000
35
Vinh Long
35,
000
15,
000
50, 000
36
Sadec
12,
000
8,
000
20, 000
37
An Giang
25,
000
20,
000
45, 000
38
An Xuyen
15,
000
15, 000
39
Ba Xuyen
20,
000
15,
000
35, 000
40
Chuong Thien
8,
000
4,
000
12, 000
41
Bac Lieu
20,
000
20, 000
42
Phong Dinh
35,
000
20,
000
55, 000
43
Kien Phong
6,
000
4,
000
10, 000
44
Kien Giang
15,
000
10,
000
25, 000
45
Kien Tuong
5,
000
3,
000
8, 000
46
Chau Doc
4,
000
4,
000
8, 000
505,
800 ha
244,
200 ha
750, 000 ha
Remarks: The above mentioned areas are estimates which will be confirmed during
seminars with Province Agriculture Services in MRs.
III-B-12
Approved FU NGI ASS1 f4EDIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20UNCUSSI D720R001100010001-4
Appendix C: Local Economic Development
I. GENERAL.
A. Situation.
The Vietnamese economy has encountered many difficulties since 1965. As day-to-day
expenditures from the National Budget have increased, especially expenditures for
national defense, our budget always shows a deficit. There is an unfavorable balance
of trade because yearly imports total 700 million dollars while exports are between
fifteen and twenty million dollars. This situation is due primarily because the war
has absorbed most of the manpower and skills and reduced production. The rural
areas are the most affected.
In past years, Government efforts focused on restoring security to the villages and
hamlets and resettling refugees in order to gradually re-establish a basis for develop-
ment in the rural areas. Thanks to the pacification plan, security has been restored
over nearly all our territory. Consequently, and parallel with results of the pacifica-
tion program, efforts in 1971 must emphasize the importance of increasing production
and improving rural living conditions.
In this economic situation, the Ministry of Economy advocates a local community de-
velopment process as follows:
1. Stabilize local costs of living.
2. Expedite increase of local residents' incomes.
3. Carry out a reasonable rice policy.
4. Grant specific support to an industrial Development Program relative to agricul-
ture and fishery industry.
5. Actively support the ministries and related agencies in local development.
II. CONCEPT.
A sound economy can be envisaged only when it has the capability to serve the people and
restore a high level of income to the majority and insure a prosperous life. Most of
the Vietnamese people presently live by agriculture. Prior to the war, agricultural yields
not only met home requirements but actually provided a surplus available for export. Due
to the present state of war, production has fallen, forcing us to import rice to satisfy needs.
Our essential task in 1971 is to guide the majority who live by agriculture in such a way to
restore their faith and vitality by encouraging local development in order to create a pros-
perous and beautiful life.
III- C - 1
Approved For Release 200UNC=IIFI12OR001100010001-4
 Approved For R ct0iS1F' DP80RO1720R001100010001-4
In order to accomplish the above mission, the Ministry of Economy must undertake
the following essential items:
1. Stablization of the Local Cost of Living. Endeavor to regulate market supply and
demand. Special emphasis must be placed on the distribution and storage of sta-
ples. Thus, it is necessary to accomplish the following:
Reinforce the system of secure warehouses. The Ministry of Economy has
expedited the establishment of several warehouses in the provinces. Every
province will have to provide a warehouse on a self-help basis for the storage
of a. one-month emergency stock of such staples as sugar, milk, and flour.
The Ministry of Economy has instructed the regional directorates of economic
inspection to check the provincial warehouses during the first quarter in order
to establish secure warehouses.
Encourage private entrepreneurs to establish supermarkets in the provinces
Every province must have a minimum of one supermarket. The General Sup-
ply Office will provide technical operational guidance as well as issue items
for consumption.
Encourage the people to participate in consumers' cooperatives so as to elimi-
nate the middlemen as much as possible.
Simplify local price controls and economic control measures in order to pro-
gress to a free economy.
2. Increase Personal Incomes for the Local People. Encourage and assist farmers
and fishermen to increase production by reserving priority for them and, if neces-
sary, importing tractors, water pumps, fertilizers, insecticides, and marine en-
gines.
During 1971, the Ministry of Economy has provided foreign currency totaling some
US$ 25,000,000 for the importation of agriculture and fishing equipment, as follows:
Other types of equipment : US$ 13,000,000
Encourage and assist animal husbandry and cultivation by reserving priorities for
the importation of good breeds of pigs and chickens and strains of seeds. The
amount of foreign currency provided will be in accordance with the requirements
of importers.
Encourage the various branches of local light handicraft industries by providing
technical guidance and granting priority for the importation of machinery, equip-
ment, and raw materials.
Improvement of the system for transporting materials will require the importation
of various types of utility vehicles or small trucks in order that the farmers may
III-C-2
Approved For FUNLL IFIMDP80RO1720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release MCLOWO 20R001100010001-4
3. Implement an appropriate rice policy. In order to encourage the farmers to in-
crease production and raise their standard of living and use domestic rice, the
Ministry of Economy will apply the following measures:
a. Guarantee the price of rice at a fixed rate.
b. Buy, without restriction, domestic rice at the guaranteed price.
c. Grant permission for the free transport of rice.
d. Encourage businessmen to transport rice to Central Vietnam by furnishing
them the cost of transportation.
e. Coordinate with the Ministry of Land Reform to use the farmers' associations
and cooperatives as vehicles for the purchase of rice.
Through these measures, proper use and distribution can be made of the 1.8 mil-
lion tons of surplus rice produced in MR 4 during 1971.
4. Establish a fertilizer plant valued at about US$ 60,000,000. Moreover, additional
fishing boats will be purchased for the development of fishing industries. The
amount of foreign currency reserved for this will be according to requirements.
5. Regarding projects related to other ministries, the Ministry of Economy may re-
view support necessary.
The Ministry of Economy, based on that part of the National policy under its pur-
view, will coordinate closely with related ministries in order to implement the
local development program as follows:
The Directorate of Foreign Commerce and the Directorate of Commercial Sup-
port are responsible for import procedures, and establishing the priorities
for fishing and farming industries, as well as animal husbandry projects.
The Center for Economic and Industrial Development assists in establishing
industrial projects. It also provides investment guidance and assists in cre-
dit matters.
The Center for the Development of Light Industry and the Center for the De-
lopment of Exports will provide technical guidance for small businessmen in
order to increase production and improve industry. They will assist in the
introduction of handicraft products to the international market and may also
assist with credit.
Regional Directorates of Economic Inspection will publicize economic policy and
execute such missions as are assigned them by the Ministry of Economy.
I' III-C-3
Approved For Release 20041'0 ~MfOLEW112OR001100010001-4
 Approve01raIxOrtto : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
Related province technical services will coordinate with local governments
and with the Directorate of Economic Inspection in order to directly implement
policy, establish control, and report results.
The Ministry of Economy will endeavor to effect regular coordination with other
ministries and agencies, especially with the Ministry of Land Reform and Agricul-
ture and Fishery Development, in the implementation of common policies and duties
involving the Ministry of Economy. This is especially true in the matter of support-
ing local development projects.
In local areas, coordination must take place similar to that described in the section
on tasking between the Central Government and local areas.
Monthly, the Directorate of Economic Inspection will summarize local require-
ments for staples, machinery, and other equipment used in agriculture and fishing
and report to the Ministry for response.
Moreover, local meetings must be regularly organized between representatives of
the ministries and the local government in order to rapidly solve all economic pro-
blems.
III -C -4
Approve1 0119 /lED : CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
 Approved For Release 200 J LASIM v20R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
Appendix D: War Veterans.
I. GENERAL.
A. General Situation:
The Ministry of War Veterans is concerned with the following:
War Veterans, 216, 000 as of 21 November 1970.
Disabled soldiers, 43,002.
Parents of servicemen killed, 33, 743.
War widows, 71, 005
War orphans, 284, 020 (of which 128, 392 are wards of the Nation).
Law 08/70 promulgated on 9 July 1970 specified the privileges reserved for the above
elements in allowances, job opportunities, health, social welfare, and education.
The Ministry of War Veterans needs support from Ministries and especially from
local administrative Agencies (Provinces and Cities) to actively help normalize
the lives of war veterans, disabled soldiers, and the families of war dead in the
national and social community.
B. Mission.
The Ministry of War Veterans' duties include the following:
Expeditiously pay the various retirement pensions and allowances; provide physical and
social rehabilitation for invalids (including war victims); give medical care to all
elements (free consultation and treatment in public, military, and civilian hospitals);
provide them with vocational orientation and training; seek and provide them with
employment; provide general and technical education to war orphans and wards of the
nation, and adult education to war veterans and disabled soldiers; and provide housing
or construction material to disabled soldiers.
The Government must prepare a program designed to help and support those people who
have devoted themselves to the Nation, especially those who have been wounded or died
in the national cause. War orphans and war widows must be given proper care (health,
social welfare, education, and job opportunities).
Coordination among Ministries concerned must be improved so that future support to war
veteran programs will be adequate and practical. War veterans must be given assistance
and treated well. Attention must be paid to meeting war veterans' requirements and to
III-D- 1
Approved For Release 20JNCtAlS-8LIfl[fl720R001100010001-4
 Approved Fo ASIF1 E-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
providing solutions to retirement pension and other types of allowance problems.
Therefore, special housing objectives must be set up for disabled soldiers and expeditious
payment be made for various types of allowances and retirement pensions (within the maxi-
mum. time limit of 90 days) to disabled soldiers, war widows, war orphans and parents of
soldiers killed. In brief, those articles specified in Law 08/70 promulgated on 9 July 1970,
which determine benefits reserved for disabled soldiers, families of war dead, and war
veterans, must be executed in the shortest time limit.
A. Objective 1. Complete the preparation of implementing documents of Law 08/70, re-
garding retirement pensions, allowances, health, social welfare, educational, voca-
tional training and orientation, recommendation for employment, and job opportunity.
B. Objective 2. Improve the management of the Central and local War Veterans Agencies.
1. Personnel: Recruit 481 additional Cadre for Central Agencies and province
Services.
Organize training courses for newly-recruited personnel (from 1 April 1971
through 1 July 1971)
Organize seminars for province and city cadre regarding procedures to prepare
records, distribute pension books, and pay allowances (from 1 April 1971 through
1 July 1971).
Repair the headquarters of the War Veterans Service, Hue. (From 1 January 1971
through 1 July 1971).
Repair and improve technical facilities for Central and local Agencies (from 1
January 1971 through 31 December 1971).
C. Objective 3. Expedite payment for various types of retirement pensions and allowances.
Following are the retirement pensions and allowance books to be distributed in 1971:
Retirement pensions of various types: 4, 865 books
Disabled soldiers allowances: 13, 220 books
Disabled soldiers` childrens allowances: 16, 713 -do-
War widows allowances: 32, 281 -do-
Parents of War Dead: 5, 846 -do-
Wards of the nation allowances: 13, 862 -do-
Total: P6, 787 books
D. Objective 4: Rehabilitation of invalids.
1. Health restoration (from 1 January 1971 through 31 December 1971)
Approved For RU
I. DP80R01720R001100010001-4
"S oASO w-1 I - KEY&
 Approved For Release 2OVNCL SSMED720R001100010001-4
Build the Saigon Hospital for paralysis cases; establish one surgery and one
laboratory in Qui Nhon and Danang Centers; help establish an orthopedic clinic
for lepers in Qui Nhon; equip the Mental Rehabilitation School; provide 100 addi-
tional beds for the Central hospital and raise the number of beds in each sub-
sidiary hospital to 100; organize classes for the formation of Physiotherapy Assis-
tants and Technicians.
Reconstruct the Hue Convalescent Center for Disabled Soldiers destroyed during
"Tet Mau Than" (1968) (From 1 January 1971 through 1 July 1971); repair Camp
TV/SAC recently turned over by the Ministry of Defense as a Convalescent Cen-
ter, Vung Tau (From 1 January 1971 through 1 July 1971); ameliorate the situation
of some 700 paralysis cases at Vung Tau and other Military Hospitals (from 1
January 1971 through 31 December 1971); and build 43 villages for disabled soldiers
in provinces, composed of 3, 000 housing units at Thu Duc, 400 units at the Pham
The Hien Area, and from 100 to 150 units in province capitals (from 1 January 1971
through 31 December 1971).
E. Objective 5: Vocational guidance and training and creation of employment for disabled
soldiers.
Provide better equipment for Vocational training courses: refrigerators, air-condi-
tioners, radio, T. V. , industrial electricity (from 1 January through 31 December
1971); train instructors for replacement of foreign instructors in Vocational Training
Centers (from 1 January 1971 through 31 December 1971); cooperate with friendly
Agencies (Ministry of Labor), support Agencies, and private enterprises to organize
additional short-term vocational orientation and training classes, (from 1 January
through 31 December 1971); expand activities of the Go Vap Production Center to admit
482 workers from among war veterans of various branches.
Food factory
422 positions
Medal making shop
20
-do-
Carpentry shop
2
-do-
Printing shop
11
-do-
Tailoring shop
20
-do-
Motor maintenance shop
7
- do -
Create production branches for war veterans: farms in Long Khanh, piscicultural
services in Vung Tau, and rice drying factories in Gia Dinh.
F. Objective 6: General and technical education
1. General education:
Complete the construction and equipping of the Can Tho secondary school for
admission of 250 students (from 1 January 1971 through 31 December 1971);
III- D- 3
Approved For Release 20011CUSUMPKEBOR001100010001-4
 Approved Fo [kS1SJ'fl EDRDP8oRol72oRool 100010001-4
complete equipment of Dinh Tuong Secondary School for admission of 150 students;
expand existing Secondary Schools to admit more students.
Saigon Secondary School will receive 800 more students (It has 2, 500 students
in school year 1970-1971). Hue Secondary School will receive 250 more students
(It has 400 students in school year 1970-71). Da Nang Secondary School will
receive 120 more students (It has 300 students is school year 1970-71 ).
2. Technical Education.
Expand the Saigon Technical Secondary School.
The following additional classes will be opened in 1971:
One technical class on car repair; one on carpentry; two on mathematics; two
7th technical grades on domestic economy; and six short-term classes on car
repair, electricity, ironwork, carpentry, drawing, and tailoring. These classes
are expected to receive 500 more students (from 1 April 1971 through 1 October
1971).
Saigon plans to receive 300 additional male students ( there are presently 300
female students).
Hue plans to receive 50 more students (from 1 January 1971 through 1 July 1971).
IV. COORDINATION. (Ministry of War Veterans)
A. Coordinate with the Ministry of Labor and the Ministry of Economy to do the following:
Seek measures for promulgation in statutory documents for drafting and submission to
the Prime Minister regarding priority of employment for disabled soldiers, war
widows, war orphans, and war veterans.
B. Coordinate with the Ministry of Social Welfare and the Ministry of Health to do the
following:
Request for support or ask foreign associations to extend assistance to Convalescent
and Rehabilitation Centers - provide medical support (free treatment and consulta-
tions).
C. Coordinate with the Ministry of Land Reform, Agriculture, and Fisheries Development
to do the following:
Develop farms, animal husbandry, and fishing installations; distribute land for
cultivation to war veterans and disabled soldiers who submit requests.
D. Coordinate with the Ministry of Education to do the following:
Support school for national wards with instructors. Improve their education. Organize
III- D-4
Approved ForNc L JIFI El-RDP80ROl 720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 201INtt. ASNIff20R001100010001-4
adult secondary and elementary classes for war veterans and disabled soldiers.
Grant scholarships to war orphans, and wards of the nation who must attend private
schools; reserve a yearly scholarship percentage for further study abroad.
Nominate officials to assume duties pertaining to war veterans affairs in provinces
having no War Veterans Services.
F. Coordinate with the Ministry of Public Works (Central Housing Department) to design
plans for building invalids' villages and follow up the implementation of projects
being administered by local authorities.
Law 08/70 prescribing benefits for disabled soldiers, families of war dead, and war
veterans is applicable to all agencies. Operational reports relative to war veterans
must be forwarded to the Ministry of War Veterans for regular submission of reports
to the Central Pacification and Development Council. With regard to the progress in
the establishment of Invalid villages, local administration agencies will include comment
in their periodic reports to Pacification and Development Councils.
III-D-5
Approved For Release 20MIN ; #S-&IrfIED72oRoo1 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004UCLA3 30-IFIf DOR001100010001-4
Appendix E: A Brighter Life for War Victims
I. GENERAL.
A. General situation.
In 1970, with successive important victories over the enemy and satisfactory pro-
gress in pacification operations, many Villages and Hamlets, formerly insecure and
under the influence of the Communists, have been gradually won over by the National
Government. Therefore, the number of people who must leave their insecure native
homes and avoid Communist terrorism has been greatly reduced. In addition, a
large number of evacuees (Anti-Communist Refugees) have been resettled at suitable
areas or returned to their native villages or hamlets.
If during 1971, Communist attacks and shellings decrease, the number of evacuees
(Refugees from Communism) and war victims suffering damages of houses and
properties will also be lowered.
Nevertheless, both the Relief Program and the Program of a Brighter Life for War-
Victims should be continued as in the previous years in order to help the following
categories of war victims:
1. Evacuees. (Refugees from Communism)
2. Victims suffering damage to houses or property, or injured or killed in the war.
3. Repatriates from Cambodia.
4. Orphans, widows, and disabled war victims.
Moreover, during 1971, the Provincial P&D councils will also implement a study
of the living conditions of war victims in the permanently resettled areas in
order to improve their life in the province.
C. Following are relief measures:
'l. Regarding people in temporary resettlement camps.
a. Issue allowances for temporary settlement.
b. Issue allowances for resettlement or return to village.
c. Formulate development programs in permanently resettled areas and in
hamlets where people have returned to include the following elements:
III-E-1
Approved For Release 200~~~CIE20R001100010001-4
 Approved For F bRDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
(1) Construct health, sanitation, and education facilities such as first-
aid stations, maternity, wells, latrines, and classrooms.
Organize vocational training courses (tailors, weavers, electrical
workers, mechanics, blacksmiths, carpenters, hat makers, basket
weavers, etc. )
Issue rice seeds, other seeds, seedlings, and agricultural equip-
rnent.
(4) Issue outboard motors, and fishing nets.
(5) Issue breeding pigs, breeding fishes, chickens, and ducks.
(6) Establish Production Cooperatives to make charcoal, bricks, tile,
etc. .
In regard to War Victims who have suffered damage to houses and properties,
are injured or have lost the head of the family due to war.
-c. Issue immediate allowances.
I). Issue allowances for reconstruction.
c. Issue death gratuities or allowances for injuries.
3. Regarding Repatriates from Cambodia.
Issue initial allowances, allowances for temporary settlement, and trans-
portation allowances.
b. Issue allowances for individual resettlement.
Issue allowances for collective resettlement.
4. Regarding Orphans, Widows, and Disabled War-Victims.
c. Issue a monthly quantity of foods from the "Foods for Peace" Program.
b. Allow orphans and widows to attend vocational training courses reserved
for refugees from communism.
c. Provide rehabilitation for disabled people. (Physically and vocationally)
In the fight against the Communists to protect our Freedom, Independence, and Democ-
racy, the war victims should be given priority assistance and relief measures which
should aim at three main objectives as follows:
III-E-2
Approved For FU CLAWFI DRDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004 k U OR001100010001-4
C. Assist them in attaining self-sufficiency.
III. IMPLEMENTATION.
A, Basic criteria.
1. Complete the resettlement or return to village of temporary resettled people
(refugees from communism) who left their native areas in 1970 and previous
years in accordance with the goals specified at TAB 1.
2, Provide timely relief and permanently resettle refugees who have been
temporarily resettled in the event they cannot return to their native Villages
due to the security sitiation.
3. Develop the resettlement centers and return-to-village in order to help war
victims to progress to self-sufficiency.
Provide immediate and adequate relief for war victims suffering damages to
houses and properties, are injured, or have lost the head of the family due to
war. Settle all problems concerning relief dossiers of war victims which
remained unsolved in 1970.
5, Complete the individual resettlement or collective resettlement of repatriates
from Cambodia who returned to their country in 1970, and help them to build
a new life.
6. Complete the census of orphans, widow, and disabled people and take approp-
riate measures to assist them.
The cause of delay in providing relief for all war victims in 1970 has been the
usually slow transmission of plans from Province to the Central government
and slow forwarding of relief dossiers from village to province levels. Moreover,
as the people and Village and Hamlet officials did not thoroughly understand the
relief procedures and regulations, it took much time to review relief dossiers and
return dossiers with irregularities for readjustment. In addition, the shortage
of funds at Central level also caused difficulty in the issue of imprest funds to
localities; and as a result, a number of provinces with a large number of war
victims were not allocated funds in time to provide needed relief, On the other
hand, some Provinces requested the central government to advance them funds
which were considered to be excessive when compared with their requirements, thus
causing an imbalance of funds between provinces at the end of the year, and
slowing relief work,
a. The Ministry of Social Welfare should refer to accurate data in estimating
the requirements of each Province and advance an appropriate fund at the
beginning of the year.
b. The Ministry of Social Welfare should study measures to simplify the
III-E-3
Approved For Release 200 LAS$tI1ftD2OROOl100010001-4
 Approved "al ifIf IA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
procedures for consideration and allocation of funds relating to the Relief
Program for temporarily resettled people (refugees from communism).
c. There should be close coordination between the Central Pacification and
Development Council Coordinating Center, Ministry of Social Welfare, and
other Ministries and friendly Agencies concerned in order to expeditiously
settle important cases submitted by localities.
d. Ministries supporting the Program of "A Brigher Life for War Victims"
should issue necessary instructions to their subordinate local agencies for
execution.
a. MR and Province Pacification and Development Councils should strictly
,,xecute the provisions of Circular 1166, Prime Minister's office, 18 April
1.970, and Circular 5407, MOSW, 31 July 1970, for the solution of all cases
concerning temporarily resettled persons (refugees from communism).
b. Province Pacification and Development Councils must strictly execute the
provisions of Circular 1294, 13 August 1969, which is amended by Circular
1389, 18 September 1969, Prime Minister's Office, regarding the planning
for resettlement and return-to-village of war victims.
c. Provinces must hold seminars to disseminate information on relief policy
regulations and procedures for refugees, war victims, repatriates from
Cambodia, orphans, widows, and disabled people, to Village and Hamlet
officials (especially to the Culture and Social Welfare Commissioners), so
that they can effectively carry out their duties.
d. Village and Hamlet Authorities must promptly and accurately review all
cases relating to war victims, persons returning to village and repatriates
from Cambodia in order to avoid any omissions or abuse of authority.
C. District and Village Authorities must guide the people in making applications
for relief and complete the necessary dossiers for rapid transmittal to Pro-
vince Headquarters and the Province Social Welfare Service.
f. With the support of the Province Pacification and Development Coordinating
Center, and District and Village Authorities, the Province Social Welfare
Service must complete relief operations for war victims, or resettle them
And help them to return home within one month after receiving an approved
decision from the central government.
In the implementation of "A Brighter Life for War Victims Program, " there should
be a close coordination among MR Pacification and Development Councils, Province
and City Pacification and Development Councils, Province and City Councils, reli-
gious, political, social, youth groups as well as technical services, district, village,
and hamlet authorities and local people.
III-E-4
Approved MUM LA II A-RDP80ROl720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release #NU LASS1?ftDR 00010001-4
In addition, the Ministries are responsible for providing support as follows:
1. Ministry of Information.
a. Publicize relief programs for refugees from communism, war victims,
repatriates from Cambodia, orphans, widows, and disabled people.
b. Send Information Cadre to Evacuation Centers, Resettlement Centers, and
hamlets to which people have returned in order to encourage all elements
of war victims.
c. Print posters, leaflets, banners, etc. with slogans relating to the program
of "A Brighter Life for War Victims. "
a. Designate RD Cadre to help in making a survey of war victims and tempo-
rary resettlees.
a. Assign Cadre and provide medicines and necessary equipment for the
management of first-aid stations and maternity at Resettlement Centers
and hamlets where people have returned.
b. Beginning in 1972, pay the salaries of Health Cadre newly recruited in 1971
(including Health Cadre and Rural Midwives) at Resettlement Centers and
hamlets where people have returned.
a. Assign and help to recruit teachers for conducting classes at Resettlement
Centers and Returnees' hamlets.
b. Beginning 1972, pay salaries to teachers newly recruited in 1971 at Reset-
tlement Centers and Returnees' hamlets.
c. Give support in the organization of vocational training courses at Technical
Schools.
a. Assign cadre to guide people returning to village in agriculture and animal
husbandry techniques and organization of cooperatives.
Guide and assist the reconstruction of roads, markets, government buildings,
bridges and drains, wells, electricity and power plants, etc. at hamlets where
people have returned.
Approved For Release 2004UNC:US !EDOR001100010001-4
 Approved FNaMIFItoIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
7. Ministry of Labor.
a. Assist in the organization of vocational training courses.
b. Seek jobs for all elements of war victims.
8. Ministry for Development of Ethnic Minorities.
Assign Son Thon RD Cadre to help Montagnard war victims and temporarily
resettled people (refugees from communism).
9. Ministry for War Veterans.
Rehabilitate disabled people (physically and vocationally).
10. General Directorate of Youth.
Guide in the organization of sport activities and entertainment at Evacuation
Centers, Resettlement Centers, and returnees' hamlets.
In 1971, in order to encourage and give real help to refugees from communism to
return to their native villages and hamlets, the Ministry of Social Welfare will
allocate funds to Provinces and Cities to implement development projects for
hamlets having 300 or more refugees from communism who have returned to the
hamlets.
Development projects will be carried out to meet the aspirations of refugees from
communism who have returned to home. The Province Pacification and Develop-
ment Council is responsible to review projects and directly recommend them to
the Central Pacification and Development Council. Copies of projects and recom-
mendations should be forwarded to the MR Pacification and Development Council
concerned and MOSW.
Upon receipt of copies of projects, the MR Pacification and Development Council
should provide their comments to the Central Pacification and Development Council
within ten days. Beyond this period, if the MR Pacification and Development
Council has no recommendations, projects will be considered having implicit
agreement of the MR, PDC.
The Central Pacification and Development Council Coordinating Center will coordi-
nate with MOSW and Ministries concerned to consider Province Development Pro-
jects.
When development projects are approved by the CPDC, the Province Pacification
and Development Council is responsible for execution of the projects.
[II-E-6
Approved FXA,CUSSJfiEOA-RDP80RO1 720R001 100010001 -4
 Approved For Release 20011MISMEYOR001100010001-4
IV. GOALS.
A.
Temporary resettlees (refugees from communism).
Nationally.
- Permanent resettlement
80, 000 people
- Return to village
350, 000 people
(See TAB 1 attached).
B. War Victims suffering damage to houses and property or who have been injured or
who have lost the head of family due to war.
Relief operations should be provided to all deserving victims of the war. (Provide
funds for 96, 000 war victims throughout the country).
Twenty thousand repatriates from Cambodia require assistance in collective resettle-
ment.
All orphans, widows, and disabled war-victims are to be surveyed in the Prefecture
and Provinces and Cities.
Enclosure:
TAB 1
III-E-7
Approved For Release 2004/UNlCLA Jf4E&R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004 C[ASWEnTlOR001100010001-4
TAB 1: List of Evacuees (Refugees from Communism) scheduled for resettlement and
Return-to-Village in 1971 for total Community Defense and Local Development Plan, to
Appendix E: A Brighter Life for War Victims
PROVINCE
AND CITY
(1)
1 Quang Tri 0
2 Thua Thien Hue 0
3 Thi Xa Da Nang 1, 300
4 Quang Nam 22, 000
5 Quang Tin 7, 200
6 Quang Ngai 5,500
1, 900
17, 200
0
7, 200
6, 200
80,500
1, 000
17, 200
1, 300
29, 200
13, 400
86,000
7 ,1nh Dinh 300
74, 290
74, 590
8 : Phu Bon 200
0
200
9 : Phu Yen 0
28, 390
28, 390
10 Darlac 500
3, 090
3, 590
11 Khanh Hoa 0
1, 790
1, 790
12 ; Quang Duc
200
0
200
13 Tuyen Duc
0
1, 990
1, 990
13 B : Da Lat 0
0
0
14 : Ninh Thuan
0
0
0
15 : Binh Thuan
0
1,490
1,490
16 Thi Xa Cam Ranh
0
3, 290
3, 290
17 : Lam Deng
200
190
390
18 Pleiku 2, 600 :1
3, 390
5,990
RESETTLED : RETURN TO
Approved For Release 2004UNC IJEBOR001100010001-4
 Approved For IN U91ri RDP80ROl720R001100010001-4
20 :
Tay Ninh
300
11,400
21 :
Hau Nghia
3, 600
15, 100
22 :
Long An
600
600
23 :
Phuoc Long
100
600
24 : Binh Long
U
0
25 : Binh Duong
200
0
26 : Bien Hoa
0
0
27 : Long Khanh
U
0
28 : Phuoc Tuy
0
300
29 : Thi Xa Vung Tau
30 : Binh Tuy
31 : Gia Dinh
U
32 : Dinh Tuong
0
7,210
33 : Go Cong
1, 000
6, 710
34 : Kien Hoa
3, 300
7, 310
35 : Kien Tuong
300
1, 440
36 : An Giang
0
0
37 : Chau Doc
6,400
670
38 : Kien Giang
4,200
7, 990
39 : Kien Phong
0
12, 620
40 : Vinh Long
0
7, 630
41 Vinh Binh
3,200
2,220
42 : Sa Dec
U
6, 840
43 : An Xuyen
5, 700
3, 230
44 : Ba Xuyen
0
2, 940
45 : B ac Lieu
200
3, 840
46 : Chuong Thien
10, 700
6,260
Approved For FV U in
11, 700
18, 700
1, 200
700
0 ,
200
0
0 :
300
7, 210
7,710
10, 610
1, 740
7,070
12, 190
12, 620
7,630
5,420
6, 840
8, 930
2,940
4, 040
16, 960
SIfIEIDRDP8OROI720 R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20041UNCLA
S1TTElDOOuOOObOOOl-4
IT tv
Approved For Release 2004IU4MLIA.SLSIFFIEIIOROOI 100010 001-4
 Approved For Release 20 UNC[.AS IW0R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
Appendix F: Public Health
I. GENERAL:
Given the results achieved in 1970, the Ministry of Public Health will carry out activities
to consolidate these achievements in 1971 and will develop operations for the protection
of people's health in rural as well as urban areas.
The Ministry of Public Health will apply the principle of "Community Cooperation" as a
guideline for the implementation of Public Health projects in order to contribute to the
achievement of the objective of "Local Self Development" within the 111971 Community De-
fense and Local Development Plan. "
In 1971 the Ministry of Public Health has a number of projects to attain the following objec-
tives:
A. Initiate a Public Health movement aimed at improving community living conditions
through a "Sanitary Hamlet" Campaign implemented throughout the country.
B. Coordinate with local governments and people for the improvement of sanitary opera-
tions to include garbage removal and cleaning of sewers in phuongs and khoms in
Saigon and other cities.
C. Increase pure and potable water sources such as sanitary wells and water filters
in the rural areas.
D. Accelerate the inoculation campaigns to eliminate contagious diseases such as plague,
cholera, small-pox, poliomyelitis, etc.
E. Increase the operational efficiency of local Public Health activities by strengthening
the organization and emphasizing management control.
F. Improve the quality of Public Health personnel at all echelons through the standardiza-
tion of training principles and regulations as well as retraining in technical fields.
G. Initiate a system with fee collection for treatment to permit the Public Health Program
to become more self-supporting.
H. Accelerate the program of cooperation between Civilian and Military Health Agencies
in order to have more health personnel to serve the local population in provinces,
districts and villages. Army Medical Officers and other Medical Corpsmen should
be employed in such a way that they may participate in Public Health Programs.
1. Study and prepare a program for the prevention of air pollution and vector control.
''II III-F-I
Approved For Release 20041 N LUMIEROR001100010001-4
 #NCtAn ODP80R01720R001100010001-4
Approved For RIfE
III. EXECUTION:
In order to achieve the above objectives the Ministry of Public Health will do as
follows:
1. Step up Public Health activities.
2. Improve medical treatment facilities and services.
3. Emphasize the implementation of a program of cooperation between Civilian and
Military Health Agencies and personnel.
Improve and increase technical health training for medical specialists of various
branches.
5. Implement a logical program in a manner that gradually leads to self-suf-
ficiency.
6. Develop the activities of the Pharmacy, Dentistry and Nursing branches.
7. Increase management control
8. Increase the coordination among friendly agencies.
B. Tasking and Phasing.
1. Public Health.
a. Step up Public Health activities.
(1) Preventive medicine.
Inoculation: Replenish the personnel strength of mobile inoculation
groups at central and local levels. Prevent epidemic and contagious
diseases, to include plague, cholera and smallpox. Inoculate children
against poliomyelitis, diptheria, tetanus and whooping cough.
Epidemiology: Conduct epidemiological surveys in areas where the
presence of epidemic diseases is suspected, and make a summary of
epidemiological reports for distribution to all localities.
Continue the program of well construction in rural areas and check the
the quality of drinking water.
Continue to emphasize activities to kill pests (Anti-Plague Program).
Support all areas in carrying out a training program for storing and
transporting foodstuffs.
III-F-2
Approved FoIU"I E ft -RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004BULASf9 OR001100010001-4
Encourage all citizens to cooperate with the Government in the application
of preventive medicine and so maintain a way of life that will preserve their
own health and that of their family.
Increase public health education activities in order to make the people aware
of health and sanitation.
Consolidate those provincial installations for mother-child care which have
been organized or reorganized.
Endeavor to implement the mother-child protection program in villages and
hamlets.
Increase the inspection of mother-child protection activities throughout the
country.
Develop a program for study of family planning; establish additional family
planning pilot centers in provinces.
(5) Malaria Eradication.
(a) Objectives.
Prevent malaria epidemics from jeopardizing the Public Health.
Prevent malaria from spreading in population groupings such
as temporary settlements, resettlement centers and training centers.
Spray DDT 75% twice in A and B areas (highlands) and once in C areas
(coastal areas), especially in resettlement centers.
Conduct hematological surveys in areas where an outbreak of malaria
is suspected and in resettlement centers.
Conduct indirect hematological surveys with blood samples of malaria
patients coming for examination to provincial hospitals, district
maternity dispensaries, and. health stations.
Conduct entomological surveys in areas where there is a malaria out-
break.
Provide in-service training to all Malaria Eradication personnel.
III-F-3
Approved For Release 2009 [ASSIFIEO2oRoo1100010001-4
 ApprojNC teASSTfl!lJ 1 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
Further develop the Anti-Venereal-Diseases National Center in Saigon and
extend activities of consulting rooms in two Provinces of MRs 3 and 4 (Vung
Tau and Can Tho).
Detect syphilis symptoms in pregnant women through R. P. R. tests at Pro-
vince and District Maternities.
Detect gonorrhea symptoms in women who are not prostitutes at locations
where there are pilot centers for family planning.
Detect Trichomonas Vaginalis symptoms for patients at the Anti-Venereal
Diseases Center in Saigon.
(7) Anti-Tuberculosis Program.
Continue operations to detect and treat tuberculosis.
Accelerate Program of BCG Vaccination.
Organize technical training for Health Personnel.
(8) Anti-Leprosy Program.
Develop Program for treatment of leprosy at home.
Look for new leprous patients.
Examine those who live with the families of leprous patients and distribute
preventive medicines to them.
The Ministry of Health plans to establish and develop a number of Village and
District Health installations, to recruit a number of personnel of all categories,
and provide transportation facilities for Rural Health installations.
20 District Maternity Dispensaries and 50 Village Maternity Dispensaries will
be constructed, 10 District Maternity Dispensaries will be expanded and 10
Village Maternity Dispensaries will be repaired.
1, 120 new personnel will be recruited. Among this number, there will be 100
Public Health Assistants, ZOO Assistant Midwives, 120 District Health Cadre,
200 health laborers, and 500 Hamlet and Village Health Cadre.
In-service training will be conducted for 90 districts health chiefs and 40
entomological controllers.
Equipment to be furnished includes 20 sets of wooden furniture for 20 District
Maternity Dispensaries, 50 sets for 50 Village Maternity Dispensaries, and 20
Trilambrettas for 20 new District Maternity Dispensaries.
III-F-4
ApproUIC jFAI IEB/01 : CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20041040NCtSrrEoo 100010001-4
Within the pacification and development program, the Ministry has planned to
establish 150 sanitary Hamlets (conceived as a community health hamlet) with a
cost of VN$ 100, 000 for each Hamlet. Each Province will establish three Sani-
tary Hamlets.
(1)
(2)
Increase the amount of beds from 18, 000 to 21, 000 throughout the country.
Improve health facilities.
Improve medical services to promote the quality of therapeutic treatment.
A 200-bed hospital at Danang supported by the Government of the Republic
of West Germany.
A 250-bed hospital supported by the Government of the Republic of Korea.
(2) Coordinated program between Civilian and Military Health Agencies.
The Ministry of Defense will provide 650 beds.
The Ministry of Public Health will provide 440 beds.
(3) Improvement of Health Installations.
Modernize Cho Ray Hospital: Three/fourths of the cost will be financed
by the Government of Japan and the remaining part by the Government of
the Republic of Vietnam.
Continue the modernization of Hue Hospital which was started in 1970.
Repair all Hospitals throughout the country. Funded by the 1971 National
Budget.
(4) Improvement of Health services in Hospitals.
Improve laboratory services, pharmaceutical preparation, and nursing
services in Hospitals.
Improve laboratories in the following seven Hospitals: Cho Quan, Hue,
Danang, Qui Nhon, Nha Trang, Long Xuyen, Phong Dinh.
Establish a Blood Bank in each Hospital.
Establish technical wards and rooms in Hospitals.
III-F-5
Approved For Release 2004/UNCLl100010001-4
 Appro g[Ae E D01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
Continue operations in autonomous pilot centers in Hung Vuong Mater-
iiity Hospital and Gia Dinh Medical Practice Center in order to pro-
gress toward the establishment of autonomous Hospitals.
Organize Seminars on treatment techniques.
Plan to construct a Z00-bed hospital in Danang with the support of the
Government of West Germany and a 250-bed hospital with the support of
Korea; extensively improve Cho Ray Hospital with the assistance of
the Japanese Government; improve Hue Central Hospital; and carry
out major repair of 51 hospitals throughout the country.
F'stablish Blood Banks in 33 Hospitals, establish technical wards and
rooms, etc.
Step up the implementation of the program of cooperation between the Civilian and
Military Health Agencies in order to increase the personnel serving local people
in provinces, districts, and villages.
In 1971, achievements obtained last year through the program of cooperation be-
tween the Civilian and Military Health Agencies will be consolidated with the
development, re-training, and advanced training of military nurses in order to
be able to use both civilian and military personnel in the Public Health services.
Improve and Develop the training of Health Specialists of various branches.
a. Continue the training and organize additional training courses for Health
specialists.
b. In-service training will be conducted for the following:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Instructors of Health Technicians and Health Assistants.
Chief nurses.
Chiefs of patients wards.
Health Technician Section.
Health Assistant Section.
General Seminar of Technical Schools.
Implementation of a Supply Program based on a policy leading gradually to Self-
Sufficiency.
a. Public Health Logistical Support: Strengthen logistical support for all Public
Health installations throughout the country.
b. Build 9 medical logistical warehouses for 9 provincial Public Health Services.
c. Establish a Data Processing System for the Logistics Directorate and MR
medical warehouses.
III-F-6
Appro C l2Ar." IF1tED1 : CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004It[IAUIDOR001100010001-4
d. Improve the system of medicine production of the National Pharmaceutical
Laboratory.
e. Provide training in the maintenance of medical equipment for all health in-
stallations throughout the country.
f. Establish a project for the control and maintenance of vehicles consisting of
the following:
Control,
Repair and maintenance.
Replacement.
Establish a list of vehicle authorizations for the various agencies.
6. Operational Development of all branches.
a. Nursing.
(1) Improve capabilities of personnel in charge of nursing services at
Hospitals.
(2) Improve Nurse Training Facilities.
(3) Organize nursing seminars at Central and MR level
(4) Publications:
Translate a text book on Nursing.
Print a nursing magazine.
(5) Recommend the award of scholarships to study nursing abroad.
b. Dentistry.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Construct a Dentistry Training Center (including a boarding house).
Print Dentistry documents,
Inspect and adjust all Dentistry organizations throughout the country.
For 1971 Pharmacy Directorate has planned to carry out the following
objectives:
(1) Pharmacy rules and regulations. Strengthen existing Pharmacy rules
and regulations.
(2) Control of drugs. Improve existing facilities with the purpose of pro-
moting the quality of domestically produced pharmaceutical products.
III-F-7
Approved For Release 2004/UN1C[IAN1fOR001100010001-4
 Approved UN rAS(STfltDCIRD8OROI720R001100010001-4
(3) Study on Nutrition:
(a) Organize in-service training courses on nutrition.
(b) Disseminate nutrition documents.
(c) Study and establish a daily ration for children and needy persons.
7. Increase operational efficiency of local health services through the consolida-
tion of medical organizations and emphasis on management.
In 1971, in order to increase the operational efficiency of health services, the
Ministry of Health will review the organization of local health institutions, the
problem of assignment of duties and responsibilities to the personnel to attain
a more rational distribution of work (TO&E), and the problem of achieving an
accurate and effective medical supply system. Health agencies must also make
clear plans for management, control, and evaluation.
Control must be extended down at least two echelons through the use of regular
and unannounced visits.
8. Coordination with local goverment and people to improve sanitary works to in-
clude waste disposal and the sewerage system at phuongs and khoms in Saigon
and other cities.
The principle of community cooperation is absolutely essential in the execution
of health tasks in the Prefecture, Provinces, and cities. This principle will
be employed in three ways: Cooperation among the people themselves, coop-
eration between the people and the Government, and cooperation among Govern-
ment agencies.
C. Coordination with other Ministries and Agencies.
In order to carry out the 1971 Health Program, particularly the program of establish-
ment of Sanitary Hamlets, the Ministry of Public Health will coordinate with other
Ministries and Government Agencies to include the Central Pacification and Devel-
opment Council Coordination Center, Ministry of Interior (within the People's Organi-
zation Plan), Ministry of Rural Development, Ministry of Social Welfare, Ministry
of Information, local administrative agencies, and public and private associations.
D. Plans and Report.
In order to implement the 1971 Health Plan effectively and in accordance with the
local situation, the Ministry of Public Health has instructed the Province Health
Services throughout the country to forward to the Ministry a detailed plan on the
future operations of each Service for 1971, based on the general plan of the Ministry
of Public Health. In addition, every month, each Province Health Service should
forward a report on the results as well as difficulties encountered in the implemen-
tation of this plan.
III-F-8
Approved 1JN0L4SS1f1j10 CIA-RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/UNRASUREV R001100010001-4
IV. GOALS:
A. Public Health Activities planned to be implemented throughout the country in 1971.
1. Inoculate against:
Plague 8, 000, 000 persons,
Cholera 10, 000, 000 persons,
Smallpox 10, 000, 000 persons.
(DTC) Diptheria, tenanus and whooping cough: 600, 000 persons.
2. Public sanitation:
Issue 200 water pumps and 120 sets of chlorinators.
3. Public Health Education:
Carry out 52 TV and Radio Broadcasts.
Issue 12 editions of "Suc Khoe" (Health) Magazines.
Issue 250, 000 posters,
Issue 1, 000, 000 leaflets,
Organize 15 exhibitions.
Produce eight motion pictures.
Organize a musical including recitation of poems relating to the Public Health
Education.
4. Malaria Eradication:
Spray DDT for 530, 868 houses.
Conduct hematological surveys with 400, 000 blood samples.
5. Anti-Venereal Diseases:
Examine 200, 000 pregnant women for syphilis.
Examine 200 non-prostitutes for gonorrhea.
Examine 100 women for Trichomonas Vaginalis symptoms.
6. Anti-Tuberculosis Program:
Treat tuberculosis at home for 20, 000 patients.
Provide BCG Vaccination for 400, 000 newly born infants.
III-F-9
Approved For Release 2004/ A CM111F
 Approved uNcrissintoCIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
7. Construction of Rural Health Installations:
Build 20 District Maternity/Dispensaries,
Build 50 Village Maternity/Dispensaries.
Expand 10 District Maternity/Dispensaries.
Repair 10 Village Maternity/Dispensaries.
8. Establishment of Sanitary Hamlets.
Establish 150 Sanitary Hamlets throughout the country (three Sanitary Hamlets
in each Province).
Therapeutic Medicine.
III-F-10
Approved UNC&AeS&J'FJED CIA-RDP80RO1720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200#NtLA&SS1ftD2OIOOIIOOOIOOOI -4
Appendix G: Education
I. GENERAL:
A. General Situation.
1. The Ministry of Education implemented the 1970 Pacification and Development
Plan in the education field, with financial assistance from the Central
Pacification and Development Council (CPDC) and the support from the local
population. Projects were satisfactorily complemented, i. e. , the implementa-
tion of compulsory education at the primary level and an increase to 50% of the
percentage of students admitted to the 6th grade.
2. Moreover, in order to develop practical mass education, this Ministry has also
carried out the following projects:
a. Established a twelve-grade educational system.
b. Turned all public primary schools in the country into community schools.
c. Updated the secondary education program.
d. Opened 19 additional teachers classes in provinces having no schools of this
kind in order to admit 1, 440 more student teachers.
3. In order to prepare the 1971 program of action, the Government has initiated
a Community Defense and Local Development Plan to permit our people to
achieve self-defense, self-government and self-development in order that the
world may soon see we have matured and are self-sufficient.
B. Mission. In order to raise our nation's community development spirit, the 1971
Education Development Program includes the following objectives:
1. Improve technical and vocational guidance programs quantitatively and quali-
tatively so as to raise the productive capacity of the whole nation. Veterans
and refugees in temporary areas are granted priority in this program so that
they may normalize their living conditions and take part actively in the community
development effort.
2. Improve agriculture and animal husbandry training centers reserved for ethnic
minorities to permit these latter to contribute effectively to the common prosper-
ity of the nation.
3. Complete the compilation of text books destined for the twelve most populous
ethnic minorities as an indication of the Government's interest in and equal
treatment toward all citizens.
III-G-I
Approved For Release 200149 LASS4FftD20R001 10 0010001-4
 Approved For RjNtj/gSj ntjDP80RO1 720R001 100010001 -4
Train a sufficient number of secondary school teachers and build enough schools
to accept 62. 5% of the total of applicants for admission to the 6th grade of public
secondary schools. The Government needs to raise the intellectual standard of
the young generation so they may effectively serve this country and contribute
to its growth.
5. Establish Educational Sectors and local Education Coordination and Development
Councils to permit decentralization of authority in the management of education
and give the local districts a share of the government's burden in educational
development.
With these principles, the Ministry of Education has devised a plan for the organization
and activities as follows:
1. Improve technical and vocational guidance programs in number and in quality
especially those intended for veterans and refugees in temporary camps.
a, Schools. In 1971 the Ministry of Education will complete construction of
technical schools in An Giang, Phuoc Tuy and Bien Hoa Provinces, construct
two new schools in Vinh Long and Can Tho, and begin construction of the
Nguyen Truong To Education Center in Thu Duc.
1). Number of students: Increase the number of students admitted to both public
and private technical schools by 20% .
(1) From 10, 000 to 12, 000 students for public technical schools.
(2) From 42, 000 to 50, 000 students for private technical schools.
Teaching staff: Increase this staff by 10%; this means at the rate of 100
per year to provide enough teachers for technical schools.
(1)
(2)
(3) Vocational training for ethnic Vietnamese returning from Cambodia.
(4) Vocational training classes for veterans to include the disabled.
All the above-mentioned classes will be financed by the Ministry of
Social Welfare.
In-service training: Hold summer in-service training courses for two
hundred technical teachers of various branches.
2. Improve Agricultural and Animal Husbandry Training Centers for ethnic
minorities. Since 1956, twelve Agricultural and Animal Husbandry Training
III-G-2
Approved For OKRA FIFIDRDP80RO1720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20UNCtAW ffEj720R001 100010001 -4
Centers for ethnic minorities have been set up to train members of ethnic minori-
ties in Quang Tri, Quang Ngai, Kontum, Pleiku, Phu Bon, Darlac, Quang Duc,
Lam Dong, Tuyen Duc, Ninh Thuan, Binh Thuan and Phuoc Long provinces.
In early 1969, the Directorates of Agriculture, Forestry and Animal Husband-
ry Studies officially took over the direction of these Centers. Due to a lot of
initial difficulties in management of these centers as well as the complex and
delicate problem of handling personnel and selecting students, there is an urgent
need for improvement of these Training Centers through the following measures:
b. Provide boarding-houses, classrooms, kitchens, means of transportation,
office stationery and agricultural equipment.
c. Supply an additional quantity of sprayers, handicraft tools, fertilizer, feed,
seeds and livestock.
d. Reorganize the various training courses: this includes courses in the
Center as well as mobile ones where teachers go to the hamlets.
e. Select and provide students: Based on recommendations from the Center
Manager, provincial ethnic minority services will select students who meet
the prerequisites.
f. Training: This includes supplementary training of teachers and organiza-
tion of technical courses which are simple, practical, and within the trainees'
understanding.
The program for improvement of all Ethnic Minorities' Agricultural and
Animal Husbandry Training Centers can be successfully implemented only
when the three following conditions are present: Security, special financial
support, and close coordination of all provincial ethnic minority services.
3. Complete the compilation of textbooks intended for the twelve most populous
ethnic minorities. So far, the Educational Documentation Center of the Ministry
of Education has undertaken the printing and publication of maps, copy books, and
Vietnamese spelling books for Highlanders, as well as guidebooks for teachers
of Highlanders for Bahnar, Bru, Jarai, Koho, and Rade ethnic minorities.
Some other books on science, hygiene and arithmetic are being printed and will
be published soon. With an appropriation of VN$5, 000, 000 for 1971, the Educa-
tional Documentation Center will publish these texts, including reading books
and books on ethics, folk songs and culture for the Bahnar, Cham, Hre, Jarai,
Koho, Rade, Muong, Bru and White Thai ethnic minorities. In particular,
there are dictionaries for White Thais. This will enable the Ministry of Educa-
tion to solve part of the problem of printing textbooks for the twelve most
populous ethnic minorities.
In addition, the publication of the Montagnard language textbooks also requires
special support from the Special Institute of Languages (SIL).
4. Increase the number of secondary school teachers from 16, 270 to 19, 300 by the
end of 1971.
III-G-3
Approved For Release 20IJHICtASSIr1 072OR001100010001-4
 ApprovIN~l~I~~~1:CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
Presently there are 16, 270 secondary school teachers in the country; 7, 970 in
the public schools and 8, 300 in both private and semi-public schools. In 1971,
the Ministry of Education will recruit 2, 420 new teachers of various categories
for the public secondary schools as follows:
a. 200 senior high school teachers (graduated from the Faculty of Pedagogy
in 1971).
b. 50 senior high school teachers (hourly paid private teachers having a
Bachelor degree).
c. 600 junior high school teachers (graduated from the Faculty of Pedagogy in
1971).
d. 300 junior high school teachers (hourly-paid private teachers having a
secondary teaching proficiency certificate or two University degrees).
e. 100 junior high school teachers (reassigned primary school teachers).
100 contractual senior high school teachers (hourly-paid private teachers
having a Bachelor degree).
100 contractual junior high school teachers (hourly-paid private teachers
having 4 years of seniority).
h. 100 direct-hire teachers (hourly-paid private teachers having two years of
seniority).
i. 670 direct hire teachers (students of junior High School Teachers Intensive
Training Program).
200 newly-recruited hourly-paid teachers and a number of teachers recruited
as substitutes for hourly-paid private teachers upon their reassignment.
At the same time, private schools must recruit 610 teachers from among
the graduates of private Faculties of Pedagogy or from candidates who meet
the prerequisites for private school teachers. Thus, the total of teachers
will increase up to 19, 300 as expected.
The Ministry of Education will accomplish the recruitment of 2, 420 teachers for
public Secondary Schools, but the increase of 610 teachers for private Secondary
Schools cannot be assured.
As for the recruitment of hourly-paid private teachers, MOE has encountered
many difficulties because all male applicants are subject to the General Mobiliza-
tion Law. Only if the Prime Minister's Office intervenes with MOD to authorize
MOE to recruit male teachers based on the procedures for the recruitment of
Technical Cadres will MOE achieve the objectives and solve the lack of teachers.
Admit 62. 5% of the total of students who are examined to the 6th grade of public
secondary schools in school year 1971-1972.
During school year 1970-1971 a total of 1, 392 6th grade classes exist or will be
constructed in the public secondary schools in Saigon and all cities and provinces.
Based on the total of students of the 4th grade of all public and private schools
III-G-4
Appro CL IfEffi : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20L~SSfff720R001100010001-4
throughout the country in school year 1969-1970, the total of students of the 5th
grade who are candidates of the examination for admission to the 6th grade is
estimated at 222, 332 for school year 1971-1972. To be able to admit 62. 5% of
this number, that is 222, 332 x 62.5 = 138, 957 students, a total of: 138, 957 =2, 526
100 55
classrooms are required. Consequently the total of new classrooms to be set
up for the 6th grade in school year 1971-1972 is 2, 526 - 1, 392 = 1, 134 classrooms.
Accordingly, 600 additional classrooms are required for the number of students
indicated in the set forth objective. As for the examination to admit students to
the 6th grade, many difficulties have been encountered in the organization of this
examination at the central level in recent years. Therefore, in 1971 MOE will
entrust local authorities with responsibility to administer this examination.
6. Complete the construction of 600 secondary school classrooms in 1971.
During 1970, in addition to the 200 secondary schoolrooms supported by the
National Budget, the CPDC will support funds for the construction of an additional
254 rooms.
During 1971 the National Budget will support 120 rooms and the CPDC Budget
will support 185 rooms for a total of 305 rooms.
Therefore, subtracting the 150 rooms completed in 1970, the total number of
secondary schoolrooms that must be completed during 1971 is 600 rooms.
7. Separation of powers and tasking in the management of education.
a. Establish 14 Educational Sectors. Decree 012-SL/GD, 26 January 1970
of the Prime Minister has prescribed the creation of Educational Sectors.
Based on geographic conditions, communications and various ethnic groupings,
the Ministry of Education plans to divide the provinces and cities into 14
Educational Sectors as follows:
Educational Sector Provinces /Cities Population
Quang Tri 301, 959
Thua Thien 452,920
Hue 156,449
Quang Nam 637, 350
Da Nang 313, 881
Quang Tin 390, 346
Quang Ngai 687,763
Binh Dinh 862, 936
Phu Yen 330, 706
Khanh Hoa 367, 523
Cam Ranh 66,011
Ninh Thuan 79, 357
Binh Thuan 267,268
III-G-5
Approved For Release 200UHCI&1E1DOR001100010001-4
 II AS pf 04/04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
Educational Sector (con,)
Provinces /Cities
Population
Kontum
104,235
Pleiku
194,239
Phu Bon
53, 794
Darlac
213, 523
Quang Duc
28 644
Tuyen Duc
102, 940
Dalat
83, 651
Lam Dong
66,724
Binh Tuy
59, 122
Long Khanh
147, 159
Phuoc Tuy
103, 583
Vung Tau
69, 034
Con Son
2, 508
Sector VIII
Phuoc Long
50,028
Binh Long
72,917
Binh Duong
238,302
Sector IX
Tay Ninh
319, 576
Hau Nghia
212,873
Long An
331,865
Sector X
Dinh Tuong
582,405
Go Cong
173, 748
Kien Hoa
574, 748
Kien Tuong
39, 852
Kien Phong
334, 097
Sadec
265,495
Vinh Binh
383, 899
Vinh Long
488, 047
Phong Dinh
430,426
Chuong Thien
248, 729
Ba Xuyen
35Z,781
Bac Lieu
260,431
An Xuyen
233, 105
An Giang
496,564
Chau Doc
454,777
Kien Giang
393, 049
Saigon
1,
670,524
Gia Dinh
1,
088, 986
Bien Hoa
421, 197
In 1971 MOE will give priority to the establishment of the following Educa-
tional Sectors: I, II, IV, V, VIII, XII, XIII Sectors and the Special Sector.
III-G-6
UNCLASS JfIf2004/04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20 V N0LA100 010001-4
With regard to organizational structure, each Educational Sector is under
a Chief of Sector selected from among well experienced and qualified
teachers. Under his direction, an assistant is in charge of the technical
sections such as Administration, Accounting and Materials, Personnel,
Educational Affairs, etc. Moreover, the Chief of Sector and his Assis-
tant also must manage an Educational Inspection Team which is re-
sponsible for the inspection of all general, technical and vocational
schools at secondary as well as primary levels. Within its powers and
responsibilities, the Educational Sector will perform the following:
(a) Devise plans for the development of schools in accordance with the
Ministry of Education policies and guidelines.
(b) Assign and arrange personnel within the Educational Sector.
(c) Handle administration of personnel in regard to recruitment, dis-
cipline, promotion and finance.
(d) Manage all subordinate educational facilities.
(e) Inspect and control all public and private schools in the sector.
Establish and recommend study programs compatible with local
needs.
(2) In general, the organization of Educational Sectors may be based on the
following :
Administrative and Technical Section
dministration Accounting Personnel Educational
Section & Mater- Section Affairs
ials Sectim Section
According to this chart, the Chief of an Educational Sector is entitled
to local Education Council support. This council is elected as follows:
(a) All Parents and Teachers Associations in the Province will meet
to elect their Provincial Association.
(b) All Provincial Parent and Teachers Associations in the Educational
Sector will meet to elect an Education Council for the sector.
The Ministry of Education and the authorities of the Prefecture,
Provinces, and cities will invite local dignitaries and notables
devoted to education to join these Councils.
III-G-7
Approved For Release 201191 Al $JIF8L072OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Re "Up L AS AO SWUP80R01 720R001 100010001 -4
b. Local Education Coordination and Development Council.
In each Province, autonomous city and Prefecture, a Local Education
Coordination and Development Council will be established with the fol-
lowing missions:
(a) Guide, supervise and control the administration of all primary and
secondary schools;
(b) Study, coordinate and regulate the development of educational es-
tablishments and facilities;
(c) Motivate people to participate in the development of these establish-
ments and facilities.
(2) The composition of this Council will be determined by an arrete of the
Minister of Education based on the recommendations of Prefectural
City Mayors or Province Chiefs. The council consists of:
(a) Prefectural Mayor, City Mayor, Province Chief or their competent
representative as Chairman.
(b) Three representatives of the Ministry of Education with one of them
acting as Vice Chairman.
(c) Three representatives of the local inhabitants and students' parents
with one of them acting as Vice Chairman.
(d) One representative from each local school in the Prefecture, auton-
omous city, or province.
(e) One representative from the province Health Service, province
Public Works Service, and province Construction Service.
The Ministry of Education will require the support of other ministries to achieve
the above. All of the agencies of the MOE at the central level will make detailed
plans for 1971 and distribute them to the field for execution. The MOE Educational
Development Committee, will monitor, supervise and control this program and take
adequate measures to overcome difficulties encountered in project implementation .
IV. PLANNING;
Based on their assigned tasks, all agencies from central down to local level will prepare
a detailed and positive activity program to be submitted to the Ministry of Education for
approval prior to 1 February 1971. This program must clearly state the different phases
of implementation so that these phases meet local capabilities and development needs.
The basic principle of planning requires the following phases:
III-G-8
Approved For FOR[C4$ST ftJDRDP80R01720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004"tLAin AN
.S fl lOR001100010001-4
A. Survey of local requirements and local development situation. This may be done
through an inventory of all available resources.
B. Estimation of all available and possible resources for the forthcoming development
effort.
V. COORDINATION:
For efficient implementation of the 1971 Education Development Program and to achieve
all the above mentioned objectives, this Program will be carried out in close cooperation
with other agencies. Based on the above goals, coordination is needed among agencies
as follows:
A. Improve all technical and vocational guidance programs quantitatively and qualitatively,
especially those intended for Veterans and refugees in temporary areas. This calls
for the cooperation of the Ministry of Social Welfare, the Ministry of Labor and the
Ministry of Veterans Affairs.
B. Improve Agricultural and Animal Husbandry Training Centers for ethnic minorities.
This needs the cooperation of the Ministry of Land Reform and Agriculture and Fishery
Development, and the Ministry for Development of Ethnic Minorities.
C. Complete the compilation of textbooks for the twelve most populous ethnic minorities.
This requires the cooperation of the Ministry for Development of Ethnic Minorities
and the office of the Minister of State responsible for Culture and the Special Insti-
tute of Languages.
D. Admit 62. 5% of the total of candidates examined for admission to the 6th grade of
public secondary school for school year 1971 - 1972. This requires the cooperation
of local authorities, students' parents and Prefectural, Autonomous City, and Province
Councils.
E. Establish Educational Sectors and Local Education Development and Coordination
Councils. This requires the cooperation of the Ministry of Interior and local elected
Councils.
F. The construction of classrooms requires the coordination of the Director General
of Construction.
VI. REPORTS:
Monthly reports will continue to be made as before. The implementation of the Plan
aiming to achieve the above-mentioned goals must be a recurring item in this report.
This report must be made in several copies: One copy will be forwarded to the Central
Pacification and Development Council, one copy to the Educational Development Committee
(Ministry of Education, 70, Le Thanh Ton, Saigon) and one copy to the Province Pacification
and Development Council concerned. These reports must be made on the 25th of each month.
Agencies are informed that reporting must be regarded as a most important task so that
the central government can monitor programs and solve problems on a timely basis.
III-G-9
Approved For Release 2021CLAS 0-20R001100010001-4
 JOR001100010001-4
Approved For Release 2004"t SIR QPIM
The fact that a nation fails to use manpower resources efficiently and fully may be the
source of serious problems such as poverty and especially social injustice.
This problem is even more complex in Vietnam at the present time. The current pro-
lem of employment must be solved while making effective plans for the future. The main
characteristics of labor force in Vietnam are the low proportion of technicians and skilled
workers and the high proportion of unskilled workers.
In a nation like Vietnam which is poor in capital but rich in manpower, the manpower
plan must cover two main aspects indispensable for the abolition of poverty and-accelera-
tion of development. The first aspect relative to the demand is the employment of surplus
labor in useful undertakings and the creation of an adequate number of remunerative jobs for
workers to save them from unemployment or under-employment. The second aspect relative
to the supply is the training of skilled workers and the creation of the possibilities of transfer
for workers depending on their occupations and geographic conditions in order to meet the
changing requirements of various occupations, industries, firms and job locations, in order
that the labor supply will not exceed the demand and in order to avoid a loss of balance and
an underemployment of technical skills.
Generally speaking, the problems of labor and employment are related to socio-economic
policies and constitute one of the essential tasks of the Ministry of Labor as well as the other
Ministries with related activities.
In order to develop a plan for this task, which provides for a separation of functions along
with joint control, and which can save public funds while achieving better results, close coor-
dination and cooperation between the ministries involved is a primary factor to be considered.
For these reasons, the Ministry of Labor has recommended and the Prime Minister has
approved the formation of an Interministerial Manpower Coordinating Committee composed of
representatives from the ministries concerned with manpower problems as well as those of
employee and employer organizations (Arrete 321-ND/LD, 19 March 1969).
Moreover, the purpose of the GVN labor policy is to promote good relations between
employers and employees. Sincere cooperation and reciprocal respect for human dignity are
advantageous for both parties in order to bring about industrial tranquility and to provide
support for the economic development effort while also promoting social progress and
justice. To achieve this, the Ministry of Labor has held many training courses for worker's
representatives and labor union officers. This training was designed to give these rep-
resentatives a general knowledge of labor law to help them understand thoroughly their
duties and rights, and familiarize them with the Vietnamese government labor policy and
its democratic regime. Thus, workers who received training in basic labor laws also
improved their political awareness,.as these courses included topics of People's Information.
They are now idealogically equipped for effective political struggle against the communists
in the near future.
III-H-1
Approved For Release 20OUCL ICHME02OR001100010001-4
 Approved For FN EOA ShC RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
The Ministry of Labor is concerned with 905, 443 male and female workers working in
86, 625 large and small enterprises scattered throughout the country. (1, 000 of these enter-
prises employ 20 workers or more; and 304 enterprises employ 50 workers or more). The
percentage of female workers is worthy of note, 32% of the total of workers. Within the
total of 905, 443 workers, the percentage of technical and professional workers is, very low,
3. 6%. The percentage of skilled workers in 32. 7% and that of unskilled workers, 29. 4%.
The tasks of the Ministry of Labor in regard to these workers are divided into the following
categories:
A. Employment. (Task to be shared with other ministries concerned.) Keep abreast
of the employment situation in the country, plan and conduct surveys and invest-
igations on employment, regulate the labor market, analyze and classify different
occupations in order to advance toward the preparation and publications of a
National Classification of Occupations.
B. Labor Relations. Improve labor relations, promote understanding and sincere
cooperation between employers and workers to create industrial tranquility, re-
duce the disputes between labor and management in order to contribute to economic
stability and national development.
C. Vocational training. Develop vocational training program for workers in both
public and private sectors; create additional employment agencies in the provinces;
improve methods of rapid placement of workers through the use of such media as
press, radio and television; form mobile teams to regularly contact large
companies; seek position employment for workers; monitor the working of the
apprenticeship system in all companies; coordinate with the ministries concerned
in order to standardize all vocational training programs and instructional methods;
and, standardize the values of diplomas or graduation certificates issued to skilled
workers.
Work description Accomplishment: Remark
period
A. Collect, analyze, and summarize data on the : From 1 January
procurement of employment in public and
private sectors in 1970 and 1971 (estimate 1971 through 31
of labor requirements) under the national
employment program. December 1971
B. Exploit the results of the 1969 survey of pro-: From 1 January
fessional, technical and scientific workers :
employed by commercial and industrial es- : 1971 through 31
tablishments of the private sector in Saigon :
(in order to obtain data on the categories and December 1971
characteristics of these specialist groups). :
III-H-2
Approved For R j0A18SffIEftDP80R01720R00 1100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004JNC:LCASfE1 OR001100010001-4
C. Summarize and exploit information on the : From 1 January
requirements for civil service workers for
1970 and 1971. (To be furnished by the mini-: 1971 through 31
stries).
December 1971
D. Prepare a National Classification of Occupa-:
tions in order to provide information on the
numbers of technicians and of skilled work-
ers of various categories. To be used as a
basis for training and effective use of human:
resources under the general development
plan. (Classification of Occupations means
the listing of different vocations in the coun-:
try, definition of each vocation, naming of
all the vocations, and classification of the
vocations into categories and groups accord-:
ing to their relationship). The preparation :
of this document must be based on the stand-:
ards of the International Classification of
Occupations compiled by the World Labor
Organization in Geneva. This document
has 1, 506 vocations classified into 204
groups, 83 categories and 8 .main titles,
defined in detail and arranged according
to their codes.
Following are the plans adopted for the com-:
pilation of the "National Classification of
Occupation".
1. Adapt the International Standard Classi-
fication of Occupations for our use.
2. Select necessary occupations based on
these criteria: occupations indispensable
for national defense, and for programs of
investment, construction, economy, etc. ,
in order to define, identify, and classify
these occupations.
3. Add occupations peculiar to Vietnam. and
delete those which are not found.
4. Update the National Classification peri-
odically according to the annual rate of eco-
nomic development. These operations will
be carried out in five phases,
classification of occupations, hold training
courses at primary and secondary levels,
teach trainees on the methods of plant sur-
vey occupational analysis, definition, identi-: December 1971
fication and classification of occupations (At :
The Interministerial
Manpower Coordination
Committee (IMMCC) will
play an advisory and con-
trol role. The task of
making this dictionary
is assigned to the Em-
ployment Sub-Committee
of the IMMCC. The im-
plementation of the pro-
ject depends on budget-
ary capabilities. The
minimum number of
specialists at the secon-
dary level is 25. Their
recruitment depends on
the size of the Ministry
of Labor budget.
In phase 2, the Ministry
of Labor needs the close
and full-time coopera-
tion of seven officers
who have completed the
III-H-3
Approved For Release 200AXLM F1EfOR001100010001-4
 Approved For 1IKg( A&WO
IFORDP8OR01720R001100010001-4
the secondary level, the training program
emphasizes observation and practical work
in large business in Saigon and Gia Dinh).
secondary training course
:on analysis and classifi-
: cation of occupations.
Phase 2, Coordinate with the Ministry of
Defense (Automatic Data Processing Center):
to complete the definition of occupations up
to three digits (in the list of civilian occupa-:
tions in the military sector, the Ministry of
Defense has simply listed these occupations
without defining them).
Phase 3. List of the occupations currently
found in foreign firms and Allied forces,
especially American firms.
Phase 4. Compute the list of occupations
currently found in Vietnamese establish-
merits.
Phase 5. Complete the compilation, revision:
arrangement, and printing for distribution. .
This is an interministerial task which re-
quires active cooperation from all Minis-
tries and Agencies concerned. The Minis-
try of Labor alone cannot accomplish it.
Moreover, funding (for personnel, training,
and operations) is a vital problem to be
solved. This task cannot be carried out if
necessary funds are not available.
Hold sixty training courses for 1, 600 work-
ers' representatives in the Capital and 23
provinces all over the country (each course
will. be attended by 20 to 30 trainees and
will. last three days). The training program :
includes the study of technical documents,
labor laws, and political topics designed to
stimulate the morale of workers so as to
awaken them to the necessity of remaining
closely united in nationalist ranks and parti-:
cipating actively and as of one mind in the
political struggle against communism in the
future.
From 1 July
1971 through 31
December 1971
From 1 January
1972 through
30 June 1972
From 1 July
through 31
December 1971
III-H-4
Approved For F1 "CSSJ'fDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200V L1tf D20R001100010001-4
Conduct 18 courses in Saigon and 10 courses : From 15 April
in Gia Dinh. . 1971 through 30
June 1971
From 25 May
1971 through
25 June 1971
Conduct 2 courses at provincial or interpro-: From 1 May
vincial level for the provincial services: Da-: 1971 through
nang, Quang Nam, Quang Tin, Long Khanh,: 30 June 1971
Pleiku, Kontum, Khanh Hoa, Binh Long and
Cam Ranh.
Conduct one course at provincial or inter-
provincial level for the provincial services:
Tay Ninh, Phong Dinh, Tuyen Duc-Dalat,
Binh Dinh, Binh Duong, Hau Nghia, Thua
Thien, Dinh Tuong, Vung Tau, Darlac, Ninh
Thuan, Phu Yen, Binh Thuan, Vinh Long,
Sadec, Lam Dong, and Kien Giang.
B. Training of labor union officials and members:
In order to assist labor union officials and
members to attain a thorough knowledge of
the organizational structure, functioning,
and administration of labor unions, and to
have a clearer sense of the unions' obliga-
tions in the building of democracy and social:
improvement, the Ministry of Labor has
helped Labor unions to organize inter-
mediate training courses. (In 1970, 53 train
ing courses for 2, 160 union officials were
held in Saigon and provinces).
For 1971, the Ministry of Labor plans to
hold 75 training courses for 3, 000 labor
union officals. The training schedule will be
completed after consultation with the work-:
ers' organizations concerned.
In 1971, the Ministry of Labor will organize
an exhibition designed to emphasize the
necessity to improve relations between em-
ployers and workers and to introduce the
Labor Relations Center of the Ministry of
Labor to the representatives of employers,
labor unions, and other people interested
II III-H-5
Approved For Release 2004AIRCLASSIF BOR001100010001-4
 Approved For Re~~O~~~~~I~P80R01720R001100010001-4
in labor problems.
f). Creation of a library on Labor relations.
Development and completion period. 1971 - 1972
At the outset this library will have 700 books:
dealing with Labor Relations.
Item III. Vocational Training.
There are presently four vocational train-
ing centers in Gia Dinh, An Giang, Phu Yen
and Qui Nhon and training courses are held
in 20 provinces throughout the country. The:
Ministry of Labor trained 26, 803 skilled
workers for 1955 to 1969. Through August
19 70 it has held 113 vocational training
courses with 3, 055 graduates.
1971 Program
A. Intensification of vocational training.
1. Hold 13 additional vocational training
courses especially in Saigon and Gia Dinh
to train additional skilled workers needed
for business in all economic sectors.
From 1 January:
1971 through 31
December 1971
2. Set up six new vocational training Cen -
ters with 18m x 6m prefabricated houses
at Phu Binh (Cholon), Cam Ranh, Khanh
Hoa, Danang, Hue, and Dalat.
3. :Encourage foreign firms to maximize
their vocational training of Vietnamese em-
ployees so that they can gradually replace
foreign skilled workers. So far, 17 foreign
enterprises have given 165, 375 Vietnamese
skilled workers on-the-job training.
4. Hold six additional training courses in
the newer promising occupations to assist
the progress of the economic development
of cur country, such as: refrigeration, in-
duscrial electricity, television, electronics,
data processing programmers etc. (in Saigon
and Gia Dinh).
5. Urge private firms to properly imple-
ment the Labor Code provisions on appren-
ticeship.
From 1 January:
1971 through 31
December 1971
From 1 January:
1971 through
31 December
1971
From 1 January:
1971 through 31
December 1971
From 1 January:
1971 through 31
December 1971
III-H-6
Approved For UNaCELAS'SIIJ'I ED-RDP80ROl 720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2011CLASWIff 20R001100010001-4
B. Development and improvement of the employ:
ment offices.
1. Develop more employment agencies in Sai:- From 1 January
gon, Bien Hoa, Danang, Thua Thien and Nha: 1971 through 31
Trang. Improve their organization and pro-: December 1971
vide them with specialists.
2. Develop specialized employment officers.: From 1 January
Train them in accordance with international : 1971 through 31
methods. Hold 3 courses in Saigon. December 1971
3. Improve methods of rapidly placing work-: From 1 January
ers by using such media as press, radio 1971 through 30
and television. June 1971
4. Improve techniques, form mobile em- From 1 January
ployment search teams to make regular 1971 through 30
solicitations for employment with large June 1971
firms and among labor circles instead of
awaiting labor requirements from employers:
5. Make plans for the placement of workers ; From 1 January
in the post war period within the framework ; 1971 through 31
of the Employment Plan and be ready to December 1971
regulate the labor market and avoid com-
motions when peace is restored.
6. Revise Labor regulations in force on From 1 January
employment offices in order to place re- 1971 through 31
strictions and controls on private employ- December 1971
ment organizations and individuals in order
to control the fees charged and to eliminate
deception of clients.
The Interministerial Manpower Coordinating Committee (IMMCC). Its role in the guidance and
coordination of vocational training programs of different ministries.
In its regular session held on 11 March 1970, the IMMCC found that although vocational training
is being conducted by the various Ministries, their training programs are different from one
another. Each Ministry works within its own field of interest. Moreover, diplomas and
graduation certificates issued by vocational training agencies are not equally recognized by
employers. In order to iron out these difficulties, the IMMCC has set up a Vocation Training
Sub-Committee composed of the representatives of the Ministries of National Defense, Veterans,
Social Welfare, Chieu Hoi, Economy, Education, Land Reform, Agriculture and Fishery
Development, Public Works, and Labor, the General Directorates of Planning, Civil Service,
Office of the Minister without portfolio in charge of Reconstruction, and Employers and Work-
ers' representatives. The Chairman of this Sub-Committee is the Director for Technical and
Professional Education (Ministry of Education). The Sub-Committee held its first meeting on
11 September 1970. An effective plan of activities designed to unify the vocational training
agencies of the different ministries and to enable them to attain better results was developed.
III-H-7
Approved For Release 2OOU NC LASSUIL 2OR001100010001-4
 -Lp
Approved For R
N/l1 [D'8OO 720R001 100010001-4
T F
It: has three main aimes:
1. Standardize short-term vocational training programs.
2. Standardize teaching methods.
3, Standardize the values of various types of certificates or diplomas issued.
It also planned to study the creation of a National Vocational Training Committee (NVTC) on
a tripartite basis: representatives of employers, employees and the Government.
Planning activities of the sub--ommittee are long-range. Its first task for 1971willbe to collect
and study necessary data to have a clear idea of the nation's vocational training requirements
in order to draft a uniform and more effective vocational training program. It will try to
concentrate all vocational training activities and agencies into a single ministry or a few
ministries to avoid duplication in personnel, finance, and facilities.
A. With the Ministry of Defense, the Ministry of Economy, the Office of the Minister of
State in charge of Reconstruction, the National Statistics Institute, the General Director-
ates of Planning and Civil Service in the implementation of the Employment and Labor
programs especially in the compilation of the National Classification of Occupations.
13. With the Ministry of Information and employers and workers organizations in the imple-
mentation of the Labor Relations Program and training of workers' representatives and
labor union officers.
C. With the Ministry of Defense, Ministry of Veterans, Ministry for Social Welfare,
Ministry of Chieu Hoi, Ministry of Economy, Ministry of Education, Ministry of Land
Reform, Agriculture and Fishery Development, Ministry of Public Works, Office of the
Minister of State for Reconstruction, General Directorate of Planning, General Director-
ate for Civil Service, and General Directorate of Youth, in the implementation of voca-
tional training and placement programs and in the standardization of vocational training
programs of the various ministries.
Report of achievements and the results attained during the phases of this plan by the
IMMCC as well as by the Ministry of Labor must be centralized in the Ministry of Labor
in order to forward periodical reports to the Prime Minister's Office and the Central
Pacification and Development Coordination Center.
III-H- 8
Approved For R[0AS8I1FDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004 ftC AS f D0R001100010001-4
In 1971, the Public Works Plan will be reoriented toward the attainment of the long-range
objectives of national self-sufficiency and self-development. Following are the purposes of
this plan and the methods of carrying it out:
A. PURPOSES:
1. Modernize all existing electricity and water supply systems as well as civil engineer-
ing works and set up new ones in order to establish a basis,and pave the way, for the
development of the national economy.
2. Increase people's comfort in order to improve their health and boost their productivi-
ty, build and encourage people to build new dwellings, increase electricity and water
output, purify drinking water, and install sewer systems.
3. Pay particular attention to supplying of electricity and water to the poor and labor-
ing people.
4. Carry out Law 8/70 in favor of disabled servicemen by completing the construction
of disabled servicemen's villages as scheduled.
B. METHODS:
The Ministry of Public Works will endeavor to encourage the self-development spirit of
the local population by such actions as offering loans for housing construction and helping
in the formation of electricity and water consumers' cooperatives. Projects which are
beyond local means will be undertaken by the Ministry of Public Works itself.
II. CONCEPT.
Eight main goals have been put forward for the implementation of this plan:
A. Repair 3, 200 km of road for both National and Inter-provincial roads.
B. Raise electricity output up to 50% in Saigon and 100% in the provinces.
C. Suppbrt the electrification project of resettlement centers and the formation of rural co-
operatives.
D. Increase the supply of drinking water for an additional 100,000 inhabitants in Saigon.
E. Supply drinking water to an additional 300,000 inhabitants in the Provinces.
F. Implement a drinking water purification program.
G. Complete the overall town planning map for large provincial capitals and improve
Approved For Release 2006L AS
JFft20R001 100010001-4
 Approved For D?N7 2U i EIURDP80R01720R001100010001-4
important rural towns.
Support local housing development projects.
III. IMPLEMENTATION.
A. Goal 1
1. Repair 3,200 km of road for both national and inter-provincial roads. The main
task of the civil engineering branch in 1971 is to repair 3,200 km of national and inter-
provincial roads. 1,600 km will be repaired with National Budget funds and another
1,600 km with US AID Budget funds (this does not include 700 km of road to be repair-
ed by US Engineer troops and a number of other kilometers to be repaired by RVNAF
Engineer troops).
2. Repair and build 1,330 km of local roads of which 80 km will be repaired or built
with National Budget funds and 1,250 km with Pacification & Development Budget
funds.
3. Build 5,000 m of bridge: 2,000 m on national and inter-provincial roads, 3,000 m on
local roads. The capacity of new bridges to be built on national, inter-provincial
roads is 35 tons, and that of new bridges to be built on local roads is 18 tons as com-
pared to present average capacity of 12 tons.
4. Other projects: Continue the construction of two 100-ton ferry-boats and two 60-ton
ferry-boats; build sewers in urban areas .
'3. Goal 2
Increase electricity output by 50% in Saigon and 100% in Provinces.
1. Increase electricity output of Vietnam Electricity Company (Cong Ty Dien Luc Viet-
nam).
a.
b.
Present electricity outputs:
In Provinces - 66 MW
Electricity program for 1971.
Total of electricity output in Saigon will be 126 MW broken down as follows:
(1)
Diesel engined Power Plant in Cho Quan : 35 MW
(2)
Diesel engined Power Plant in Ba Queo :
30 MW
(3)
Gas-turbine Power Plant in Thu Duc :
30 MW
(4)
Diesel engined Power Plant in Bien Hoa : 33 MW
Total electricity output for the provinces will be 69 MW broken down as follows:
Electricity output will be increased by twenty 400-KW generators, thirty 1,200-
III-I-2
Approved For RBNc*.I FIEIIDP8OROI 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release thILMIFET
KW generators and thirty 500-KW generators in power stations (this does not in-
clude 160 MW to be produced by Danhim plant which is under repair).
Electricity conveyance: The voltage of each of the 66/15-KV transforming
stations in Ba Queo and Dong Nai areas will be increased to 40,000-KVA to
convey electric energy to new plants.
The Saigon-Tan An-My Tho 66-KV line, 60 km long, will be installed to sup-
ply electricity to Tan An and My Tho areas. Two new transforming stations
will be set up, in Tan An (6 MVA) and My Tho (12 MVA).
Electricity distribution: Several 15-KV interrupting stations receiving elec-
tricity from 66/15-KV transforming stations will be set up in the Capital.
It is planned to set up electricity transformer boxes and transformer de-
vices mounted on pole tops in populous areas (120,000-KW).
Electricity transforming outputs planned for 1971:
- 40,000-KVA, low voltage, for public utility;
- 8Q,000-KVA, low voltage, for industry.
Approximately 150 km of aerial and underground 15-KV cables will be instal-
led.
Electricity Conveyance and Distribution.
The establishment of 15-KV and power distribution systems is. planned for some
provinces. This work includes: completion of projects in Vung Tau, Phuoc Le,
Long Khanh, Phuoc Long, Binh Long, Kien Tuong, Quang Tin, Quang Ngai, Kon-
turn, Darlac, and Vinh Long; implementation of new projects in Tuy Hoa, Kon-
turn, Dalat, Long An, Go Cong and Chuong Thien; and strengthening and extending
of electric lines in the Provinces where power outputs are to be raised; i.e., Song
Pha-Phan Rang 66-KV line (reinforce the 31-KV line and the Song Pha-Dalat
transformer stations), and the Vung Tau-Phuoc Le-Long Hai lines.
The electricity conveyance and distribution program includes the establishment
of 80 MVA power transformers and 300 km of electric lines. This project will
be completed by the end of 1971 or in early 1972.
Transfer of power plants from Provinces where power supply has been
increased in order to provide electricity for 41 District towns. One hundred
200-KW generators will be installed where power stations have been established
recently.
Support the electrification project of resettlement centers and the formation of rural co-
operatives:
Carry out the Village Self Development Program including the installation of one hun-
dred 50-KW generators and one hundred 40-KW generators.
Forty rural cooperatives will be formed.
Eight temporary refugee centers will receive support for electrification projects.
111-1-3
it ek Approved For Release 201J f CtA10 0010001-4
 Approved FINtWnIntoIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
Technical assistance will be given to refugee camps of Vietnamese nationals repatri-
ated from Cambodia.
D. Goal 4
Increase the supply of drinking water for an additional 100,000 inhabitants in Saigon.
1. Increase the volume of water supply:
a. Raise the volume of water supply from 370,000 cubic meters per day to 400,000
cubic meters per day.
b. Dig two deep wells to provide water to areas distant from the water supply sys-
tem.
Z. Water Distribution.
a. Lay water mains and replace damaged pipes.
(1) In Saigon
- Xom-Cui Street
- Luc-Tinh Street through Phu Lam (Delta Cape) to Phu Dinh
- Ba Hom Street (Section
- 46 Street (Section 2)
- Bai Say Street
- Pham The Hien Street (Section 2)
- Trinh Minh The Street (Ton Dan-Trinh Minh The)
Total : 8,430 m
(2) In Gia Dinh
- Van Kiep Street
- Village Road 14
- Bui Thi Xuan Street
- Ky Con-Tran Ke Xuong Street
Total : 3,700 m
(3) Replace damaged pipes in:
- Bach Dang Street
- Gia Long Street
111-1-4
Approved Fo#LkSIS!IfI EcB&RDP80R01720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20LASSFFD720R001100010001-4
- Hai Ba Trung Street
- Van Don Quay
Total : 4,610 m
b. Lay water mains and install water-meters for dwelling quarters and improved
areas.
- Thanh Da housing area
- Phu Tho Hoa housing area
- Tan Quy Dong housing area
- Thu Duc University housing area
- Soldiers' Village
Total : 18, 349 m
c. Lay 100 mm and 150 mm pipes along alleys: 80,000 m
d. Install water-meters for private houses: 20,000 m
E. Goal 5
Increase the supply of drinking water for an additional 300,000 inhabitants in Provinces.
Increase water supply and distribution.
1. In Cities: Increase 1970 water supply and distribution in Provincial Capitals of Phan
Thiet, Vung Tau, Go Cong, Chau Phu, Qui Nhon, Can Tho by 50% compared with
1970.
2. In District towns: Increase water supply and distribution in District towns by 100%
compared with 1970.
a. Modernize existing water-works and build new ones, lay water-pipes in Tan Bui
(Lam Dong), Don Duong (Tuyen Duc), Dai Phuoc (Bien Hoa), Trang Bang (Hau
Nghia), Ben Luc (Long An), Long Dien (Phuoc Tuy), Hieu Thien (Tay Ninh), My
Luong (An Giang), Thanh Khiet (Ba Xuyen), Trung Luong (Dinh Tuong), Ha Tien
(Kien Giang), Thoai Son (An Giang), An Huu, Luong Hoa Lac, Vinh Kim (Dinh
Tuong), Co Do (Phong Dinh), Cho Lach, Tra On (Vinh Long), Vong The (An
Giang), Thoi Long (Phong Dinh), Minh Duc, Tam Binh and Vung Liem (VinhBinh).
b. Dig deep wells in: Dinh Quan (Long Khanh), Di Linh, Bao Loc (Lam Dong),
Hai Yen, Dam Doi (An Xuyen), Long Dien (Phuoc Tuy), Cat Lo (Vung Tau), Ha
Tien, Kien Tan, Kien Xung, Kien Binh (Kien Giang), Trang Bom (Hau Nghia),
Dinh Quan, Kiem Tan (Long Khanh), Dai Lam, Thanh Tri (Ba Xuyen), Vinh
Xuong, Vinh Phuoc (Khanh Hoa), Nhon Trach, Ho Nai (Bien Hoa), Dinh Tuong,
Phong Dinh, Tan Binh (Gia Dinh), Phu Vinh (Vinh Binh), and Long Ngai (Tay
Ninh).
III-I-5
Approved For Release 200UNCLAU BIQD'20RO01100010001-4
 Approved ForO1tVA1NV1t6-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
F. Goal. 6.
Carry out the drinking water purification program:
In 1971, the Ministry of Public Works will install chlorinating purifiers in the water sup-
ply systems of Qui Nhon, Vung Tau, and Nha Trang, and a fluoridating apparatus at the
Bien. Hoa waterworks.
G. Goal. 7
Complete the overall town planning map for large Provincial Capitals, and improve im-
portant rural towns. Tasks:
1. Drafting of town planning maps for Provincial Capitals:
a. Da Nang = Complete the drafting of maps
b. Can Tho =
c. Rach Gia =
d. Bac Lieu =
e. Nha Trang = Complete the drafting of maps and submit them for approval
k. New planning map for Di An City: Complete the survey on the planning map.
2. Amendment of town planning maps:
a. Da Lat (Arrete of 27 Apr 43): Complete the City planning map.
b. Phu Cuong (Approved on 22 May 69): Map already completed and submitted for
approval.
c. Khanh Hung (Ba Xuyen) (Approved on 24 Apr 65): Map already completed and sub-
mitted for approval.
d. Chau Phu (Chau Doc) (Approved on 26 Aug 66): Planning Map already completed.
3. Improvement of plans for important cities and rural towns.
a. Saigon
- Saigon administrative and diplomatic areas: Complete the plans for these areas.
111-1-6
Approved ID,RCLA F4 9 DCIA-RDP80RO1720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20INCLAMO20R001100010001-4
- Saigon Railroad Station area: Complete the survey on the plan of this area.
b. Gia Dinh
Gia Dinh central area: Complete road-map and improvement plan.
c.
d.
e.
- Thi Nghe area:
Quang Tri
- Cam Lo area:
Vung Tau
- Central area:
Ninh Thuan
Complete road-map and improvement plan.
Complete the plan of this area.
Complete the plan of this area.
- Ninh Chu-Van Son area: Complete the plan of this area.
f.
Phuoc Le
- New market area: Complete the plan of this area.
g.
Long An
- Cau Voi area: Complete the plan of this area and submit it for approval.
h.
Danang
- Xuong Binh, Thanh Thau, Thuan Binh areas: Complete the plans for these
areas and submit them for approval.
H. Goal 8
Support local housing development projects.
1. Disabled servicemen's Villages. Complete the following by the scheduled time limits:
- Phu Tho Hoa and Tan Qui Dong 800 units
- Thu Duc 3,000 units
- Pham The Hien 448 units
2. Housing development program in Provinces and Cooperatives.
a. Make loans to Provinces to permit them to build civil servants' dwelling quar-
ters. The total cost is estimated at 350 million piasters; and the number of
apartments to be built is between 700 and 1,000.
b. An estimated 150 million piasters will be loaned to 700 members of civil ser-
vants' cooperatives. Local housing development programs depend upon many
factors such as housing requirements and the capability of those who will benefit
Approved For Release 200M =IF0fD20RO01100010001-4
 Approved For Re 10A1 FIMP80R0l720R001100010001-4
to contribute.
3. The housing development program of the General Office of Housing.
a.
Complete construction projects being carried out in the following areas:
- Vinh Hoi (2 phases)
279 housing units
- Cong Ly
25
If
- Yen Do
32
- Thanh Da
1,832
- Tan Qui Dong
84
- Phu Tho Hoa
138
b. Prepare to carry out the improvement program for the Thu Thien area (9th
Precinct, Saigon).
c. In Nha Trang: The work on the reconstruction program of Cho Dam area will
be completed for two lots:
- Lot A 120 housing units
- Lot B 192 11
IV. COORDINATION.
In order to satisfactorily achieve the above goals of the local self-development program
of the Ministry of Public Works, coordination with the following agencies is required:
A. Coordination of the Ministry of Defense to expedite the immediate detachment of the
Ministry of Public Works personnel who are serving in the armed forces and the recruit-
ment of 400 servicemen of category 2 to be trained and sent to different Provinces.
B. Assistance from all Military Regions and Sectors in the maintenance of security for
work-sites.
C. Assistance from the Ministry of Economy in facilitating the importation of materials
required by the Saigon Water Supply Office.
D. Support and cooperation from friendly agencies such as Ministry of Information and
Ministry of Health in the purification of drinking water.
Approved For R CLASSIRDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20UtLAMI20R001100010001-4
Appendix J: Post and Communications
To support the 1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan and at the same
time serve the people and increase the revenues of the National Budget, the Ministry
of Communications and Post, Telephone and Telegraph will carry out a number of pro-
jects related to the State-Controlled Railroads, the Dredging Agency, and the Post,
Telephone, and Telegraph General Directorate.
The technical branches of the Ministry of Communications and Post,Telephone and Tele-
graph, which are mentioned in the above program, are for the most part related to
national economic activities. The responsible agencies, therefore,must establish opera-
tional procedures to serve the majority of people, increase the efficiency of public
utilities, fix rates suitable to the financial capacity of the people, and , at the same
time, increase the revenue of the National Budget.
III. IMPLEMENTATION.
A. State-Controlled Railroads.
1. Objectives:
a. Reconstruct the railroad system based on present programs for completion
of the "Trans-Vietnam Railroad" (Saigon-Quang Tri) and increase the
revenue of the State-Controlled Railroads.
b. Repair 20 DIESEL Locomotives and 150 cars.
2. Operational phases:
a. Priority 1:
- Reconstruct the railroad section between Long Khanh and Song Long
Song (184 km).
- Estimated duration: Nine months.
- Required fund: VN$ 89, 000, 000
b. Priority 2:
- Reconstruct the railroad section between Phu Cat and Duong Son.
- Estimated duration: One year.
Approved For Release 2004MC1ASSU 'DOR001100010001-4
 Approvec~IAS1: CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
a. The office in charge of Railroad Program will be established at Vietnam
Railroad Station, 2 Dien Hong Square, Saigon, Telephone No 90105 and
90106.
b. To ensure security for the "Trans-Vietnam Railroad's close coordination
is required among local security agencies, PSDF Organizations, and rail-
road personnel.
On the third day of each week, the State Controlled Railroads will forward a
weekly report on operational progress to the Ministry of Communications and
Post, Telephone and Telegraph.
On the 30th day of each month, the Ministry of Communications and Post,
Telephone and Telegraph will forward a monthly report to the Central Paci-
fication and Development Council/ Coordinating Center.
B. DREDGING AGENCY.
1. Objectives:
a. To increase the output of the dredges to 4, 000, 000 m3 per year and increase
revenue so that the Dredging Agency can be financially self-supporting.
b. To meet the requirements of Provinces in MR 2, 3, and 4 the following
priorities are established:
(1) Clear out, maintain, and develop Inter-Military Regional and Inter-
Provincial waterways.
(2) Support and improve Province capitals with special geographical pro-
blems.
(3) Support housing projects.
2. Operational phases:
The Operational schedule for dredging in 1971 has been already drafted. The
following provinces have priority to use dredges:
a. Kien Phong
b. An Xuyen
c. Chau Doc
d. Sa Dec
e. Ba Xuyen
f. Kien Tuong
III-J-2
ApproveUNCLASS1f 1 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2UWtJJ1 AS r01720R001100010001-4
to L
Other Provinces will be informed when to be ready for the implementation of
dredging projects as prescribed in the consideration session held in September
and October 1970.
a. The office in charge of the dredging program will be located in the Central
Pacification and Development Council Headquarters (Coordination Center)
Telephone No 907209 and Dredging Agency at 55 Pasteur Street, Saigon,
Telephone No 24382.
b. Standing operating procedures were issued by the Ministry of Communica-
tions and Post, Telephone and Telegraph in November 1970.
c. Agencies or Provinces benefiting from the dredging program are responsi-
ble for the following:
(2) Ensure security for dredges and assist the dredging work site in
making a daily report on operational progress.
Dredging work chiefs are responsible for making a daily report on opera-
tional programs to the Central Pacification and Development Council/
Coordinating Center and the Dredging Agency.
On the 30th of each month, the Ministry of Communications and Post,
Telephone and Telegraph will forward a monthly report to the Central
Pacification and Development Council/ Coordinating Center.
a. Complete the PTT organization to Village level,establish 30 additional
Post stations (in Districts), and 502 Village Post Substations (see TAB 1
attached).
b. Provide telephones for the Prefecture (4, 000 sets); Da Nang, Qui Nhon,
Nha Trang, and Can Tho (1, 000 sets for each city).
The Ministry of Communications and Post, Telephone and Telegraph can carry
out the above mentioned objectives by July 1971 if the security situation is
improved in Villages; that is, Police Sub-stations must be established in Villages
first.
The Ministry of Communications and Post, Telephone and Telegraph has
allocated the necessary funds for 1971.
III-J-3
Approved For Release 2AW M110720R001100010001-4
 Appo tr jg3jflj 04/01: CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
a. The office in charge of the Rural Post Program will be established at the
Post Directorate, 2 Kennedy Square, Saigon, Telephone No 23002.
b. Provinces and Districts are responsible for assisting in the selection of
dedicated personnel characterized by a spirit of service for management
of Post Stations and Post Substations.
On the third day of each week the General Directorate of Post, Telephone,
and Telegraph will forward a weekly report on operational progress to the
Ministry of Communication and Post, Telephone and Telegraph.
On the 30th day of each month, the Ministry of Communication and Post,
Telephone, and Telegraph will forward a monthly report to the. Central
Pacification and Development Council/ Coordinating Center.
AppU [rA5 D4/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2001JNOLAS IftED201001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
TAB 1: Rural Post, to Appendix J: Post and Communications
South Vietnam
1. An Giang
2. An Xuyen
3. Ba Xuyen
4. Bac Lieu
5. Bien Hoa
6. Binh Duong
7. Binh Long
8. Binh Tuy
9. Chau Doc
10. Chuong Thien
11. Dinh Tuong
12. Gia Dinh
13. Go Cong
14. Hau Nghia
15. Kien Giang
16. Kien Hoa
17. Kien Phong
Number of Village Post Sub-
Stations
III-J-1-1
Approved For Release 2004U 1 LA-$ fFIDORO01100010001-4
 Approved For RUJCUISSUUDP80R01720R001100010001-4
18. Kien Tuong
19. Long An
20. Long Khanh
21. Phong Dinh
2Z. Phuoc Long
23. Phuoc Tuy
24. Sa Dec
25. Tay Ninh
26. Vinh Binh
27. Vinh Long
HIGHLANDS OF CENTRAL VIETNAM.
1. Tuyen Duc
2. Darlac
3. Kontum
4. Lam Dong
5. Pleiku
6. Phu Bon
7. Quang Duc
ITotal:
MIDLANDS OF CENTRAL VIETNAM.
1. Binh Dinh
2. Binh Thuan
3. Khanh Hoa
4. Ninh Thuan
5. Phu Yen
6. Quang Nam
Approved For F4
ift sj'fJiD2DP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : ClNrt_OA Iffff O10001-4
7. Quang Ngai
8. Quang Tin
9. Quang Tri
10. Thua Thien
South Vietnam
Highlands of Central Vietnam
Midlands of Central Vietnam
RECAPITULATION
22
7
III-J.l-3
Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : C14#CU g i[fl10001-4
 Approved For Release 20IMUSMIM20R001100010001-4
Appendix K: Rural Credit
I. GENERAL.
A. SITUATION.
The Agricultural Development Bank is the only Bank which directly contributes to
agricultural development in Vietnam in the fields of production credit, financing for com-
mercialization, and consumption of agriculture and fishery products in the market.
In the past two years (1968 and 1969), the value of credits distributed was about
VN$ 4,6 billion per year. In 1970, the value of distributed credits may amount to 8 bil-
lion, and in 1971, the Agricultural Development Bank, according to its budget, plans to
distribute credits of VN$ 9 billion. Not counting the funds deposited by private persons,
the capital provided by the Government to the Agricultural Development Bank through
special credit programs, totals about VN$ 5 billion, and can only meet from 5% to 6% of
the agricultural credit requirements throughout the country. Thus, if people borrow an
average amount of VN$ 50,000, the Bank can only lend money to 100,000 families a year,
which is too modest a figure.
Therefore, for operational effectiveness the Agricultural Development Bank must use
all available means and execute all plans that can help increase its operating capital in
order to more adequately finance activities of agriculture, forestry, fishery, animal
husbandry, and rural handicraft industries.
In 1971, the Agricultural Development Bank will increase its funds for loans, support
the establishment of 24 additional Rural Banks, assist and guide in the formation of Vil-
lage Credit Committees and training of personnel for their management, and support the
activities of other organizations in the field of credit such as cooperatives and Farmers'
Associations.
In 1971, the Agricultural Development Bank will concentrate its efforts on the crea-
tion of additional capital in order to finance agricultural activities more adequately than
in the past years, especially to achieve the agricultural development objectives of the
"1971 Community Defense & Local Development Plan." Besides the additional funds to be
requested from the National Budget and Foreign Aid chapters, credit sources for agricul-
tural development can be provided by people's contributions through the encouragement
and support of private persons to set up Rural Banks. These banks will collect shares
from their members and funds deposited by the people and lend money to various local
elements of small agricultural business, and handicraft industry.
The Agricultural Development Bank will be the financial source for medium and long-
term development projects. Therefore, this Bank will actively support the establishment
of other credit organizations to replace the ADB in the financing of short-term projects.
III-K-1
Approved For Release 200111C = 10001000 1-4
 Approved For RVIrr YS InI DP80R01720R001100010001-4
III. IMPLEMENTATION.
A. ORGANIZATION.
a. The ADB Board of Administration will request the release of the remaining sum
of VN$ 1,075,000,000 out of the total fund of VN$ 2,575,000,000 which has been
approved by the Cabinet Council since 1969. Additional funds will be requested
depending on future needs.
b. Establish additional ADB sub-offices in Phuoc Tuy, Quang Duc, Kontum, and
Phu Bon Provinces.
c. Increase the rate of interest on loans so that it corresponds with the rate of in-
terest to be paid on regular bank deposits of the people.
a. Four Rural Banks were established in 1969 and ten others will be completed by
the end of February 1971.
b. In 1971, 24 additional Rural Banks will be established in localities where secu-
rity and economic conditions meet required standards. In order to achieve the
goals planned for 1971, all ADB Branches and Sub-Offices will increase the pub-
licity and propaganda effort on ADB policy and encourage the establishment of
Rural Banks. At the same time, the Central Section of the Agricultural Devel-
opment Bank in charge of guidance in the establishment and management of Ru-
ral Banks will be properly reinforced.
3. Establishment of Village Credit Committees:
a. The Ministry of Rural Development will distribute funds to villages. Province
Pacification and Development Councils will set up Credit Committees in villages
which are not yet participating in the 1970 Credit Program so that these Com-
mittees can consider applications for short term loans under VN$ 50,000.
b. Agencies responsible for collecting money contributed by the villages and for
training of personnel of the Village Credit Committee in various branches and
sub-offices will be strengthened.
c. ADB Branches and Sub-Offices will train members of Village Credit Committees
for one month following the establishment of these Committees and guide them in
their initial operations.
4. Development of other pri vate credit organizations outside Rural Banks.
a. In addition to the Rural Banks, the Agricultural Development Bank will encour-
age and assist in the establishment of other private credit organizations such as
Cooperatives and Farmers Associations.
b. The Agricultural Development Bank will reinforce the Credit Sections at the
ADB Branches and Sub-Offices in order to provide positive support to local
Cooperatives and Farmers Associations.
Approved For R UCH
no
I FIFIDP80RO1720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200 Lct D20R001100010001-4
c. In addition, the ADB Credit Service will be reinforced in order to study and im-
plement medium and long-term development projects. In 1971, because private
organizations will not yet be completely operational, the Agricultural Develop-
ment Bank will still be responsible for providing short term loans for produc-
tion in localities where farmers and fishermen cannot borrow money from Vil-
lage Credit Committees or Rural Banks.
B. PLANNING.
1.
Based on the activities of 1970, the loan plan for 1971 of the Agricultural Develop-
ment Bank will be implemented with a total fund of VN$ 8,900,000,000 to be distri-
buted to the following programs:
- Loan for production of miracle rice
VN$ 800,000,000
- Loan for support to Land Reform operations
VN$ 40(1,000,000
- Loan for mechanization of Agriculture and Fishery
industries
VN$ 700,000,000
- Loan for development of pig and chicken raising
VN$ 600,000,000
- Loan for increase of fishery production
VN$ 400,000,000
- Loan for encouraging more people to cultivate
sorghum and bananas
VN$ 750,000,000
- Loan for Pacification & Development operations
VN$ 700,000,000
- Loan for guidance in Agricultural Credit
VN$ 350,000,000
Loan fbr agricultural material and equipment pur-
chasing fund (purchasing operations, fertilizers,
insecticides, Agriculture & Fishery machinery, etc.)VN$ 3,000,000,000
- Loan for development of farmers' organization
movement
VN$ 200,000,000
- Ordinary bank credits
VN$ 1,000,000,000
2. Allocations for each program will be distributed to ADB Branches and Sub-Offices
based on local needs.
3. In 1971, upon the receipt of lists of the villages participating in the Rural Develop-
ment Credit Program, including the funds allocated by MORD to each village and
the villages' voluntary contributions, the Agricultural Development Bank will, in
accordance with instructions received on the management procedures of this pro-
gram, provide its share of funds. The implementation of local credit programs
will be in accordance with the authority granted each echelon: Village Credit
Committee, ADB Sub-Office Branch, and Central Agency.
4. As for Rural Banks, the Agricultural Development Bank expects that each District
throughout the country will have one (as in the Philippines). In the next 5 years, if
conditions are favorable, 200 Rural Banks may be established in 200 Districts.
II III-K-3
Approved For Release 20044MU91II~~FRO~~Vnn
OR001100010001-4
 Approved For RO t0A"1FtDI8oRol72oRool 100010001-4
Based on anticipated progress and initial estimates of the Agricultural Development
Bank, 24 Rural Banks scheduled for 1971 may be set up in the following Districts:
Dong Ha (Quang Tri), Huong Tra (Thug Thien), Tu Nghia (Quang Ngai), Tuy Phuoc
(Binh Dinh), An Nhon (Binh Dinh), Tuy Hoa (Phu Yen), Vinh Xuong (Khanh Hoa),
Thanh Hai (Ninh Thuan), Hai Long (Binh Thuan), Trang Bang (Hau Nghia), Long Le
(Phuoc Tuy), Phu Khuong (Tay Ninh) Cai Lay (Dinh Tuong), Lap Vo (Sa Dec), Thanh
Tri (Ba Xuyen), Long Phu (Ba Xuyen), Ke Sach (Ba Xuyen), Phong Phu (Phong Dinh),
Hong Ngu (Kien Phong), Chau Thanh (Vinh Long), Hoa Vang (Quang Nam), Xuan Loc
(Long Khanh), Kiem Tan (Long Khanh), and Chan Thanh (Vinh Binh).
5. The technical training program for personnel and cadre of the 24 Rural Banks (in-
cluding the Board of Directors, Board of Managers, and managing personnel) has
scheduled that at least 10 persons must be trained for each Rural Bank. Six training
courses will be organized to be conducted every other month. Each course has 40
students and will last one month.
Moreover, emphasis will be placed on management guidance of each rural bank and
proper control of activity which must conform with the policy of the national bank.
6. In the establishment of Village Credit Committees and dissemination of new credit
policy, all directors or comptrollers of ADB Branches and Sub-Offices must coordi-
nate closely with and actively support Village Administrative Committees and Village
Councils.
The training courses for Village Credit Committees will be held at Province Capitals
or District Towns. Each course may be organized for 50 trainees or under and the
training program may be arranged for two days (16 hours). These training courses
will be organized with the support of the Province PD Coordination Center. The
main training document will be the Directive on Management of the Rural Develop-
ment Credit Program.
7, Because the General Commissariat for Agricultural Credit and Cooperatives was
dissolved, Cooperatives and Farmer Associations no longer have close contact with
the National Office of Agricultural Credit which is presently called the Agricultural
Development Bank. In order to renew a sense of cooperation and mutual support in
the achievement of common objectives, regular meetings between the Agricultural
Development Bank and Cooperatives and Farmer Associations need to be organized.
In order to enable the 1971 Rural Credit Program to attain good results, the Agricultural
Development Bank must be supported by local Pacification and Development Councils at
all echelons and work in close coordination with the following Ministries and Govern-
ment Agencies:
1. Ministry of Land Reform, Agriculture and Fishery Development. In the formulation
of Credit Programs for the branches of agriculture, forestry, fishery, and animal
husbandry, and support programs for Land Reform, Cooperatives and Farmer Associ-
ations.
2. Ministry of Rural Development. In the implementation of Rural Credit Development
Programs.
III-K-4
Approved For VINCLA 1F1JSRDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004NLC~S1Y1[O0R001100010001-4
3. Ministry of Finance, Ministry of Land Reform, Agriculture and Fishery Develop-
ment, and National Bank. In the program for establishment and guidance in the
management of Rural Banks in Districts.
4. Ministry of Interior. In activities needing the support of local Governments of all
echelons, and in operations urging villages to increase their revenues in order to
have additional resources to take part in the Village Credit Program.
5. Ministry of Information. In the publicity of the new credit policy, dissemination of
information relating to the utility of the establishment of Rural Banks, and appeal
to rural people to save money.
6. Ministry of Finance, National Bank, and Director General of Budget and Foreign
Aid: In all problems pertaining to the request for increase of operating capital for
the Agricultural Development Bank.
D. Reports.
1. All ADB Branches and Sub-Offices in Provinces must forward periodic reports to the
Central Agricultural Development Bank and at the same time notify their respective
Province Pacification and Development Coordinating Centers about these reports.
The above reports will also be forwarded to conerned agencies regarding separate
task included in each program.
2. The Agricultural Development Bank will exploit these periodic reports received
from the provinces and forward a recapitulation to the Central Pacification and
Development Coordinating Center and Ministry of Land Reform, Agriculture and
Fishery Development or Ministry of Rural Development, depending on the type
of program.
Approved For Release 2004/0:CLA 'EIL001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200U11C L - 920R001100010001-4
In 1970, the Central Pacification and Development Council has provided the Saigon Capital,
Provinces, and Autonomous Cities with funds for implementation of their Development
projects of Public Works, Irrigation, Public Health, Education, Agriculture, and Animal
Husbandry which were closely related to the Pacification and Development objectives.
Furthermore, in order to increase responsibilities and the power of the elected institutions
and for promotion of the spirit of community cooperation between the people and the govern-
ment, the Central Pacification and Development Council (CPDC) also has allocated the Sai-
gon Capital, Province and City Councils funds to execute those public interest projects
within their jurisdiction.
Last year the Capital, Province, and City Self-Development Program brought about very
encouraging results. It has succeeded in bringing basic facilities to the people. The pro-
gram has also created favorable conditions for the development of the spirit of community
cooperation and promoted rapid success of pacification. Therefore, the Program will
continue to be implemented in 1971, financed by the following two funds:
A. National Fund for Local Development, placed under the management of CPDC and
subordinate organs of Prefectural, Province and City Councils.
B. Province Development Funds, placed under the management of Prefectural, Province
and City Councils.
A. In order to meet those actual demands of local areas and to use those resources avail-
able, the study and choice of 1971 projects must be carefully made with the participa-
tion of the people.
Priority will go to those projects that directly support the implementation of the objec-
tives of the Community Defense and Local Development Plan.
B. Prefectural, Province, and City Councils are the sole organs competent to authorize
the use of Province Development Funds.
It is emphasized that these Councils should grant priority to those projects proposed
by people's groups, in order to support the government goal of promoting the spirit of
community cooperation through organizations of people's groups such as
Parents and Teachers Associations, Farmers Associations, Youth and Sports
groups, etc. . . .
III-L- 1
Approved For Release 200CLM1F4[020R001100010001-4
 i 720R001100010001-4
Approved For JIN ASS aOMW
These Councils also should positively control the implementation of those projects
which they have approved, so that they will strengthen their prestige and influence
among the people within their jurisdiction.
Every effort of the Councils should be supported by a carefully prepared information
plan, which must be properly implemented.
C. Procedures for implementing the program will be simplified so that projects can be
carried out easily and rapidly.
1. Local highway systems will continue to be improved to facilitate movement into
newly-pacified areas to expedite the return-to-village of war victims and to
create favorable conditions for the normalization of local administration.
2. Irrigation projects will continue to be financed in order to increase agricultural
output and farmers' incomes. The emphasis will be on repair of existing systems
which have been damaged or unused for a period of time.
3. In previous years, the education program has paid special attention to the expan-
sion of elementary education, thus creating a large need for secondary educa-
tion. In the meantime, the construction of secondary schools has failed to keep
pace with these increasing needs:
Consequently, in 1971, the Prefectural, Province and City P&D Councils must
carefully study and review the overall local educational requirements in order to
build the necessary additional secondary school classrooms so those pupils
who have completed their elementary education may further their studies at the
secondary level.
4. Other projects, such as those which support the War-Victims' program, the Public
Health, Agricultural, and Animal Husbandry Development programs, will also
continue to be financed.
5. Furthermore, an Imprest Fund will be granted to each Province and City to meet
unforeseen expenditures, so that the local P&D Councils can meet priority de-
mands as needed.
6. The National Fund for Local Development is managed and executed based on the
procedures established for the 1970 Province Development Funds.
1. The Capital, Province, and City Councils will convene public meetings to explain
to the people the objectives and use of the Province Development Fund, and the
procedures for proposing projects to be financed by this fund.
At these meetings, the Councils should inform the people that priority will be
granted by the Councils to those projects proposed by people's groups.
III-L-2
Approved For 1JINC A& jF ORDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 201LSffJ(M 720R001100010001-4
2. Projects may be selected from among those which are mentioned in the list of
priority development projects for 1971, or from those which are proposed and
submitted to the Council members by the people.
3. After review, the Prefectural, Province, and City Councils will prepare a list
of proposed projects to be forwarded to the Village Councils for posting at
government installations.
In the meantime, the Information Services and Agencies are requested to publicize
these projects extensively with all facilities available.
4. Two weeks after the list of projects is posted, the Capital, Province and City
Councils will convene an official meeting to examine and approve proposed
projects within their authorized fund limits. Pacification and Development
Coordination Center Chiefs, Service and Agency Chiefs, Village Councils,
Ward Chiefs, Street Quarter Chiefs, associations and people's groups in the
jurisdiction concerned are invited to attend this meeting.
The Prefectural mayor, Province Chiefs, and City Mayors in particular will not
participate in the said meeting, because their presence may unduly influence the
decision-making process of the meeting.
5. Before the Prefectural, Province, and City Councils reach a decision, the
technical services concerned must insure that they are capable of completing
the projects within the year.
6. Prefectural, Province, and City Councils approve projects based on the majority
of votes.
Projects for the construction of schools and dispensaries will not be approved
until the Services concerned can man these organizations with adequate teachers
and health personnel.
7. After approval of projects, Prefectural, Province and City Councils will prepare
a brief document for each project, using the following form:
a. Description of projects (including name of proposing individuals or peoples
groups).
b. Site of the project.
c. Funds supporting the project.
d. Number of beneficiaries.
e. Results of the vote (number of pros and cons).
This document will be signed and stamped by the chairman of the Capital, Pro-
vince, City Councils, and by the Service Chiefs concerned. The Service Chief's
signature only indicates that his Service is capable of completing the project within
the year.
This is an official and final document. Copies will be forwarded to Capital,
Province, and City P&D Councils for submission to the CPDC.
III-L-3
Approved For Release 208INgLAlW61[fl72OROO1100010001-4
 Approved IIftx Sift 0CIA-RDP80R0I 720R001 100010001-4
8. Capital, Province, and City P&D Councils are responsible for the execution of
those projects approved by Capital, Province, and City Councils.
9. Apart from those procedures for approval of projects as shown above, the
management and administration of the Province Development Fund will follow
the procedures applicable to the National Fund for Local Development.
In 1971, as in 1970, the establishment of both Province and Village Project Develop-
ment Profiles and Project Priority Lists will continue according to the following
procedures and schedules:
1. The ministries will begin drafting Province Development Profiles in March in
order for distribution to the provinces to be made by 15 April 1971.
2. Village Profiles will be prepared by Province P&D Councils and will be com-
pleted by 31 May 1971.
3. During June, Province Mobile Advisory Teams (PMATs) will conduct district
and village level seminars on the preparation of Village Priority Lists (VPLs).
These seminars will be based on the instructions contained in the update of the
Village Management Book (VMB).
4. In July, villages will prepare VPLs for 1972 projects. Selection of VSD projects
for 1972 will be carried out at the same time. (See Appendix M - VSD Program.
The procedures for preparing both these lists and obtaining popular approval
will be the same as those used for VSD project selection. Village priority pro-
jects to appear on the VPL and projects to be carried out with village resources
will appear on the VSD list. All proposed VSD projects should be included as
a separate section in the Village Priority Lists. Projects so included should
have the notation that no additional funding is required beyond that provided by
VSD and the villagers' contribution.
5. Decisions on all projects will be recorded in the VMB. VPLs will be forwarded
to the Province P&D Councils on 1 August.
6. Province Priority Lists (PPLs) will be prepared by the Province P&D Council
and be based as much as possible on the VPLs. The PPLs must be approved by
the Province Council prior to being forwarded to the CPDC on 1 September 1971.
7. CPDC will review PPLs in September and select projects for inclusion in the
1972 Ministry budgets.
8. A special task force committee will visit the provinces in November to review
progress on 1971 projects and to inform the Provinces of those projects selected
for inclusion in the 1972 Ministry budgets.
Approved V OCIA-RDP80RO1720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200U LcASlTItO2OROOl 100010001-4
Appendix M: Village Self-Development Program (VSD)
Village Self-Development Programs for 1969 and 1970 have provided the people with favor-
able conditions to execute development projects consistent with their aspirations. Al-
though these are small projects, they are practical and coincide with the local self-devel-
opment capabilities. The contribution of Peoples Common Activity Groups (PCAG's), in
manpower and resources, although not meeting desired goals, was very encouraging.
Community spirit has a special opportunity to develop with the accomplishment of pro-
jects, especially public interest projects. In 1971, there is a new direction in the Village
Self-Development Program. Income generating projects will be carried out together
with the Village Credit Program.
Those public interest projects themselves will still be implemented as before.
II. CONCEPT.
As in 1969 and 1970, the Village Self-Development Program for 1971 is aimed to:
A. Motivate the people to organize PCAGs in order to carry out projects in accordance
with their desires in the effort of building a progressive society.
B. Promote a democratic spirit in rural areas and develop the spirit of community co-
operation among the people and community cooperation between the people and the
government.
C. Create conditions for village authorities to plan Village Development programs and
manage village resources to advance to self-sufficiency.
D. Encourage Village authorities to hold talks with the people and make public the
receipts, expenditures, and progress of the Village Self-Development Program.
A. Unlike in 1970, income generating projects for 1971 will be carried out under the
Rural Development Credit Program.
1. Each village, whether elections have been held or not, will be granted a minimum
fund of VN$400, 000, without distinction between Lowland or Highland Villages,
rich or poor villages. Those villages having over 2, 500 inhabitants, will be
allocated an additional VN$50, 000 for every 500 extra inhabitants.
Approved For Release 2004/(UN CU SF1EDR001100010001-4
 Approved F IRVASMED A-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
2. The Village Council will decide the use of this fund based on the expression of
the people's desires before the Village General Assembly. The General Assem-
bly can only reserve for the Rural Development Credit Program a maximum of
50% of the fund allocated by MORD, to execute income generating projects.
However, it can use 100% of this fund for public interest projects.
3. The Agricultural Development Bank will allocate counterpart funds equal to the
fund which the Village General Assembly has reserved for Rural Development
Credit Program.
4. Should the village contribute its own resources to the Rural Development Credit
Program, the ADS will allocate counterpart capital.
5. If the village has contributed its own resources to public interest projects, MORD
will allocate a supplemental fund equal to the village contributional funds. How-
ever, the village's contribution must be at least 25% of the total fund reserved
for those public interest projects, and the MORD supplemental allocation will be
limited to VN$ 1, 000, 000. (For example, if village contributes VN$ 1, 200, 000,
MORD will allocate only VN$ 1, 000, 000. )
1. Public Utility Projects are divided into two categories as follows:
a. Category 1 comprises projects under VN$ 200, 000 each of which is approved
by the Village Council and implemented by PCAGs themselves. The
PCAGs can request the Village to intervene with Province for technical
assistance, if necessary.
b. Category 2 comprises projects of VN$ 200, 001 or over. After being approved
by Province Pacification and Development Council, these projects can be
implemented by the PCAGs themselves, or by the Province, at the request
of PCAGs.
2. Income producing projects (Rural Development Credit Program), The Village
Credit Committee receives applications for loans, makes a preliminarily review
and forwards them with comments to the Province ADB for consideration. Each
PCAG member can raise a maximum loan of VN$ 50, 000.
The people's contribution to public interest projects may be made in the form of labor,
resources, materials, etc... on a voluntary basis. In principle, the value of the
people's contribution must be equal to that of the Government allocation. However,
the Province PD council retains flexibility and may specify the percentage of the
people's contribution, based on their ability and capabilities of manpower, resources,
and materials of each village after consultation with the Province Council.
1. The Village Self-Development Program will be implemented in four phases
(omitting the counting of hamlet meetings as a phase) as follows-
III-M-2
Approved FU NC1 A SN/IEOIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004UNCLAS EBOR001100010001-4
Phase 1 Publicity of the Program
Phase 2 Motivation of the people to form PCAGs
Phase 3 Village General Assembly
Phase 4 Implementation of Projects
2. The program must be publicized extensively so the people will be aware of the
significance of the VSD Program, the funds allocated by Central authorities, and
the rights and interests of PCAG members. Village authorities must use the
Form "Survey of Demands and Application for Admission to PCAGs, " to enable
the people to directly voice their desires.
Upon receipt of funds, the village chief will make public Bulletin No. 1.
3. While motivating the people, special attention should be paid to the use of legal
people's organizations such as Parents and Teachers' Associations, Farmers'
Associations, PSDF, youth groups, etc.
4. The Village General Assembly will be convened not later than three weeks after
the list of public interest projects and bulletin No. 2 are posted. Based on the
majority of votes cast by those citizens present, the Village General Assembly
decides:
a. Division of VSD Funds to public interest projects and to the Rural Develop-
ment Credit Program.
b. Approve those public interest projects.
c. Village Council decides the use of VSD funds:
- One part of this fund will go to the support of public interest projects (100%
of the total fund may be used).
- One part is reserved for the Rural Development Credit Program for the imple-
mentation of income generating projects (this part will not exceed 50% of the
total funds).
5. Those who did not participate in PCAGs in 1969 and 1970, and who are not
presently in debt to the ADB, cooperatives, Farmers' Associations, or Rural
Development Banks, have priority to borrow money from the Rural Development
Credit Program after they have formed PCAGs.
F. Preparation of VSD Priority Projects for 1972.
The Village General Assembly will. be convened to discuss and decide those VSD
priority projects for 1972, and at the same time allocate the village contribution of
their own resources, based on project category. Villages are categorized as follows:
- Village which is 100% self-sufficient regarding its development budget.
- Village which is 50% self-sufficient regarding its development budget.
III-M-3
Approved For Release 2004/CgflCW&J1rJJr
DR001100010001-4
r(m
 Approved FTUREAUSMEDA-RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
- Village which is 25% self-sufficient regarding its development budget.
Completion dates and directives on the implementation of projects will be issued
later.
The choice of Village Self-Development priority projects for 1972 will be accomp-
lished in conjunction with drafting the Village Project Priority Lists for 1972.
(Appendix L describes the development program of the provinces, cities,
and autonomous cities supported by the National Fund for Local Development and
the Province Development Fund. )
G. VSD Program in Montagnard Villages.
1. Each Village will be assigned at least one SON THON RD (STRD) Cadre to assist
the Village Chief in implementing the VSD Program. This STRD Cadre will
organize the publicity of the Program, fill out the "Survey of Demands and ap-
plication for Admission to PCAGs" Form, help PCAGs select their leaders,
organize the Village General Assembly, assist PCAGs in implementing their
projects, and establish administrative forms.
2. The DEM Service Chief joins the Province Mobile Delegation to participate with
the Village General Assembly to estimate expenditures and review projects on
the spot.
a. Public interest projects should involve participation of many PCAG members.
b. Income generating projects will not be reviewed, except for those projects
for the cultivation of miracle rice, when the PPDC approves the project
and the Provincial Agriculture Service provides technical assistance.
c. The contribution to public interest projects by the Montagnards will be
based on the capability of each locality. Province PD Councils will
establish the contribution after consultation with the Province Council and
DEM Service.
Capable villages which desire to carry out income producing projects under
the P.D Credit Program must get approval from the Province PD Council, after
consultation with the Province Council and DEM Service.
a. The Province organizes Seminars every three months under the chairman-
ship of the Province Chief, concurrently Province PD Council Chairman,
or his representative. Participants in those Seminars include Province
Council representatives, the Manager of the Province in-service Training
Center, Chiefs of Services, Province Cadre, Control Chief, District Chiefs,
Deputy District Chiefs for Administration, and Chief of the Province P&D
Coordination Center.
b. The Province organizes mobile delegations headed by the Province Chief or
Province Deputy Chief for Administration, and composed of the Service
Chiefs concerned, to visit districts and villages for on-the-spot and speedy
III-M-4
Approved 1fCEASSt f DCIARDP8OROI 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200 AUW
UNt 1_ci 112OROOl 100010001-4
review and examination of projects. Also, the Province forms teams of
specialists in administration, finance, and technology to help PCAGs
implement projects.
c. The Province makes complete dissemination of recording forms down to
Villages in order to help PCAGs make detailed statements of project
accounts.
d. The Province invites Province Councillors to attend seminars and Village
General Assemblies, and join Province PD delegations to go to Villages and
Hamlets and supervise the implementation of the VSD program or to accept
completed works.
a. District Authorities should monitor and observe Village General Assemblies.
b. The District advises the Village Councils when the latter meet with difficul-
ties. (Example; during debates on Projectscompeting for limited materials
or funds. )
c. The District advises the Village Administrative Committee on financial
procedures and technical dossiers of projects.
d. The District supervises the Villages in establishing and keeping bulletin
boards current in publicizing projects, funds, and materials.
e. The District, if so delegated by Province, will guide the Province Accept-
ance Committee in-accepting completed projects.
a. The Village executes its plan based on those four phases mentioned in
Paragraph E. 1. above.
c. The Village establishes, and keeps current, bulletin boards for the publicity
of projects, funds and materials.
d. The village asks the Province for technical assistance and techni-
cians.
e. The Village guides PCAGs in the maintenance and repair of farm-machines
and tending and curing sick domestic animals, if requested by the PCAGs.
1. VSD program funds will go to the Village budget, under the "Self-Development"
Title (in replacement of old Title II, Casual Receipts and Casual Expenditures)
for the purpose of increasing the village government power, encouraging the
people to participate more actively in the program, and creating conditions where
the Village budget supports a portion of the VSD Program.
Approved For Release 2004JNC:LcA&S E!D0R001100010001-4
 Approved FUNCLAS! IsAOIIOEIARDP8OROl720R0 01100010001-4
2. Upon receipt of the MORD Postal Message allocating funds, the PD Council will
immediately allocate all these funds to villages.
3. Receipts and expenditures under "Self-Development" Title 2 will be applied in
conformity with the procedures for execution of the Village budget, except for a
number of special regulations mentioned in Circular 181-TT/Th. T/PCZ14,
Prime Ministry, 21 October 1970.
4. Public interest projects must be carried out through direct state-control or com-
munity development procedures. It is absolutely forbidden to carry them out
under contracts. If technical capabilities are lacking, the PCAG can hire con-
struction specialists to guide implementation of projects. In the case of impor-
tant projects, the PCAG can request the Province (through Village channels) to
assign the implementation of these projects to the technical Services concerned.
However, the liquidation of expenditures for these projects is still the responsi-
bility of the Village. Should these technical Services run short of specialized
personnel, PCAGs can hire technicians introduced by the Province.
J. In 1971, VSD programs will no longer be provided such materials as roofing sheets
and rebar, free of charge. PCAGs must procure those materials with funds reserved
for authorized projects.
Central, Province, and District authorities are responsible for regularly inspecting,
supervising, and monitoring the implementation of VSD Programs. However, they
must not directly participate in the initiation of projects. The presence of Province
Councillors in these Inspection Delegations is encouraged.
III-M- 6
Approved FU RGtASJfFJE:J1A-RDP80R01 720R001 100010001 -4
 Approved For Release INCLmyfff tAS1IIt2oRoouoooboool-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
Approved For Release 2004NUAWFUDOR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200 LIAE1!fl2OROOl 100010001-4
Appendix A: Urban Program
I. GENERAL.
In the recent years, the population of urban areas has increased rapidly and now encom-
passes about 40% of the rational population.
Village inhabitants migrated to the cities because of the unstable situation in the rural
areas and the attraction of employment in war related industry due to the presence of
the allied armies.
Many urban areas grew up around military barracks and military bases. There is not an
accurate census of the population in these urban areas. However, it is obvious that the
population of urban areas continues to steadily increase even though the Pacification and
Development Program restored security to nearly all the rural areas. The permanent
resettlement and return-to-village programs have eased the situation of many people who
heretofore went to the city as temporary refugees.
This situation has created many unsolved problems for the government. People are
crowded together in dark,rat-nest like slums that do not meet the basic standards of
sanitation and convenience. The agencies established to meet the requirements of the
previous population are inadequate to satisfy the requirements of the present dense popu-
lation.
The dense urban population includes many varied elements. Hooligans, gangsters, and
armed robbers are increasing in number, and good morals are being violated, the result
being that the maintenance of public order is extremely difficult. This is not to mention
the increased enemy opportunity to infiltrate underground cadre for the purpose of dis-
rupting the public security and spreading propaganda to create dissension and confusion
among these inhabitants. Moreover, the increased cost of living and the reduction of
available work in some urban areas have added to the difficulties of urban people in making
a living.
Although local authorities have made great efforts to properly manage administration and
to supply services in urban areas, the increased efforts are still not adequate to meet
increased requirements. Moreover, the urban area communities lack the collective
identities similar to the rural community. Social organizations in urban areas tend to be
amorphous, people tend to go their own way, and the spirit of community cooperation has
not developed. The cooperative spirit which existed in and dominated rural life must be
popularized in urban areas through cultural, religious, economic relationships, etc. -
in order to help inhabitants in urban areas to be conscious of their duty to their own com-
munity and to encourage them to participate in the common activities for improvement
of community life.
This, then is the situation which the government and the people must endeavor to solve
within the framework of a common urban policy, for which the 1971 Plan provides the
opening phase.
Approved For Release 200JINC:LAS !EDOROO1100010001-4
 Approved For 1aarffXSSTRLA.RDP80R01 720R001 100010001 -4
H I-Eu-
The main concept aims at solving the difficulties of and satisfying the special require-
merits for the urban areas. This involves a special coordination of activities among the
ministries of the central government as well as among the agencies in the field.
Moreover, it still is necessary that elected bodies, supported by the active participation
of notables, specialists, as well as leaders of other groups, private associations, or
individuals who are concerned about the urban areas, closely coordinate in the local
areas.
In keeping with the foregoing, a committee chaired by the Prime Minister or his repre-
sentative, with special responsibility for urgan programs will be established in the
central government under the Central Pacification and Development: Council and at the
provinces within the framework of the Province Council and the Province P&D Council.
At the phuong and khu pho levels, committees representing the people also will be
organized to be responsible for development programs in the communities concerned.
Along with the improvements in organization, special emphasis must be given to the
building of a strong spirit of community cooperation among the various strata of urban
society and to the proper application of law since it governs so many aspects of urban life.
Thus, every man will be aware of his responsibilities to the community and participate in
improving the common welfare.
The problems of urban areas can only be solved on a long-term basis. Within the narrow
and short-range perimeter of the 1971 Community Defense and Local Development Plan,
programs must necessarily be limited to urgent priority tasks to attain the three objec-
tives of self-defense, self-government, and self-development. These programs must be
implemented within the capabilities of the budget by city authorities, with contributions
from the people.
The Steering Directive 081, 23 October 1970 of the President of Republic of Viet-
Nam emphasized that the priority task of the Urban Development Program is to
effectively insure security, public order, and respect for the law.
The National Police is the agency primarily responsible for maintenance of security
and public order in Urban Areas. Normally, the National Police is under the opera-
tional authority of urban administrative authorities, but in emergency cases, the
National Police will be under the unified command of the area military commander.
All of the National Police (Uniformed Police, Special Police, and Police Field Forces)
must be closely coordinated with defense forces such as the Popular Forces, the
Regional Forces, Main Forces, and especially with the People's Self Defense Forces,
in order to maintain security and public order in Urban Areas.
National Police, in coordination with friendly forces, will regularly control and
classify the people by conducting police operations to detect communist elements
infiltrating into the urban areas for the purpose of sabotage, terrorism or propaganda.
These operations must be organized so as to avoid interfering with and antogonizing
the people.
IV-A-2
Approved For UE 1fI EDRDI80R01 720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004C[ASf DOR001100010001-4
Priority for establishment of National Police sub-stations is given to the border
precincts (6, 7, 8, 9, and 11) of the Prefecture, and to the border quarters of auto-
nomous cities and urban villages.
The program to issue ID cards to people in urban areas (Prefecture, autonomous
cities, and urban villages) must be completed 100% during 1971. The inter-family
system must be consolidated and strengthened. Family books must be continuously
up-dated.
Organize regular check points on roads and waterways leading into urban areas to
prevent the transfer of war equipment and infiltration of dangerous elements into
the urban areas.
Review curfew hours in the Prefecture and cities, with a view toward reduction when
the security situation permits.
The Phung Hoang Program will be emphasized in wards, sub-wards, street quarters,
and urban villages in order to neutralize the VCI.
The PSDF is the key element in organizing the people's intelligence net which aims
at detection and identification of elements dangerous to urban security. Every PSDF
inter-team, regular combat and key-interteam, will have at least one member train-
ed in intelligence operations.
PSDF will also actively support the Chieu Hoi program in the task of contacting those
people who have relatives in the Vietcong in order to persuade them to convince
their relatives to rally.
During 1971, the security forces must determine to enforce the law strictly, to
implement punishment measures properly and to apply necessary sanctions toward
violations concerning public order such as illegal occupation of land, illegal con-
struction, violation of traffic regulations, public sanitation, and violation of regula-
tions, all of which disrupt the otherwise normal lives of urban people. Robbery,
hooliganism, and indecent behaviour must be forcefully eliminated.
Campaigns for maintenance of public order must be continuously organized. The
goal for 1971 as compared to 1970 is to reduce by at least 50% the number of all
types of violations in the urban areas.
In conjunction with the application of sanctions, education in and publicity of the
principles of traffic regulations, construction standards, and public sanitation will
be improved and coordinated by competent authorities.
a. To coordinate the urban area programs which have previously been handled
piece-meal, a committee directly subordinate to the Central Pacification
and Development Council will be formed. It will include the ministries
concerned with urban area programs such as the Ministry of Interior,
Ministry of Information, Ministry of Rural Development, Ministry of Social
Welfare, Ministry of Public Health, Ministry of Public Works and Ministry
Approved For Release 2004u4 LA-SLS1FJcOoRool100010001-4
 ApprVN cci Ae rritD4/01 : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
of Finance, all under the chairmanship of the Prime Minister or his com-
petent representative.
The committee shall be responsible for:
- Studying and recommending the long term and short-term methods and
plans for development of urban areas to the Central Pacification and
Development Council.
- Studying and recommending financial support procedures and implemen-
tation of the projects of the urban area development programs.
- 'Tasking of ministries and concerned agencies.
- Supervising, inspecting, and monitoring the implementation of projects of
urban area sevelopment progran s.
- Guiding urban area authorities in establishing the local development
programs.
b. In the provinces, a similar committee chaire by the Province Chief will
be formed directly subordinate to the Provinc Pacification and Development
Council. It will include the concerned chiefs f technical services in its
membership. It will plan, execute the progra i, and submit recommenda-
tions to the Central Pacification and Development Council concerning urban
area development.
Along with establishing province-level government committees with urban
responsibilities, it also is necessary to organize committees within the
framework of province councils. Meetings of such councils will be expanded
by inviting specialists and other private individuals interested in urban
affairs to participate.
c. At the phuong level in the prefecture and the khu pho level in the autonomous
cities, there are no elective councils equivalent to the village or province
councils. Nevertheless, urban committees must also be established here.
They should be elected by people's assemblies and be responsible for
development programs in the community concerned.
d. The committees responsible for the above-mentioned echelons may be further
divided into sub-committees responsible for specific areas of activity.
e. Where several urban villages are contiguous and pending the creation of a
municipal or unified village government, the chiefs of the villages concerned
will be formed into an unofficial urban council to coordinate the affairs and
programs that affect all of the villages in general. The chief of the village
which has the largest locally generated budget will chair the council. Each
member will be assigned a functional area of responsibility, such as public
works, water, sanitation, education, traffic control, etc. , that represents
a particular pressing problem in the urban area. That member would then
form an advisory committee of leading citizens to provide advice in that
particular area. The elected member would act as chairman. The advisory
committee would provide recommendations for resolution of the assigned
Al NCIA FEJF fl4/04/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/061 CtA
R001100010001-4
ASSIRED
problem to the official councilman who then would submit them to the over-
all urban council for action.
2. Determination of an urban village.
In the present organization of local administration, urban areas are authorized
to have juridical status and are officially recognized by the government as the
Prefecture and as autonomous cities such as Da Nang, Da Lat, Hue, Cam Ranh,
Vung Tau, Qui Nhon, My The, Can The, Nha Trang, and Rach Gia.
In addition to the Capital and the autonomous cities that have been established,
there are a number of other urban areas. Most of these areas are villages
which are Province Capitals or District Towns. These areas do not yet meet
the requirements for ?establishment as a city, but their activities and require-
ments are very different from those of rural villages. The former are called
urban villages.
a. With the population of 20, 000 people or over and with a high density of no
less than 100 persons per hectare.
b. Commercial and industrial activities play an essential role in the local
economy.
c. Most inhabitants earn their living by salaried income obtained primarily
from commercial, handicraft, and industrial activities or from supplying
services not related to agricultural production.
d. Urban Villages must have a completely self-supporting budget or must be
near to establishing a self supporting budget in the near future.
The Ministry of Interior will use the above mentioned criteria to guide the
provinces in the determination of the villages that meet the required con-
ditions. Urban Villages will be recognized in a decision issued by the
Province Chief and reported to the CPDC prior to 1 April 1971.
In determining urban villages, in cases where the urban area includes
several villages, the Ministry of Interior must study boundary alignment
to determine if those villages could be annexed into an urban village, and
at the same time, separate land that is rural in character in order to
annex it into neighboring rural villages.
During 1971, as needed to meet development requirements, the Ministry of
Interior will improve and reorganize the present municipal administrative
organization, offices, precincts, phuongs and khu phos. Reorganization
should aim for unification of command, creation of the spirit of community
cooperation and democratization of administrative organizations in urban area,
The Ministry of Interior and Ministry of Defense will coordinate to re-examine
the military obligations of ward, sub-ward, and street-quarter officials. In the
Approved For Release 2004/UXCUSSIR ER001100010001-4
 Approuwkff CIMIREFI : CIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
UN
present situation, recognizing the continuously increasing official requirements
to resolve urgent problems, personnel vacancies in the administrative structure
will be no small problem for urban area development.
With a view to resolving the personnel problem for urban administrations during
1971, the military obligation of ward and sub-ward officials in the Prefecture
and street-quarter officials in the autonomous Cities will also be re-examined
in order that these officials may enjoy draft deferred status similar to that of
village and hamlet officials, or at least may be detached after a training period
in a military training center.
The Ministry of Interior also will study the authorized personnel strengths of the
wards and street-quarters, increase the number of cadre assigned to urban vil-
lages and organize training for the above mentioned officials in order to meet
the special requirements of urban areas.
Ministry of Rural Development also will re-examine the urban area cadre pro-
gram and improve training appropriate to the special requirements of urban
areas.
The Ministry of Finance will apply appropriate tax measures to increase the
resources of the Prefecture, autonomous cities, and urban villages in order to
meet their development requirements. Taxation is a basic necessity not only to
satisfy revenue requirements, but also to encourage the proper use of land area
in urban areas.
Moreover, the Ministry of Interior will coordinate with the National Institute of
Statistics to expedite the taking of an accurate census of population in autonomous
cities and the Prefecture for the purpose of obtaining essential data as a basis
for planning the urban development program. At the same time, the Ministry of
Labor also will investigate unemployment that may occur during the transition
phase when jobs dependent on the presence of allied forces are no longer avail-
able.
Due to the complicated nature of the problem and the heterogeneous nature of the
urban population, in comparison to the rural people, the Ministry of Information
must have a special information program for urban areas.
In order to be effective, the information program in urban areas must assess
and develop special programs for each target audience. undergraduates, stu-
dents, civil servants, individuals, laborers, ex-service men, war victims, etc..
In addition to providing general publicity and an explanation of national policy,
the information program must focus on supporting the special needs of urban
areas such as improvement of traffic circulation, public sanitation, maintenance
of security and order, creation of a spirit of community cooperation, etc.
Information cadre operating in urban areas must be selected from among cadre
who have good educational backgrounds, are well trained, are capable of per-
suading others, and especially have an unshakable faith in the national cause and
programs of the government.
ApproUcC=LF D01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20 INCLISMIEff 20R001100010001-4
Television and radio broadcasting facilities must be exploited to popularize the
national cause and achievement of government programs. In this regard, the
information program must be well arranged and skillfully executed to increase
its efficiency and be attractive to the people. Parallel to the activities of the
Ministry of Information, other government ministries also must have their own
information and publicity program.
In developing urban areas, a prerequisite condition is to established the zoning
maps and renovation plans for the urban areas concerned. In the present situa-
tion, the Directorate General of Reconstruction and Urban Planning is not yet
adequately staffed with specialists nor does it have the means and data essential
for preparing the zoning maps as defined.
During 1971, all of the recognized urban areas must have at least one zoning map,
which will designate the administrative and commercial areas, open areas,
public parks, building land, etc. , in order to guide local authorities and the
people in the use of land within urban areas.
The 1971 short-term program will focus on improvement of traffic circulation
in urban areas, especially in Saigon. The tasks will include:
- Clearing the walks that should be reserved for pedestrians.
- Clear all obstacles from roadbeds.
- Maintain all roads in urban areas by patching and leveling 100% of the roadbeds.
- Widen roadbeds where possible.
- Plan to construct belt roads to reduce the traffic volume circulating through the
urban area.
- Improve and strengthen the public transportation system - re-establish the bus
network in Saigon.
Expand the electrical power system so as to raise the power output 50% in Saigon
and 100% in urban villages. (Province capitals and District towns. )
Increase the water supply volume by construction and renovation of water plants,
pumping stations, reservoirs, improve the water mains, and dig wells in some
cities and urban villages. Particularly in Saigon and Gia Dinh province, the
Saigon water plant will install 20, 000 more water meters and will increase water
volume from 370, 000 m3 per day up to 400, 000 m3 per day and will simultaneous-
ly dig two wells for supplying water to the areas remote from the water system.
IV-A-7
Approved For Release 204NICIA,SI120R001100010001-4
 ApprovURftASSMO 1 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
Presently, the budget of the Director General of Housing is small. During 1971
this office can admistratively support loans of about VN$150, 000, 000 to the
Civil Servant's Cooperative for construction and lend about VN$350, 000, 000 to
local areas for construction of Civil Servant's dwelling quarters (estimated from
'700 to 1, 000 housing units).
Particularly in Saigon, the Director General of Housing will accomplish the con-
struction of 2, 390 housing units in Vinn Hoi, Cong Ly, Yen Do, Thanh Da, Tan
Qui Dong and Phu Tho Hoa.
In Nha Trang, the Director General of Housing plans to complete the Cho Dam
Area reconstruction program including two, 312 housing units.
Housing problems in the urban areas can be met only through active investment
by private organizations. Therefore the establishment of housing banks or other
private financial institutions should be encouraged for the purpose of investing
into the construction of housing units for laborers and other lower income people
in urban areas.
Because people are crowded in the narrow, muddy lots which lack the basic
conveniences, public sanitation in some urban areas is very poor. To attack
this problem, the following priority tasks are necessary:
- Clear drainage sewers to drain puddles from the roads and install drainage
sewer systems in other areas.
- Resolve the problem of garbage disposal by improving garbage collection and
destruction of garbage by compelling the people to possess trash cans.
- Construct public toilets in populated areas and eliminate toilets which have
been built on river banks.
- Improve the sanitation situation in restaurants and give attention to testing the
purity of potable water supplied in urban areas.
- Prevent infectious diseases by mounting large scale immunization campaigns
for the people as well as in institutions such as schools and orphanages.
- Improve sanitary conditions in alley ways through self development projects.
6. Strengthen government services (education, public health, social welfare).
Presently, most of the urban areas are incapable of meeting the tremendous
requirements of government public services for the people.
- Therefore, during 1971, city authorities should re-examine the establishment
and improvement of:
IV-A-8
ApprUN [ASSJ F D/01 : CIA-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200l11C:LCAS!Fff OR001 100010001 -4
- Hospitals, dispensaries.
Day nurseries, homes for the aged, poor houses, low cost restaurants.
Parks, stadiums.
In particular, the Ministry of Social Welfare will coordinate with local authorities
to give priority to solving the problem of beggars, especially leprous beggars,
scattered about the urban areas.
In order that the people living in urban areas have an opportunity for group
activities and development of a spirit of community cooperation which is con-
sidered one of the most necessary elements in construction and development,
local authorities will encourage and create convenient opportunities for the
people to regularly meet, to discuss, and to execute public interest projects
for the urban community.
With the purpose of creating a spirit of community cooperation among all strata
of people in urban areas, the following programs will be implemented:
Due to the heterogeneous nature of the people in urban areas, the spirit of
community cooperation has not been developed by association, as in native
villages, occupations, educational background, or social class. Therefore,
the most important factor in developing a spirit of cooperation is to encour-
age and support the development of private organizations and associations
among those who pursue a common goal which includes occupational organi-
zations, youth associations, sport clubs, Parent's and Teacher's /Students
Associations, Charities, and friendship associations.
These private organizations naturally will be assisted only to help all the
people, not to assist a political party or special interest group.
In the activities of organizations, sports play an important role because it is
the most simple, popular activity in which all strata of people may take part.
The Director of Youth, therefore, must actively support the Youth Sports
Program in schools and PSDF ranks as well as in urban areas by providing
sports facilities, detachment of sports specialists, and technical guidance.
The Director General of Youth also will encourage the sports associations
and youth groups to develop their own organizations and maintain continuous
activity to promote the spirit of community cooperation.
Community activity camps should be established in areas with many laborers
to partly assist in the ward and sub-ward renovation program, to carry out
public sanitation tasks, and to create community awareness.
In addition, there must be regularly organized entertainment programs for
youth, such as sports tournaments, musical performances, etc. . . . to
better the life of the young in urban areas.
IV-A-9
Approved For Release 200 =IFOW020RO01100010001-4
 Approved Fo R
The community center program aims at guiding people in creating a spirit
of unity, independence, and self-government.
During 1970, a fund has been allotted by the Ministry of Social Welfare for
establishment of 40 community centers throughout the country; Saigon has
15.
The Community Center Program is still new to people so it is not yet well
developed. In 1971, the Ministry of Social Welfare will focus on the task of
supporting the operations of the established community centers as well as
those under construction. Where a community center is desired, the build-
ing costs of this community center will be borne by the locality in question,
the Ministry of Social Welfare will provide only the operating funds.
The Urban Area Self Development Program is designed to motivate the people to
participate in the People's Common Activities Groups (PCAGS) to implement projects
according to their aspirations and for development of the spirit of community coopera-
tion among urban inhabitants and between urban inhabitants and the government.
The Capital, city, and province Pacification and Development Councils will forward
to the Ministry of Rural Development the ward, sub-ward, street-quarter, and urban
village requests for funds based on population (excluding people living on waterways).
Each ward, sub-ward, street-quarter, and village will be allocated at least VN$
400, 000. If the population density is over 2, 500, they will be alloted VN$ 50, 000 for
every 500 additional inhabitants.
In the phuongs, khu phos, and urban villages with over 50, 000 population, self-
development projects include one type, that is, public interest projects under
VN$300, 000. Urban villages from 20, 000 to 50, 000 population will use the same
procedures as for the VSD program (Appendix M VSD Program). In principle, the
people's contribution for the project and the Government's subsidy must be equal.
However, the percentage of the people's contribution may be adjusted by the Pacifi-
cation and Development Councils of the Prefecture, Provinces, and Cities in accor-
dance with the capability of the people in a given urban area to contribute.
In addition to the funds allocated for the urban self-development program, urban
development efforts also are supported by the National Fund for Local Development
and the Province /Municipal Development Fund. (See Appendix L, Development
Programs for the Province, Prefecture, and Cities. )
IV-A-10
Approved FUrN LA IF1IEDIA-RDP80R01720R001 100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200111CUM1TH OR001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
ANNEX IV: SPECIAL PROGRAMS
Appendix B: Ethnic Minorities
I. GENERAL. In general, the policy of the Government with respect to the Montagnard pop-
ulation is-defined in Decree 33/67 dated 29 August 1967, and based on Articles 2 and 24 of the
Constitution of the Republic of Vietnam. The Government recognizes that the Montagnard areas
are strategically vital to the Nation and that the population in those areas has made significant
sacrifices and contributions during the war to protect the national community.
The nation is aware of the contribution of its Montagnards. The fact that the area and the
people are underdeveloped is a consequence of both history and a geographic position appropri-
ate for enemy activity. Neither the Montagnard people nor the Vietnamese can be blamed for
the present conditions in the area.
However, both the Montagnards and the Vietnamese are in a position to bring about improve-
ments in the livelihood of the Montagnards and development of the area. The assets exist, and
both the Montagnards and the Vietnamese have the good will. The purpose of this plan is to
create a new progressive desire in the Montagnards in order that they together with the Govern-
ment and the Vietnamese may successfully develop the Montagnard area.
There are special development problems in the highlands and motivating the Montagnard people
to fully participate in the political, social, and economic activities of the National Vietnamese
community will require many changes. Therefore, it is essential to prepare special programs
which include all aspects of the social, political, and economic life of the Montagnard people.
These programs (which appear as TABS to this appendix) are compatible with the overall plan
for the Nation, but they contain special provisions, special instructions, and are based on
special considerations which apply in the Montagnard areas. They should be read within the
framework of the entire National Plan, to include all Appendices, because the program for
development of Ethnic Minorities is only a supplement to the National Plan and is concerned
only with a particular area.
The Ministry for the Development of Ethnic Minorities is charged with responsibility for the
execution of this plan. However, almost every Ministry in the Government and many of its
agencies of the CPDC have a support role to play in the execution of the plan. These support
roles of the ministries and agencies will be performed in coordination with the Ministry for the
Development of Ethnic Minorities in implementation of the programs devised for the Ethnic
Minorities.
The preparation of the various programs relating to the Montagnards requires a careful review
of the assets available. There are sufficient documents and data regarding the customs and
characteristics of the Montagnard tribes as well as references that pertain to the geography
of the areas. The government has the technical capability and means to exploit existing
resources. However, close coordination between concerned ministries is essential for
those programs reserved for ethnic minorities and the use of available resources must be
appropriate to local characteristics.
The programs allocated with this special plan must be implemented after approval with
IV-B-l
Approved For Release 2004/UACL AI IE R001100010001-4
 Approved For laar,& f&C1-DP80R01720R001100010001-4
19 IED
sufficient personnel and a method of operation that insures completion during 1971. It
is possible that some tasks will not be completed during 1971, but in any event a start must
have been made on them during the year. The implementation of specified tasks will surely
bring much progress to the Montagnard area and this progress will in turn erase misunder-
standings and induce the Ethnic Minorities' return to the National Government.
This special plan also provides for the mobilization of the Montagnards as well as their
participation in other tasks. Montagnards will begin participating in all the activities of the
national community and from this attain support from the central government.
The theme of all the objectives in this appendix is that the main effort to be made initially
is to eliminate the indifference and misunderstanding with respect to the Montagnard people.
7'he Government Ministries, Services and personnel have an opportunity to participate in the
i.ctivities of this significant element of the population. These activities have both a military
and economic strategic value. These areas of activities are:
Tab 1. Village and Hamlet Administration
Tab 2. Village Self Development
Tab 3. People's Self Defense Forces
Tab 4. People's Information
Tab 5. Public Health
Tab 6. Education
Tab 7. Social Welfare
Tab 8. Economic Activity
Tab 9. Survey of Montagnard Lands
A. TASKING.
1. Responsibility for achieving all the above objectives exceeds the capability of any
one Ministry. Even though an objective may fall within the special area of
expertise of a given Ministry, it can achieve little without cooperation and
coordination with other Ministries. Therefore, accomplishment of the objectives
in this Appendix will require the close coordination of other Ministries. The
other Ministries that relate to this plan include:
Ministry of Interior (Tabs 1, 3)
Ministry of Rural Development (Tab 2)
Ministry of Information (Tab 4)
Ministries of Health, Education, Social Welfare & Economics (Tabs 5, 6, 7, 8)
Ministry of Land Reform, Agriculture, Fishing Development (Tab 9), (See
also other TABS of other Ministries).
IV-B-2
Approved For ILJ 2kSSl f I #DRDP8OROI 720R001 100010001-4
ITVW
 Approved For Release 2011 ftXtSFQM20R001100010001-4
2. Because language, customs, and culture in the Montagnard areas are different
from those found in other parts of Vietnam, there is a need to execute the
majority of the tasks in this plan using Montagnard personnel. In this sense,
the Ministry for the Development of Ethnic Minorities has a primary res-
ponsibility for insuring that our most important asset, people, are used to their
capacity and receive training to increase their competence. The National
Montagnard Training Center at Pleiku and the Son Thon Cadre Program are
critical to fulfillment of this responsibility. The Center and Cadre Program
must be well managed, supported, and unhampered by bureaucratic red tape
and harassment. The Ministry for the Development of Ethnic Minorities must
solve these problems as initial tasks.
3. All of the objectives contained in this appendix have been coordinated with those
other Ministries and Agencies concerned. The various tasks set out in this plan
must be clear so that close coordination of planning and implementation of
specific programs can be effective. The Ministry for the Development of
Ethnic Minorities with the support of the Central Pacification & Development
Council is responsible for organizing other Ministries for drafting various
programs for implementation of the plan.
Supplementary plans for specific tasks must be implemented at the National,
Regional, and Provincial levels. This Appendix regarding Ethnic Minorities will be
forwarded to the concerned provinces in order that the Province Chief, based on
this, will be ready to implement a provincial plan in such a way as to satisfy local
requirements.
The various organizations of the Ministry for the Development of Ethnic Minorities are
responsible for reporting on the tasks to be executed in the provinces. These reports will in-
clude information about the effectiveness of work being performed by other provincial services
on the tasks performed in coordination with the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities. Other Minis-
tries must require reports from their subordinate agencies on the specific tasks relating
to the Montagnards, and will include information on results accruing from coordination with
the Ministry for the Development of Ethnic Minorities.
Province Chiefs will be required to report to the Central Government their observations on
the work of the various provincial services operating in the Montagnard areas. Ministries
will submit reports to the Central Pacification & Development Council. In cooperation with
the Ministry for the Development of Ethnic Minorities, the Central Pacification & Develop-
ment will hold a monthly meeting to consider the various progress reports. The Central
Pacification & Development Council also will be responsible for preparing a quarterly
report to the Prime Minister and the President on progress toward the achievement of the
various tasks.
IV-B-3
Approved For Release 200 N LMSII f I[020R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200gWCiAS 1fD20R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
TAB 1: Village and Hamlet Administration, to Ap, mndix B: Ethnic Minorities.
Develop administrative competence in Montagnard villages and hamlets so that as a
result of improved government the people will want to participate fully in the political
life of VietnaM which is the objective of Ethnic Minority activity in 1971.
There are four assets available to the Ministry to assist it in accomplishing tasks
related to this objective:
1. The village organization as defined by Statute 45.
2. There are between 1, 730 and 2, 100 village officials and approximately 4, 000
elected hamlet officials working in 250 - 300 villages and 1, 300 hamlets.
3. The means exist for training all key village and hamlet officials in 1971.
4. There are Son Thon Cadre teams available for assignment to each Montagnard and
Cham village.
There are a variety of problems confronting the Vietnamese in the development of
administrative competence in Montagnard villages and hamlets. The single most
important problem is the pervasive illiteracy among village and hamlet officials. In
addition, the idea of administration through a village organization is new to the Montag-
nard areas where traditional government was accomplished by each hamlet; neither the
officials nor the people fully understand village government and as a result, there is a
lack of community spirit and an indifference to government efforts at improving the
livelihood of the people. In all cases, there is a lack of competence among village and
hamlet officials because they don't know how to do their work. For many, the existing
procedures prescribed by Statute 45 and procedures for recording birth, deaths and
issuing certificates are beyond their comprehension. As a result, there are frequent
cases of district and province officials imposing their will on, and exploiting, the
village and hamlet population for personal gain, particularly in the area of development
projects. This imposition of will by higher officials is creating distrust among the
people and prevents them from exercising self-determination. Because of indifference
and the lack of economic and agricultural development as well as a general lack of edu-
cation among the people, they are the victims of super stition and alcoholism,which is
endemic among the people.
In the area of security, although territorial security has improved, most Montagnard
villages have poor security systems and would be unable to adequately defend them-
selves against a surprise attack. Furthermore, hamlet to village communications and
IV-B-1-1
Approved For Release 2004 tLASSI DOR001100010001-4
 Approved For R CtA tFfEIJDI8OROI72OROOI 1000 10001-4
village to district communications are so poor that it is difficult for the hamlets and
villages to get the support they need in the event of attack. Finally, an indifference has
developed among the people because there is little being done by way of land management
in the area, to say nothing of land reform. In the last few years many villages have been
moved from their original home site with no real thought given to the problem of appor-
tioning new lands to the refugees. At the same time, this movement of population is often
done in the planting season,which means the harvest is completely lost.
Not: all of the problems outlined above can be solved in 1971. However, the accomplish-
ment of the following tasks will tend to alleviate many of them and will reestablish interest
of the population in their own government at the hamlet and village level and awaken them
to the importance of Province and National government.
1. The Ministry for the Development of Ethnic Minorities together with the Ministry of
Interior and the Central Pacification Council will simplify the procedures set forth
in Statute 45 and other administrative procedures so that they can be comprehended
and applied by Montagnard village and hamlet chiefs.
2. The following village and hamlet officials will be trained at the National Montagnard
Training Center at Pleiku:
District Chiefs 60
Village Chiefs and Deputies 600
1lamlet Chiefs 1, 300
Deputy Hamlet Chiefs for PSDF 1, 300
Village Finance Commissioners 300
Village Information Commissioners 300
Village Education Commissioners 300
Village Health and Welfare Commissioners 300
Village Police 600
3. While in training, Village and Hamlet officials will be given literacy training. This
training will continue in the village and hamlet with the assistance of the Son Thon
Cadre groups.
4. In addition to elected village and hamlet chiefs and officials, Son Thon Cadre Group
leaders will receive village and hamlet administrative training at Pleiku.
5. Because a part of the difficulty in Montagnard villages is the tendency to select the
most powerful, perhaps not the most competent, person to be the village chief, there
is a need for greater central government participation in village and hamlet elections
to assure that the people are not being forced to select incompetent or corrupt leaders.
Central government participation in village elections will be accomplished through
Son Thon Cadre teams,with the Provincial Councils and the Province officials taking
a direct interest in the elections to insure that the people's rights are protected. The
Ministry for Ethnic Minorities and the Ministry of Interior, as a part of their inspec-
tion duties,will insure that elections are being conducted properly and fairly.
6. The Village Chief, with the assistance of the Son Then Cadre,will encourage and guide
young men and women with high intellectual standards to prepare themselves to run
for office as a member of the village administrative committee so that this committee
may work effectively.
TV-B-1-2
Approved For FIJINCLA&SlIF:I 9,DP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/O01MMIRET 001100010001-4
7. Old men and tribal leaders will be encouraged by the village chief and the Son Thon
Cadre to run for the village council.
IV-B-1-3
Approved For Release 2004/04AU1N&Fk 'II M01100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200tMUMIMfl20R001100010001-4
Use local resources and labor to improve living conditions in each hamlet and make it
possible for each family to be self sufficient either through labor or agricultural/ com-
mercial activities.
The Montagnard areas are rich in natural and agricultural resources. There is an
ample amount of land and water power and most building materials suitable to the way
of life in Montagnard hamlets are locally available. The Village Self Development
Program needs to contain sufficient funds to assist the people in Montagnard areas and
to establish procedures for obtaining materials that are not available locally.
In addition to being able to grow vegetables, the Montagnards grow fruit trees and
are capable of growing commercial crops. The Montagnards also produce some live-
stock. In order to increase agricultural production, sufficient amounts of machinery
and transportation must be available so that production can be immediately marketed at
district and provincial marketing places.
The Montagnard population collectively possesses funds which can be used to invest in
additional equipment. In addition,, credit is available to the Montagnard population through
Agricultural Development Banks. In nearly all Montagnard areas, the population can
produce cloth and artifacts which find a ready market as handicrafts.
As a result of the war, a large number of Montagnard young men and women have
acquired mechanical skills which are useful in the maintenance and operation of modern
transportation and agricultural equipment. A number of small industries needing skilled
labor are already established in the Montagnard areas, especially saw mills. There
are a number of educational institutions, both public and private, which have the capacity
to train additional Montagnards in modern skills; and there are Montagnard high school
and primary school students who can qualify for the training. The National Montagnard
Training Center at Pleiku has a staff that can educate key elements of the population in
basic marketing and distribution and the Son Thon Cadre, Ethnic Minority Cadre, and
High School students are available for training and assisting the general population in
the hamlets.
Only in the last 15 years have the Montagnard people been exposed to a modern way of
life. The general population does not have a clear understanding of the value of land,
money, and time in a modern context; many of them still count their wealth in terms of
gongs and wine jugs. As a result the Montagnard population fails to be gainfully employ-
ed for two-thirds of the year and the lack of better utilization of time leads to indifference.
IV-B-2-1
Approved For Release 20C'`;ASIIV20R001100010001-4
 Approved For RO 0AIS1lF1DP8oRol72oRool 10 00 10001-4
Although most Montagnard areas are naturally rich, and food and cash crops can be raised
in abundance, a tremendous amount of these capabilities are wasted as a result of super-
stitution, the lack of skill in maintaining modern equipment, the lack of understanding of
cooperative endeavor, and the adherence to primitive techniques and practices in farming
and raising livestock.
In addition, government resettlement policies in Montagnard areas create extensive waste
of agricultural effort by moving elements of the population at the wrong time of the year.
Finally, unscrupulous merchants deliberately exploit the population by not paying a fair
price for produce or by charging unreasonable prices for marketing services.
In recent years, the agricultural and veterinary services in the Montagnard areas have
paid no attention to the agricultural potential of the Montagnard population and the agri-
cultural experiment stations in the highlands have become inactive, so that much time,
money, and energy is wasted through private experimentation with new varieties of agri-
cultural products such as IR-8 rice which is only marginally successful in the Montagnard
areas. Agricultural Development Banks are established in Montagnard areas but because
the procedures are complicated and the banking personnel are indifferent to the needs of
the Montagnard people, this source of Agricultural credit is not being fully used to im-
prove conditions in the area.
Although the Village Self Development Program has been in existence for two years, the
purposes and procedures of the program are not well understood in Montagnard villages.
Because the people do not understand, they are easily victimized by unscrupulous
officials at the Province and District level who abuse the procedures for their own profit
and prevent genuine village participation in village self development.
In too many cases, these officials are responsible for importing expensive and unsuitable
building materials and building designs into Montagnard areas rather than encouraging
the people to make use of local resources and designs which are familiar to the Montag-
nard people.
Although technical training programs sponsored by various ministries and educational
institutions serve a genuine need in introducing and making available modern skills to the
Montagnards, the fact is ignored, that in most villages and hamlets traditional tools and
equipment are used, and no training is given in the use of these tools and equipment.
1. The Ministry for Ethnic Minorities and the Ministry for Rural Development, together
with the Ministry for Information will develop, coordinate, and implement an infor-
mation program designed to fully inform the people about the Village Self Development
Program. Province Chiefs will insure that the Village Self Development Program is
fully and fairly applied in Montagnard Villages. Village Chiefs, Hamlet Chiefs, and
the people will be encouraged to file formal complaints in cases where the program is
misapplied or abused.
2. The Ministry of Education in coordination with the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities
Education Coordinator, the Center for Industrial Development,and the Ministry of
Agriculture will devise a realistic commercial course designed to teach Montagnard
high school students the fundamentals of commercial and marketing activity.
IV-B-2-2
Approved For R}Ct*SStFIEDD80R01720R001 1 00010 001-4
 Approved For Release 200U'NtLfFffD20R001100010001-4
3. Son Thon Economic Cadre in the Villages will be responsible for gathering informa-
tion about prices in local markets and will be informed by the Ethnic Minority
Service about prices in Provincial markets so that they can suggest to the population
the prices they should charge for their marketable products.
4. Each Son Thon Cadre team, under the direction of the Son Thon Economic cadre,
will establish a small retail store similar to a consumers' cooperative in each
village for the purpose of stocking and' selling miscellaneous products to the village
population so that the village women will not be obliged to spend hours walking to
population centers to purchase incidental items.
5. Son Thon Cadre, in cooperation with village and hamlet chiefs,will encourage the
development of truck gardening among the village population.
6. The Pleiku Training Center will train 260 Son Thon Economic Cadre. The training
will give particular emphasis to commercial and marketing activity and the estab-
lishment of commercial and agricultural cooperatives. In addition, the Pleiku
center is responsible for instructing all trainees on the subject of cooperatives.
7. The Ethnic Minority Service in each province will coordinate closely with the Agri-
cultural and Veterinary Services in the provinces to insure that these technical
services provide the advice and services required to improve the quality of Montag-
nard agriculture and livestock. These services will be specifically charged with
assisting the people to market their produce.
8. Resettlement of Montagnards will be held to a minimum; emphasis will be on moving
security to the people, not the people to security. In any case, no Montagnard popu-
lation will be moved during the growing and harvest season except in case of actual
and major enemy incursions.
9. The Agricultural Development Banks in Montagnard areas will adopt simplified pro-
cedures as approved by the Central Banking Authorities to facilitate the extension of
credit to Montagnard farmers, and Banking personnel will make a special effort at
rendering assistance to the Montagnards so they can obtain the credit they require.
The people have the right to register formal complaints against banks that are
dilatory in this regard.
10. The Ministry of Finance will encourage the banking community to establish banks in
Montagnard population centers so that the people have a secure place for saving
money and earning interest.
11. The Ministry for Ethnic Minorities together with the Handicrafts Development
Cooperative will establish a marketing procedure for Montagnard handicrafts and
will stock Montagnard products in established Handicraft Stores in Vietnam. The
Handicraft Corporation will be responsible for establishing standards of workman-
ship and quality for products offered for sale. The financial aspects of this operation
will be under the control of and will conform to procedures established by the Handi-
craft Development Corporation.
12. The Directorate of Farm Machinery in the Ministry of Agriculture, in coordination
with the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities, will select from Son Thon Cadre, Ethnic
Minority Cadre and Montagnard Agricultural cadre, 50 personnel for training as
agricultural machinery maintenance specialists in 1971. Special care will be taken
IV-B-2-3
Approved For Release 2004U4N1CLASSLRE&R001100010001-4
 Approved FINUMI OIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
to in sure that by the end of 1971 each major tribal grouping and each province with
large Montagnard population has native specialists who are equipped to handle the
maintenance of farm machinery owned or operated by Montagnards.
13. So;n Thon Cadre, village officials, and all other district and province officials who
have responsibility for the Village Self Development Program, will insure that
maximum use is made of locally available resources in the construction of village-
sel.f-help projects and will strive to design structures that are in keeping with the
traditional building designs used by the Montagnards in the area as a means of pre-
serving cultural traditions.
IV-B-2-4
Approved I &IFIj'IJ CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
 Approved For Release 200INUIS raOR001100010001-4
TAB 3: People's Self Defense Force, to Appendix B: Ethnic Minorities
There is a popular misconception that the People's Self Defense Force is a mercenary
organization. The people must be convinced that PSDF is a voluntary grouping together
of people in a hamlet and village to defend the village from attack and harassment by the
enemy. Our objective is to overcome this misconception by providing the training and
means necessary for effective self-defense.
In 1971 there must be an effective information program among Montagnards to promote
participation in People's Self Defense. There is a training facility at Pleiku where both
orientation and detailed training can be given to village and hamlet officials and Son Thon
Cadre in the techniques of People's Self Defense.
PF Training is conducted at the same training site and as a result, the PF soldiers, the
village and hamlet officials, and the Son Thon Cadre will gain a better appreciation of the
role and relationship of PF with People's Self Defense. There are already sufficient
weapons to adequately arm the armed elements of the People's Self Defense Units in the
Montagnard hamlets and villages and there is sufficient population in each Montagnard
village to permit effective organization of a People's Self Defense Force in each village
and hamlet.
The fundamental difficulty with the People's Self Defense program in Montagnard areas
is that, as a result of previous experience, the Montagnards have fallen into the habit of
expecting pay for service of this type. They misconceive the Self Defense Unit as a
mercenary organization rather than an integral part of the political, social, and economic
life of the village. The problem of People's Self Defense in Montagnard areas is compli-
cated by the fact that the hamlets in a village are widely dispersed and communications
are difficult -- HT- I radios usually used are inadequate for communications between the
hamlets and the village.
Although progress is being made, there is a tendency on the part of self defense units to
use static rather than mobile defense tactics in guarding the villages. Finally, although
improvements are noted, there is a continuing tendency on the part of Province officials to
look on RF and PF units as static units committed to guarding lines of communications and
facilities. They fail to understand that, in addition and more importantly, these forces
must be used to support the PSDF in protecting the population from harrassment and
attack.
In 1971, all village and hamlet officials and Son Thon Cadre will receive orientation train-
ing on the techniques of People's Self-Defense. In the case of Son Thon Military Cadre,
IV-B-3-1
Approved For Release 2004/ f N V'C SiElEDR001100010001-4
 Approved FIIgONFA10 :
1EDCIA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
260 of them will be given a full course in the subject; 1, 250 Deputy Hamlet Chiefs for
security will receive the same training. The course will be two weeks in length. The
11leiku Training Center is responsible for working with the II Corps Commander and his
training element to develop a course suitable for Montagnard areas.
In the villages and hamlets, the Son Thon Military Cadre will be charged, in coordination
with the Deputy Hamlet Chief in each Hamlet, with the training and command of People's
Self Defense activities.
To popularize service in People's Self Defense units, the village chiefs and hamlet chiefs
together with the Son Thon Military Cadre will organize weekly meetings of the population
to motivate the people and encourage their participation and to inspect the weapons and
equipment of People's Self Defense Units.
The Ethnic Minority Service in each province; in cooperation with the Ministry of Informa-
tion Service and sector commanders, will develop information programs designed to explain
and encourage service in People's Self Defense Units. As part of this effort, the Province
Chiefs will be responsible for giving special recognition to outstanding individuals or
units in the program.
In Montagnard High Schools and Boarding Schools, teachers and Boarding School managers,
as a part of the overall indoctrination of students in civic responsibility, will promote the
concepts of People's Self Defense. The students themselves should be organized into
People's Self Defense Units to familiarize them with the techniques. The students will be
encouraged to promote popular cooperation with the program in their home villages while
on summer vacation periods.
IV-B-3-2
Approved La C IA-RDP80ROl720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004 ftLCk 1VlO2OROOl 1 00010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
TAB 4: People's Information, to Appendix B: Ethnic Minorities
People's Information program as it relates to the Montagnard population is to understand
the people's aspirations and to insure that officials explain the government's policies and
intentions with respect to the problems confronting the people, together with ensuring that
the government knows what is being done to change the attitude of the people from indif-
ference to positive support of the government.
The government has at its disposal numerous assets which can be used to develop a more
effective people's information program in Montagnard areas. These assets include 5, 000
Son Then Cadre, 400 Ethnic Minority Cadre, 1, 000 High School students, 300 village
information commissioners, and personnel capable of translating Vietnamese material
into the various Montagnard dialects. There are radio stations that broadcast part-time
in Montagnard dialects, television stations that can be received in the highland areas,
printing facilities in Saigon and in the Ethnic Minority Services in the provinces a maga-
zine published by the Ministry for Ethnic Minorities; a military psychological warfare
apparatus which has Montagnard officers and NCOs on its staff; culture/drama teams
working for the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities, and a system for ascertaining and handling
the people's complaints.
The fundamental information problem is that the government is not taking full advantage
of or coordinating the assets in hand. Although there is an ample number of personnel to
carry out an effective information program, most of them are untrained or, in the case of
the culture/drama teams, are not being used in their proper function. Facilities which
could be used are not being used because officials are not properly indoctrinated and do
not know how to proceed with information work. As a result, the people have no concep-
tion of what the Government's program is in their regard and they have no clear idea
about why they should resist the Communist enemy. The people's indifference is com-
pounded by the fact that they do not understand how to lodge their complaints with the
government when injustices are done to them and as a result they have lost confidence in
and are indifferent toward the government.
In 1971 the following tasks will be accomplished in an effort at resolving some of the
problems.
1. The information section in the Ministry for Ethnic Minorities will be enlarged so that
it can coordinate effectively with the Ministry of Information and Military PSYOPS in
order to exploit existing assets. It will specifically be responsible for developing
IV-B-4-1
Approved For Release 2004 'CLI-&SIFADOR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
UNCLASSIFIED
radio and television programs intended for the Montagnard people and it will assure
that entertainment teams also participate in live entertainment in the provinces. The
information section will also arrange visits by leaders and officials to Montagnard
areas. It will insure that the publications printed by the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities
contain articles in the various Montagnard dialects and that these publications are regu-
larly printed and distributed to the villages and hamlets.
2. The following personnel will be trained at the National Montagnard Training Center
at Pleiku in information techniques:
Son Thon Cadre 260
Information Commissioners 260
Ethnic Minority Cadre 50
Montagnard Chieu Hoi Cadre 30
Members of Drama Teams 40
Chief of District Ethnic Minority Office 66
3. The Provincial Chieu Hoi and Information Services will coordinate with the Ethnic
Minorities Service in translating and disseminating propaganda materials to Montag-
nard villages and hamlets, and in organizing meetings at Montagnard market places
to disseminate propaganda and news.
4. The Ministry of Information will develop an indoctrination course for Montagnard
high school students which will explain to them the intentions and policies of the
government and provide them with explanations on why Communist policy and inten-
tions are dangerous. The principals of Montagnard High Schools will be responsible
for providing time in the high school schedule which can be used for instruction of the
students. They will encourage the students to discuss these matters with their
families and friends in their hamlets.
5. The Ministry for Ethnic Minorities in coordination with the Ministry for Information
will publish a periodic guidance paper intended to orient and indoctrinate officials,
both Vietnamese and Montagnard, working in Montagnard areas.
6. ALL village and hamlet officials and Son Thon Cadre who receive training at Pleiku
will be instructed on the procedures to be used to insure that the people's complaints
come to the attention of the proper authorities in the government and that the com-
plaints are in proper form so that they can be expeditiously acted upon.
IV-B-4-2
Approved FIJ NCNIFf[DlA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release etlASS ft11ft1720R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
TAB 5: Public Health, to Appendix B: Ethnic Minorities
The objective of the Public Health Program in Montagnard areas is to overcome the
indifference and superstitions of the majority of Montagnard People concerning disease
and sanitation so they will be receptive to learning more advanced techniques and be re-
sponsive to government efforts to improve their health, and so that they themselves will
take action to improve sanitation in their hamlets.
There are already a number of Montagnard youth who have received training in public
health courses which qualifies them to assist in the execution of public health programs
in the Montagnard areas. Each Son Thon Cadre team has a member who is responsible
for medical and health matters and who has received some training. There are medical
technicians who have received training from the If. S. Special Forces and who have experi-
ence in basic medicine and in public health civic action activities. Each village has a Public
Health Commissioner who will have responsibility for publicity and for guiding the people
in matters related to sanitation and public health. In 1970, 50 home economics special-
ists from various minority groups were graduated from a home economics course. To
date, most have not been employed. In 1970, 20 Son Thon Cadre received training in the
Philippines as village workers and a part of their training included familiarization with
hamlet sanitation techniques. In previous years a number of Montagnard personnel
received training in Malaysia as health and nutrition technicians. Every province has
classes for training of midwives and maternity workers, with each course reserving 10%
of its spaces for ethnic minorities.
Each province has a number of mobile public health teams regularly visiting the people
to examine them and to distribute medicine. It is most important to emphasize that the
schools can impart a basic knowledge of public health to the students.
An important problem relating to Public Health in Montagnard villages and hamlets is the
indifference of the population to the development of public health and sanitation. Another
problem is the treatment of and prevention of alcoholism. Still another aspect, no less
important, is the improvement of hamlet and village health installations and the provision
of sufficient equipment, personnel, and drugs on hand to help the people in emergencies.
Management of these health installations also requires understanding of the terrain
and customs of these people. For example, the local mobile health groups cannot
cover the villages and hamlets in sufficient strength to meet requirements. Thus,
few people have a basic knowledge of public health. They not only don't know how to solve
health and sanitation problems, they also lack assets. There is a lack, for example,
of public health stations or dispensaries in villages of predominantly Montagnard districts.
In accordance with the government's health development program, information about
IV-B-5-1
Approved For Release 20UNC[ASSIF LOR001100010001-4
 Approved For Re~CIOA /S1fltDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
public health is not being effectively or adequately disseminated in Montagnard areas.
The people have no understanding of the relationship between filth and disease and the
danger of communicable diseases. Because there is little contact with outsiders, they fail
to see the need for latrines.
One problem that needs attention is that province officials, because they fail to recognize
that public health standards are extremely low among Montagnards, unwittingly contribute
to a worsening of public health conditions in refugee resettlement areas by insisting that
the people build their houses excessively close together.
1. During 1971, the National Montagnard Training Center at Pleiku, in coordination with
the Ministry of Public Health,will develop a simplified training course for use in
training 260 Son Thon Public Health Cadre and 260 Village Public Health Commission-
ers.
2. The Ministry for the Development of Ethnic Minorities will establish, at the Training
Center, a Home Economics school which will be used to train female cadre in Home
Economics. Outstanding graduates from the Home Economics Course completed in
1969 and 1970 in Saigon will be assigned as instructors at Pleiku. The balance of the
Home Economics trainees will be assigned throughout Montagnard areas to assist
village officials and cadre in training the population.
3. As a part of the 1971 information program, the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities in coordi-
nation with the Ministry of Information and the Ministry of Public Health will estab-
lish special information activities calculated to reduce the hold that superstition has
on the population and to encourage eradication of alcoholism.
4. The Ministry of Ethnic Minorities will establish a Public Health section in the
Ministry which will be responsible for coordinating the use of all public health per-
sonnel and assets with the Ministry of Public Health.
5. Both the Ministry of Public Health and the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities will assure
that their respective services in the provinces are fully coordinating the use of
assets. Specifically, the Ministry of Public Health must require that Public Health
Teams visit each Montagnard village once every two weeks for the purpose of pro-
viding medication and to give additional training to health cadres in the villages.
6. Son Thon Cadre and Ethnic Minority Cadre working in the Montagnard hamlets will
insure that the population constructs an adequate number of latrines and builds com-
post pits in each hamlet so that non-human waste and gargage can be recycled for use
as fertilizer.
7. The Ministry of Education, in coordination with the Education section, the Public
Health section in the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities and the Ministry of Public Health
will work out a simplified public health course suitable for teaching in Montagnard
High Schools. Boarding School Managers and teachers in high schools will be re-
quired to teach the course, and, through self-help projects, indoctrinate the students
in public health practices. During their vacations, the students will be urged to pro-
mote Public Health practices in their villages.
IV-B-5-2
Approved For JJNC LASSIf f
 Approved For Release 2000 tLcMU20R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
Increase the awareness of the people and train youth so that they understand the reasons
for development and can participate in social and political life in such a way that they
receive the benefits of such participation and make contributions to development without
destroying their cultural foundations.
The Montagnard population has access to a wide variety of educational institutions extend-
ing from the primary level to technical and university level. In addition to the institu-
tions of formal education there are a number of training programs sponsored by the
various ministries and agencies for which Montagnards can qualify. But the major train-
ing program is still being conducted at the National Montagnard Training Center in Pleiku
which is designed to train Montagnards so that they can participate fully in the National
Development process. In addition, there are opportunities for Montagnards to receive
the benefits of overseas training and education. Education at the primary level in Monta-
gnard dialects is a reality in the case of major Montagnard dialects and educational
materials in other dialects are being prepared. There are a number of qualified teachers
for teaching Montagnards at the primary level and some teachers qualified for teaching in
High Schools. Each Montagnard village has some teachers and each village also has a
Son Thon Cadre who has received special training in education. The majority of High
School students are ready to make some contribution to educating the illiterate majority.
The people have the benefit of the types of radio and TV sets usable in their areas. An
increase in boarding school construction will help the Montagnard students to continue
their higher education into the secondary school system without leaving their highland
province.
The most important problem in Montagnard areas is that the bulk of the population is
illiterate. As a result, the youth are underdeveloped socially, politically or economical-
ly. Illiteracy breeds indifference among the adult population so that they do not encourage
and often will not cooperate with efforts at educating their children. In addition to the
illiteracy of the adult population, many of the children who begin school drop out after
only a few years because of the difficulties they encounter in trying to learn in the Viet-
namese language rather than their native language. The language problem is further
complicated by the requirement that the children be taught a curriculum which has little
relationship to their daily lives. As a result, although a child may complete primary
school, because of many complicated problems, neither he nor his parents see any point
in continuing on to higher education. For those who do wish to enter high school, the
entrance requirements for higher education are frequently so strict, the competition so
tough with other students who have had the benefit of better educational facilities. and
better teachers, and the number who can be accepted so limited, that practically speak-
ing, only lucky students, with a good education under skillful teachers and with suffiLlent
IV-B-6-1
Approved For Release 2004UNCLASSIF4'IDOR001100010001-4
 Approved For OIa2A ff I ff RDP80R0l 720R001100010001-4
study supplies are accepted. Of course, the remainder are condemned to illiteracy.
Arrete No. 382 GD/KHPC/HV7 works to the disadvantage of Montagnard students. It is
not that they are lacking in intelligence, but they have the definite liability of having
received an inferior education. The inferiority in Montagnard education begins with the
teaching personnel assigned to Montagnard areas. Because these assignments are not
desirable, there is a tendency to assign the less qualified or unsuccessful teachers.
These teachers are not motivated, there is a high incidence of teacher absenteeism and
the attitude of teachers impacts rapidly on the students. To compound the difficulty,
there is a lack of teaching materials suitable for the Montagnard student, and the use of
teaching materials in Montagnard dialects is only beginning as a means of introducing
students to the educational process in the first three years of school. The school faci-
lities themselves are either lacking or are in a miserable state of repair. Aside from
the educational institutions, the Boarding Schools intended for Montagnard
students studying in provincial and district towns are invariably in poor condition.
Students staying at these schools are victimized by a corrupt management of the program
so that they frequently have to exist on a sub-standard diet and contend with facilities
that have been allowed to fall into disrepair. The result is that many students become
ill and are forced to leave school or they become so demoralized that they decide to leave
school. In neither the boarding facilities nor the schools is there a high degree of discip-
line, so that, although a student may have potential, he does not live under a regimen that
will permit him to attain well in school. At the present time there is no good selection
process for Montagnard students except the national examination system. Although means
exist for determining in advance the intellectual potential of a student and his particular
skills and talents, these means are not applied, in the cases of students who do
reach the level of advanced education they are frequently misplaced, while those who
should not proceed to higher studies are trained in skills not suitable to them and employed
in positions they cannot fill. There is a great deal of nepotism and favoritism in the
bureaucracy so that those selected for higher education or special training are frequently
friends or relatives of officials rather than those who can best use the training.
Still another aspect is a lack of totality in the education of the Montagnards. Physical
training which helps the students develop resourcefulness, health and quick wits is
neglected. Teaching of skills such as gardening, which would naturally complement
formal practical training, are neglected because of the apathy of the teachers and the
Boarding School personnel.
1. The Ministry of Ethnic Minorities will employ a Montagnard educator, detached for
this purpose by the Ministry of Education, who will form a Montagnard inspectorate
of education. The Montagnard educator in the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities will
have the authority to discipline teachers employed at Montagnard schools. In cases
of serious infractions or ineptitude, he will recommend transfer or dismissal of
teacher personnel. He will, in coordination with the Ministry of Education, inter-
view and determine the qualifications and suitability of teachers assigned to teach
in Montagnard schools. The Montagnard educator will have full management respon-
sibility for the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities Boarding School program. In coordi-
nation with the Ministry of Education, the Montagnard educator will devise curricu-
lum changes so that the education process is more relevant to the conditions in Monta-
gnard areas. The educator will be responsible for establishing procedures for the
selection of students for higher education and in coordination with the Ministry of
Education will review decree laws and sponsor changes in the laws to eliminate bias
IV-B-6 -2
Approved ForUNCLA&%F1I:E-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 CIA Approved For Release 2004/04/01 ~ C.~ ~ QP~> ~ l 20R001100010001-4
in favor of students having the benefit of better teacher personnel and facilities.
The Montagnard educator, although not directly responsible, will serve as an
advisor for the program sponsored by the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities through the
National Montagnard Training Center to eliminate illiteracy among adults and youth.
2. The Ministry of Ethnic Minorities in cooperation with the Ministry of Education will
develop a plan for general compulsory education for Montagnards to be implemented
within three years. In coordination with the Ministry of Education, it will sponsor
an Arrete for the immediate application of compulsory education at the primary
level in all Montagnard hamlets which have a school.
3. A two-week course in Boarding School management will be given twice in 1971 at the
National Montagnard Training Center in Pleiku for the sixty Boarding School Manage-
ment personnel employed by the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities.
4. The National Montagnard Training Center at Pleiku will provide basic training to all
illiterate trainees who attend courses at the center.
5. A special course in literacy will be required for 260 Son Thon Education Cadre and
260 Village Education Commissioners at the National Montagnard Training Center in
Pleiku in 1971.
6. In cooperation with the Ministry of Education and the Ministry of Information, the
Ministry of Ethnic Minorities will use its information program as a means of
encourag ing school attendance and to urge the elimination of illiteracy.
7. All High School students will receive a special course in the techniques of teaching
literacy and will be encouraged to use these techniques in their villages during
vacation periods. Village Chiefs will give a special certificate to students who are
active in this effort.
8. A special class six will be established in all Montagnard schools to assist students in
qualifying for class seven.
IV-B-6-3
Approved For Release 2004"LA-SS$FIEDoooi 1000100 01-4
 Approved For Release 2004UNCLAS El OR001100010001-4
TAB 7: Social Welfare, to Appendix B: Ethnic Minorities
Enhance living conditions of the people so that they feel secure in their homes and have
confidence and interest in the development of their own community and the political
social and economic development of Vietnam. Through timely and effective support,
reassure the people that in times of need or emergency the government is ready, willing,
and able to support them.
There are sufficient personnel in the Son Thon Cadre, the Ethnic Minority service, the
various other services in the provinces, the Ethnic Minority cadres, students, and
teachers as well as village and hamlet officials to conduct effective social welfare
activities among the Montagnard people. In addition, there are a variety of organizations
such as the schools, the Vietnamese Ethnic Minority Association, the Unity Movement
for All Highland Montagnards, the Cham Association, and voluntary assistance agencies
which can provide assistance and guidance to social welfare activities.
A basic problem in the social welfare area is that the government has not made a genuine
effort at conducting the research necessary to gain an understanding of the Montagnard
population, their tribes, their customs, their social life. Plans involving social welfare
as well as other development plans are frequently off-target or misapplied or are mis-
understood by the people because they come into conflict with long established and
frequently valid reasons for doing things in certain ways. To a large extent, planning is
done for the entire country and the fact that there are fundamental differences in climate
and custom is often forgotten by ministries. At the same time the Ministry for Ethnic
Minorities has been unable to effectively explain the needs and special considerations that
must be taken into account when dealing in Montagnard areas.
Among the Montagnards themselves, there is a lack of understanding of people's organi-
zations in the social sense. There is a lack of organizations such as the boy scouts.
There is no organization for Montagnard soldier veterans and there is no arrangement
for the care, pensioning, and welfare of disabled veterans and their widows, in spite
of the fact that these soldiers have made a vital contribution to the defense of South
Vietnam.
Although it is generally recognized that the Montagnard population is underemployed, little
effort is being made to train these underemployed persons in skills which will make them
more productive and make their life more satisfying to themselves and those around them.
There is a considerable amount of work being done by a variety of volunteer relief and
educational organizations.
For security reasons and convenience of control, the government has made it a practice
IV-B-7-1
Approved For Release 2004iK LIASIFIiEfoRO01100010001-4
 Approved For FUl[OKS DP80RO172OR001100010001-4
to shift groups of Montagnard population to areas more secure or more conveniently con-
trolled. These shifts in population have resulted in a major disruption of life and the
loss of property, standing crops, and a sense of identification with the land. They have
also tended to make the people lose confidence in the government because in too many
cases the government had not made sufficient advance preparation for the moves. Re-
fugee relief is often not timely, insufficient in terms of the need, and complicated by
bureaucratic procedures which the people do not fully understand.
The recruitment of Montagnard National Police has been hindered by the fact that the
standards for recruitment for police who will work in Montagnard areas are the same
as those applied to police who are working, in more developed areas. Those police who
have been recruited receive no guidance or direction on the matter of local customs,
and their own actions frequently lead to misunderstanding and distrust.
1. Under the direction of the Minister of State for Cultural Affairs, the staff at the
national museum will initiate a program of research to compile data and information
on Montagnards which can be used as a foundation for establishing realistic programs
so that these programs make a genuine contribution to the development of the people
socially, economically, and politically and at the same time preserve fundamental
traditions and culture. The National Museum will enlist the assistance of all minist-
ries and agencies in this effort. The objective will be the preparation of a National
gazeteer on Montagnard tribes and areas.
2. The Director General of National Police, in cooperation with the Ministry of Ethnic
Minorities, will establish recruiting standards for Montagnard police and will
devise a training program that will suit them for service in Montagnard areas. In
devising this program, the DGNP will consult with and obtain advice from local
judges and courts so that an appropriate manual or guidance can be prepared for
Montagnard police.
3. Teachers and Boarding School managers will be responsible for instructing Mont-
agnard youth in schools on Montagnard social problems such as alcdldis m. and
illiteracy and will encourage the students to work for the accomplishment of govern-
ment social policies in Montagnard areas.
Vocational training given to Montagnards, while not ignoring modern techniques and
equipment, will take into account that such equipment is not readily available in
Montagnard villages and hamlets and those responsible will insure that the Mont.
agnard students receive training with equipment and materials that are usually
available.
5. The Ministry of Social Welfare and the Ministry for Ethnic Minorities will establish
a procedure for the continued inspection of resettlement areas to insure that genuine
development occurs in these places and to identify and correct the problems which
lead people to abandon these resettlement areas.
6. The Ministry for Ethnic Minorities will establish liaison with private investors and
organizations to further vocational training of Montagnards and secure employment
as skilled workers for those who have or are receiving training.
7. The Ministry of National Defense, the Ministry of Veteran Affairs, and the Ministry
IV-B-7-2
Approved For UC IIFI:Fa-RDP80RO1720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004HC LA-M Fff 0OR001100010001-4
for Ethnic Minorities will prepare the necessary decrees to provide benefits for
disabled Montagnard irregular soldiers or war widows which are
equivalent to those given other Vietnamese.
8. The Ministry for Ethnic Minorities together with the Ministry of Social Welfare and
the Ministry of Information will use the information program as a means for explain-
ing to Montagnard refugees what the responsibilities of the government are in their
regard and the limit of those responsibilities and government assistance.
10. The Montagnards will be encouraged to establish Peoples' Organizations in the Mont-
agnard areas such as womens' organizations for the sponsorship of orphanages and
farmer-worker organizations.
11. As a part of training at the National Montagnard Training Center at Pleiku, all village
and hamlet officials and cadre will receive training in the establishment and operation
of Peoples' Organizations.
12. Mission organizations will be encouraged to establish additional orphanages in Mont-
agnard areas and they will receive support from the Ministry for Ethnic Minorities.
13. Government policy will be to move security to the people rather than the people to
security.
14. Where there are qualified Montagnard personnel, the Ministry for Social Welfare will
appoint such personnel to serve as chiefs of the Social Welfare Service in provinces
with a heavy Montagnard population.
IV-B-7-3
Approved For Release 20040A&L&MVIDOR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release UNUMIMP
To insure that the Montagnard people have a fair share in the economic development and
exploitation of the resources in Montagnard areas. To make it possible, through part-
icipation,for the Montagnard people to carry out development themselves. In cooperation
with the government, and Vietnamese and international investors, use the natural re-
sources and assets in Montagnard areas.
Montagnard areas are rich in natural and agricultural resources which can support major
food production enterprises and industrial activity dependent on mineral and forest wealth.
In populated areas, security is now at a satisfactory level and adminstrative services are
available to permit a start in post-war economic development. There is an ample supply
of both Vietnamese and Montagnard labor and there are some technicians who can be
employed. The government has established national development corporations and has
procedures for the making of investments in new industries by Vietnamese and Inter-
national investors. Basic post-war development planning for the area has already been
initiated and some data is available for completing those plans.
Although mineral wealth is known to exist in the Montagnard areas, no systematic
geological survey has been made. The area has demonstrable agricultural potential but,
due to poor security, little has beeh done in experimenting with new varieties of
agricultural products,and existing commerical crop production has declined.
Speculators and profiteers who have accepted high risks have managed to gain control of
much of the existing economic activity in the area and they have shown little willingness
to cooperated in development beneficial for all the people; in some areas, they have used
their interest to bring about a decline in production and quality so that products will not
compete with other products in which they have a financial interest.
Montagnard labor is being exploited in many places so that the workers do not receive a
fair wage and in some cases they are forced to accept produce rather than money for their
labor.
Although the populated areas are now secure, many areas known to have economic
potential are unpopulated and still do not have good security. The enemy persists in
his campaign designed to sow seeds of doubt and distrust among the Montagnard pop-
ulation as to the intentions of the Vietnamese and foreign investors. Post-war planning
is not being explained to the people in the area; they lack information about the economic
intentions of Vietnam and are suspicious of economic developments which they fear will
deprive them of land and livelihood. There are few commercial banks in the area, and
although there is considerable wealth among Montagnards, it is not being mobilized nor
IV-B-8-1
Approved For Release MKOMMU1022OR001
 Approved For fliNt E1 SifltBRDP80RO1720R001100010001-4
is it being used as collateral for credit. With a few exceptions, the Montagnards are
unfamiliar with accounting, banking and commercial practices and there is a shortage
of Montagnard skilled labor and merchants.
2. The Ministry for Ethnic Minorities and the various National Development Corpor-
ations will coordinate on economic development of the Montagnard areas. Together
with the Ministry of Information they will establish an information program designed
to explain post-war development plans to the Monl:agnard population and will publi-
cize economic proposals so that the people clearly understand their effect.
3. The Ministry of Finance will encourage expansion of commercial banking in Mont-
agnard areas so that Montagnard entrepreneurs who can qualify have a source of
credit available for starting enterprises or expanding existing enterprises.
4. The Ministry of Agriculture and the Ministry for Ethnic Minorities will encourage
the establishment of Montagnard growers' associations and growers' cooperatives
for the marketing of cash crops in the market, rather than through middlemen, and
for the purpose of establishing Montagnard.controlled plantations.
5. The Ministry of Labor will investigate labor abuses in Montagnard areas and will in-
sure that labor laws are being obeyed. Both the Ministry of Labor and labor unions
will encourage and assist in the organization of Montagnard labor so that the
laborers can resist exploitation. It is the specific responsibility of the Ministry of
Labor to assure that the practice of bartering for labor is eliminated.
The National Development Corporations and the Ministry of Ethnic Minorities will
publicize and encourage Vietnamese and international investment in Montagnard
areas and will specifically encourage the development of a dairy and cattle in-
dustry and the development of a fruit growing industry, Surveys will be conducted
to assess the true worth of industrial development based on known or discovered
natural resources, and private investors will be invited to make proposals for the
establishment of such industries.
7. Because the Montagnard areas are underpopulated and the practice is already es-
tablished of moving Vietnamese refugees into the area, the Ministry of Social Wel-
fare, in coordination with the Ministry for Ethnic Minorities,will examine the feasi-
bility of moving Montagnards from land-short areas in MR 1 to MR Z. This is a
means of populating the area with people accustomed to the environment, who have
no economic future in their present locations.
8. The Ministry of Education will insure that courses in commercial subjects are made
available to High School students in Montagnard areas and the Ministry for Ethnic
Minorities will encourage High School students to study commercial skills.
9. The Directorate of Postal and Telegraph Services will establish service in Phu Bon
and Quang Duc provinces.
10. The Ministry of Public Works will continue its program of road repair and improve-
ment and will in sure that all major population centers in the Montagnard areas are
TV-13-8-2
Approved For941GLA&8'FJ:[R-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2UdRA=1720R001100010001-4
accessible by road and that the road system from the areas to ports and coastal regions
are efficient.
1T; The National Montagnard Training Center at Pleiku will insure that all Village and
Hamlet Officials and cadres are familiar with post-war development planning as it
affects Montagnard areas.
IV-B-8-3
Approved For Release 2IJNCLA11F IED1720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 20INCLXSITI 20R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
TAB 9: Land Reform, to Appendix B: Ethnic Minorities.
To implement existing decrees respecting land reform in Montagnard areas, particularly
the decree defining h.amlet boundaries, and prepare additional decrees relating to the sale
of Montagnard lands and the settlement of claims arising from confiscation of lands since
1954. To establish a sense of responsibility for the land among Montagnard people.
Land reform decrees exist which provide the legal process of settling individual titles to
land and to secure communal title to all lands located within the living areas, including
fields and forests, of a Montagnard hamlet. To implement these decrees the Ministry
for Land Reform has service personnel in all the Montagnard areas and there are ZOO
Montagnard cadre who are available to assist in conducting surveys and settling disputes
that arise in the course of land reform.
A traditional land management system already exists in Montagnard hamlets.
The Government can use the information program to educate and publicize its plans and
intentions with respect to land reform. The government has at its disposal the personnel
in the Ethnic Minority Service, the Ethnic Minority District Offices, Montagnard Village
and Hamlet officials, Son Then Cadres and high school students, all of whom can play a
role in bringing about a peaceful solution to the land problem. There are procedures
available to the people to protest injustices involving confiscation of lands and abuses of
the established land laws.
Although the legal means exist to settle land problems, the people do not understand the
land reform decrees nor do they understand how to make complaints when they believe
that their rights to land are being abused. The people are indifferent, if not opposed, to
government land reform programs, because they fear that these land reform activities
are a prelude to taxation and the government has not explained its intentions with respect
to taxation of Montagnard lands.
Since 1954, the government's resettlement policies have resulted in moving many Mont-
agnards away from their traditional lands and, in some cases, newcomers have been
settled on the land from which Montagnards were moved. There are countless cases of
either government or private confiscation of Montagnard lands without compensation. The
people are aware that confiscation in other parts of Vietnam cannot be done without legal
process and or compensation and they expect equal treatment.
The Montagnard population resents the fact that they have had their land exploited by their
own leaders as well as Vietnamese with no effort at compensating them for the loss of
timber and other resources growing on or contained in the land. At the present time, the
Montagnard population is not protected adequately against unfair exploitation of their
IV-B-9-1
Approved For Release 2004 Cj: OWI DoRool 100010001-4
 Approved For [0kSA"1r DP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
land. Their ignorance regarding the value of the land itself and its resources makes
exploitation easy.
1. The National Montagnard Training Center at Pleiku will be responsible for instructing
every trainee on the land reform program for the Montagnard areas. Special emphasis
will be placed on insuring that Village and Hamlet officials thoroughly understand the
land reform process, their obligations with respect to the program, and the rights of
the people under the program.
2. A special technical course in land reform will be established at the National Mont-
agnard Training Center to train 200 Son Thon cadres so that they are qualified to
render assistance to the Ministry of Land Reform in the execution of the Land Reform
Program. Four, four-week courses for 50 students each will be given at the
beginning of 1971.
3. The boundaries for 400 Montagnard hamlets will be defined in 1971 and individual
title to land will be given for 40, 000 hectares of land.
4. The Ministry for Ethnic Minorities will develop an information program in coordi-
nation with the Ministry of Land Reform and the Ministry of Information for the
purpose of fully explaining and publicizing the land reform program itself.
5. The Ministry for Ethnic Minorities together with the Ministry of Justice and the
Ministry for Land Reform will conduct research and prepare two decrees; one
prescribing the process to be used for the purchase of lands in Montagnard areas
which will insure that Montagnard people are not dealt with unfairly and one
which will establish a process for settling legitimate claims to land arising as
a result of confiscation since 1954.
6. The Information program and individual village and hamlet chiefs as well as Son Thon
Cadre will be used to make sure that the people know how to properly file complaints
relating to land matters.
7. High School students will receive special indoctrination in land reform during the
school year and will be encouraged to explain the program to the people in their
village when they are on vacation. High School teachers and Boarding School
Managers will be responsible for this indoctrination. The Ethnic Minority service
will, in coordination with the Land reform service, insure that material and information
is made available to the schools.
8. Montagnard village chiefs will be responsible for insuring that hamlet chiefs portion
out and make individual families responsible for the care and cleanliness of the land
in the immediate vicinity of their houses. Village and hamlet chiefs will be instructed
on this matter during their training at Pleiku.
IV-B-9-2
Approved ForUCLAS/SFIIED-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/19N L"SIMIR001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
This Annex designates the responsibility and drafting procedures for the 1971 Community
Defense and Local Development Plans to be prepared in the Prefecture, Provinces,and
Autonomous cities. It also designates the required periodic reporting procedures.
Approved For Release 2004/0~N C&A&&1Fi " D001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/ffft [II,tOROOl 100010001-4
ANNEX V: PLANS AND REPORTS
Appendix A: Plans.
I. FORMAT.
The plans prepared by the Pacification and Development Councils of the Provinces and
Autonomous Cities must contain the following:
1. General: (Brief statements on the local general situation, and status of pro-
gress of the 1970 P&D Plan. )
2. Concept: Clearly mention the principles and concepts necessary to properly
achieve the three basic objectives and to implement all programs.
3. Implementation: - Area security.
- Basic criteria.
- Coordination instructions.
4. Goals established for the district.
The basic plan should be simple. Charts and overlays showing the initial situa-
tion and the desired situation to be achieved should be attached.
1. The objectives of Local Self-Defense, Local-Self Government, and Local Self-
Development should be discussed in detail in Annexes I, II, and III.
2. The detailed programs will be presented in the appendices to be attached to the
appropriate Annexes. Each annex must include adequate technical explanations
and procedures so the responsible provincial services and offices will be able
to attain the desired results in implementation (the goals established by the
CPDC or the MR/PDC).
Standard symbols will be used for overlays. All symbols will be printed in black,
unless otherwise instructed.
National border
Provincial boundaries
District boundaries
Road vital to Pacification Plan
V-A-I
Approved For Release 2004/01 CLLA&&IFIEDR001 100010001-4
 Approved For ftn1/1fJ1:-RDP80R01720R001 100010001-4
(red) Unserviceable railway
(blue) Railway to be made serviceable
(blue) Secure Area
(yellow) Consolidation Area
(yellow) Border Area
No symbol Area under GVN Control
(red) VC/NVA base area
(green) Land Reform
J / Unpopulated area
0 (red) Location of VC Village Liberation Committee
(Ti) (red) Location of VC District Liberation Committee
A Active base, Platoon sized
(yellow) Secure Road (on in day time)
(red) Insecure road
(red)
(yellow) Road to be secured in day time
(yellow)
(blue) Road to be secured for both day and night time
(blue) Waterway vital to Pacification Plan
(yellow) Secure waterway (Day time only)
(red) Insecure waterway
(red)
(yellow) Waterway to be secured in day time
(yellow)
(blue) Waterway to be secured both day and night
V-A-2
Approved For IINCLA5 IF1 fIIJRDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/0(M:fff5QR2
5IFnff001100010001-4
a O
X1
x
n
RF
Active base, Company sized
Present watchtower
To be built in 1970
To be deleted in 1970
ARVN Battalion, PF Platoon, RF Company
responsible for territory security (Unit desig-
nation will be written on the right)
Available pacification resource to be made
available.
Black - Force
Blue - Center; outpost
Example PTNT 14 = RD cadre
CBST 13 = Son Thon Cadre
HCV (Blue) Chieu Hoi Center
Standard Abbrevation Table for Resources Symbols - VN
CBTS - Son Thon Cadre
CBTT - Information Cadre
CLQ - ARVN
CSDC - National Police Field Force
CSDB - Police Special Branch
CSGC - Marine Police
CSQG - National Police
DHDB - District Intelligence Operational Control Center
DHGB-HQ - Province Intelligence Operational Control Center
DPQ - Regional Force
DTLCT - Temporary Refugee Camp
HCV - Chieu Hoi
NDTV - People Self Defense Force
NQ - Popular Force
QC - Military Police
TTST - Provincial Reconnaissance Unit
VTTT - Armed Propaganda Team
PTNT - RD Cadre
V-A-3
Approved For Release 2004/041JNCLASSiF1I[(D001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200UNUMIMfl20R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
Appendix B: Reports.
I. PURPOSE.
This appendix provides guidance in the preparation of the province /autonomous city
reports and MR overviews.
A. The Province/Autonomous City reports and the MR Overview are basic documents
used to measure the progress of Community Defense and Local Development through-
out the country. Based on these reports, the Central Government can assess the
difficulties encountered in execution of the Community Self Defense and Local Develop-
ment Plan.
B. The Province Chief/Mayor, concurrently Chairman of Provincial /Autonomous City
P&DC, will report to the President, concurrently Chairman of the CPDC, and furnish
copies to the MR Commander, Chairman of MR P&DC. The MR Commander, con-
currently Chairman of the MR P&DC, will report to the President, concurrently
Chairman of the CPDC, through the Prime Minister, concurrently Secretary General
of the CPDC.
All Province Chiefs/Mayors, concurrently Chairmen of Provincial/ Municipal PDCs,
will prepare and sign their monthly reports of their provinces/cities. When preparing
their reports, Province Chiefs and Mayors will give appropriate weight and considera-
tion to the comments and suggestions of their provincial staff (civilian and military).
Based on the province reports, each MR Commander, concurrently MR PDC Chairman,
will write a monthly MR Field Overview. The MR Commander, MR PDC Chairman,
will add comments pertaining to and corrective action taken by the MR to solve pro-
blems contained in the province report, which the MR has consolidated for presenta-
tion to the CPDC.
IV. PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF REPORTS.
A. The province/city report contains two parts: -
- the first part, which is the narrative;
- the second part, a statistical report.
V-B-1
Approved For Release 2004/UN CIAI IE D R001100010001-4
 Approved Fo ease 2004/04/01 : CIA-RDP80R0l720R001100010001-4
I11CLASSIFIED
1. The narrative will be submitted to the Prime Minister and the President in
accordance with the following:
- It must be accurate and present only those developments which have occurred
since the last reporting period.
- It must not be longer than five pages, size 21 x 27 cm (8 x 10 1/2).
- It will not repeat previously submitted information unless there are changes.
- It must convey the thoughts of the person who directly and measureably con-
tributed to the overall evaluation of the situation in the province.
- The province report form is attached. (TAB 1)
2. The statistical report format will be distributed later in a circular.
The MR Overview has similarity with the province report, but it must be no longer
than three typed pages and does not necessarily include routine material. Its pur-
pose is to provide the President and Ministries a general evaluation of the develop-
ment efforts of the Military Regions. The Military Region Overview is attached
(TAB 2). The province report will be hand-carried to the appropriate MR/PDC/CC
(Administrative and Report Service) not later than the third of each month. The
original copies of the report will be submitted personally to the CPDC/CC by the
Chief of PPDC/CC not later than the fifth of the month. The MR Overview and the
statistical summary for the entire MR will be hand-carried and submitted to the
CPDC/CC not later than the fifth of the month.
C. The CPDC/CC will use the province reports and the MR Overviews received on the
fifth of each month to prepare a consolidated report to be submitted prior to the
tenth of the month to the Prime Minister, Secretary General of CPDC, and the
President, Chairman of CPDC. This report will designate those provinces and MRs
not included in the summary because no report or overview was received on the day
specified.
V-B-2
Approved FIN EAS Jf 0IA-RDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 200tfflt L
Subject: Community Defense and Local Development Report for Month of
. ? 1971
A. Overall Status of the Community Defense and Local Development Plan:
Presents the overall progress of the Community Defense and Local Development Plan
during the month (similar to a short briefing on the general situation which would be given
to a visitor).
B. Situation and Problems:
Separately and briefly presents by each objective of the Community Defense and Local
Development Plan, both the significant results achieved, short-falls, and problems
affecting the programs.
1. Self-Defense
a. Territorial Security (including enemy situation)
b. PSDF
c. National Police
d. Phung Hoang
e. Chicu Hoi
2. Self-Government
a. People's Administration
b. People's Information
c. People's Organization
d. Youth Program
Agriculture /Fishery Development
Distribution of Land
Industrial and Economic Development
War Veterans
War Victims
Public Health and Education
Communication and Transportation
Public Works
National Development Budget
Provincial Development Budget
Village Development Budget
Municipal Development Budget
V-B-1-c1
Approved For Release 20RICL:A SIFIED720R001100010001-4
1971 COMMUNITY DEFENSE AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN
 Approved For RU I% DMIt ffB,DP80ROl
C, Action Recommended to the Central. Government:
Th`:s should be brief statements of the problems, local action taken to alleviate the
problems, and required action which exceeds the local capability and is recommended
to be taken by the Central Government.
V-B-1-2
Approved For &I9 I EB-RDP80RO172OR001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/I NUINTIEffV-M
R001100010001-4
Subject: Comment on Progress of Community Defense and Local Development Plan of
. . . . . . . . . .1 1971.
A. General Situation of Community Defense and Community Development Effort:
Report the month's general progress of the Community Defense and Local Development
Plan of the region (similar to a briefing on the general situation to a visiting official).
Report separately and briefly by each objective of the Community Defense and Local
Development Plan, noteworthy accomplishments, shortfalls, and problems affecting the
programs.
a. Territorial Security (including enemy situation)
b. PSDF
c. National Police
d. Phung Hoang
e. Chieu Hoi
2. Self-Government
a. People's Administration
b. People's Information
c. People's Organizations
d. Youth Program
3. Self-Development
Agriculture /Fishery Development
Land Distribution
Industrial and Economic Development
Veterans
War Victims
Health and Education
Communication and Transportation
Public Works
National Development Budget
Provincial Development Budget
Village Development Budget
Municipal Development Budget
V-B-2-1
Approved For Release 2004 CLA SSIFi 'I DOR001100010001-4
 Approved For l~~0~~~~MDP80R01720R001100010001-4
Remarks should be included on those supplementary measures taken by the MRs to solve
the problems discussed in the Provincial reports.
C. Future Problems and Plans:
Forecast the major problems which may occur and which need consideration in the
Central Government's planning. Briefly analyze the future; i. e. , important events,
anticipated progress or delay in the Community Defense and Local Development effort,
any enemy change in effort, or the necessity to review the MRs' plans.
J. Recommended Solutions by the Central Government:
Comment on individual recommendations in the provincial reports. Discuss actions taken
to solve problems or recommend actions to be taken by the Central Government.
V-B..2-2
Approved For JPFl__2kS5lf'EIBRDP80R01720R001100010001-4
 Approved For Release 2004/04/01 : CIA-RDP80ROl 720R001 100010001 -4
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For ROOMPIfEN1rj 80R01 720R001 100010001 -4